NEW PAGE BOOKS
A division of The Career Press, Inc.
Franklin Lakes, NJ

A1title cip.pmd

1

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

Copyright  2004 by Dr. Bruce Goldberg
All rights reserved under the Pan-American and International
Copyright Conventions. This book may not be reproduced, in whole
or in part, in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage
and retrieval system now known or hereafter invented, without
written permission from the publisher, The Career Press.
PAST LIVES, FUTURE LIVES REVEALED
Cover design by Cheryl Cohan Finbow
Printed in the U.S.A. by Book-mart Press
To order this title, please call toll-free 1-800-CAREER-1 (NJ
and Canada: 201-848-0310) to order using VISA or MasterCard, or
for further information on books from Career Press.

Dedication
This book is dedicated to my thousands of patients
who have been kind enough to share their past and
future lives with me, without which this book would
not have been possible. In addition, I dedicate this
book to the Universal Laws, which, when followed,
allow us all to grow and eventually ascend.

Acknowledgments
I would like to thank Michael Lewis, Acquisitions
Editor of New Page Books, for his interest and assistance
in bringing this book to the public. In addition, my heartfelt gratitude goes out to my editor, Nicole DeFelice.
Without her experience and detailed supervision, this
bookâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s final form would be quite different. Finally, I cannot express enough appreciation to my typist, Marianne
Colasanti, for her tireless efforts and spiritual support.

Throughout this book, I will present cases of my patients who
have seen their past and future lives. For those of you who assume a belief in reincarnation places you in the minority, think
again. A recent Gallup poll showed that 58 percent of Americans
accept the concept of reincarnation.1
We will also explore the concept of future lives and detail
time travelers from our future who come back in time and
interact with us. The concept of fragments of our own soul
from past lives (subpersonalities) will be presented along with
case histories.
In order for you to experience these fascinating time excursions, I present several hypnotic exercises to guide you backward and forward through time.
There are many patterns we exhibit today that can easily
be traced back to prior lifetimes. Obesity is often related to
starvation in past lives. Desertion of a family member in centuries past can lead to an overprotective parent today. A fear of
water today can result from a past life drowning. In addition,
Egyptians cherish cats; a child killed by a bomb in World War
II fears loud noises today; a man who was a celibate priest who
always prayed for resistance to sexual urges during the Middle
Ages is impotent today; and a woman who saw her children
die of scarlet fever in the 19th century and swore she would
never have another child is barren in the 21st century.

7

B0Intro.pmd

7

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

8

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Those examples illustrate some of the principles of karma
(cause and effect) and reincarnation. Let us explore this theory
in detail with a case of male homosexuality I treated utilizing
past life regression through hypnosis.
A male homosexual came to my office with the desire to
eliminate his previous sexual behavioral patterns. During a
past life in ancient Rome as a female prostitute, he (as a she)
very much enjoyed the work of sexually satisfying men.
In another past life in England during the early 1800s,
this male patient was again a female. His life was that of a
shopkeeper’s wife. This was a hard life, as her husband was a
cruel man who was selfish in bed and physically abused his
wife. Having sex with him was more of “doing her duty.” The
only solace she had in life was a lesbian relationship with a
neighbor. In this life, she learned the pleasures of homosexual
love, whereas her heterosexual relationship was completely
unsatisfying.
Within two months following therapy, this male patient
broke up with his male lover and has since become engaged to
a woman. Two years after this case was completed, a follow-up
conversation with this patient revealed that he is very happy
with his heterosexual relationship, and has had no relapses.
This case is a wonderful example of past life therapy’s
potential to resolve conflicts about sexuality. It is important
to recognize that I did not advocate that this male patient
should abandon being a practicing homosexual; the patient’s
own desire was to alter his sexual behavior patterns.
By exploring two of his past lives as a woman, my patient
likely gained several valuable insights about himself with regard to his feelings toward both men and women. But even
beyond the issue of sexual preference and gender identity, I
believe this case has much to say to us about a soul’s desire to
experience and advance through various social structures,
which was an unspoken subtext to this man’s story.
I think we can safely assume that the prostitute’s ability to
satisfy men sexually, while psychologically empowering to her,

B0Intro.pmd

8

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

9

Introduction

was associated with belonging to a taboo social class. By contrast, the English shopkeeper’s wife, while likely enjoying the
comforts and stature of belonging to a social class of greater
prestige, was psychologically powerless in an unhappy marriage to an abusive man. To meet her sexual needs, she became
engaged in a lesbian affair, embracing another kind of social
taboo.
It would appear that this soul had become well-skilled in
the use of sex as the currency of relationships, along with gaining an understanding that women in any social class, be they
prostitutes or housewives, are historically less powerful than
men. By taking on a male body, this soul may have reasonably
expected to continue climbing the ladder of social status that
being male guaranteed.
Because this soul had a pattern of living out sexual taboos, it is no surprise that he would, as a man, first adopt a
homosexual lifestyle, for which men in our culture have historically suffered social discrimination. Given this soul’s steady
social progression from lower class (prostitute) to middle class
(shopkeeper’s wife), it is also logical that he would want to
attain the more coveted, respected status of a male head-ofhousehold, which, of course, required forming a heterosexual
bond. Ironically, despite this soul’s experiences that women
have less power than men, only by winning the heart and hand
of a woman in this life could he achieve the social bearing it
would seem his soul desired. I believe the true test of growth
for this transgender soul in his present lifetime is to become
the kind of man with whom he, as a former she, may have loved
to be in relationship! As a former prostitute and abused housewife, his soul surely knows which pitfalls to avoid.
When my first book Past Lives—Future Lives was released
in 1982, it made quite an impression in the field, mostly because it was the first book ever written on future life progression.
It has since been an international best-seller and published in 10
languages. This has resulted in my being interviewed on hundreds of television and radio stations, including NBC, CBS,
CNN, and for The Washington Post, TIME, Los Angeles Times,

B0Intro.pmd

9

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

10

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

and programs such as Oprah, Coast to Coast with Art Bell, and
many others.
In 1994, CBS television aired a movie based on my second
book, The Search for Grace, on which I was the consultant.
Subsequently, I have been a consultant to television networks
and screenwriters from all over the world.
Past Lives窶認uture Lives has become a classic book in the
field and has led me to conduct more than 35,000 past life
progressions and future life progressions on more than
14,000 individuals since 1974. This has resulted in an evolution of my work to include energy healing through a technique I developed known as superconscience mind tap,
out-of-body experiences, working with UFO abductees, and
most importantly, patients who communicate with time travelers from our future.
We will discuss each of these tools throughout this book
by way of case histories and transcripts of the actual regressions and progressions involved. The technology of the future
and its effects upon our spiritual growth will also be explored.
Finally, the true purpose of our incarnation on this planet,
namely ascension, will be presented.
The exercises included in this completely updated book
will allow you to experience these fascinating techniques of
time travel and out-of-body travel, all of which are perfectly
safe and have been time-tested for 30 years.
Hypnosis is not a new discipline, and its use can be traced to
ancient Egypt. Actually, hypnosis is present in our lives today in
the form of advertising, teaching, sales, healthcare, and religion.
Hypnosis is a fascinating subject that has been unjustly
surrounded by myths and distortions such as connotations of
magic, the supernatural, and the occult. Many movies and
novels have contributed to these misconceptions. Since World
War II, experimentation and practice have led to rapid advances in our knowledge and techniques spurred on by its
widespread acceptance, in 1958, by the American Medical
Association.

B0Intro.pmd

10

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

11

Introduction

Hypnosis is being taught to doctors, police officers, lawyers,
clergymen, salesmen, athletes, executives, students, and many
others who have found it beneficial to their professions. All
hypnosis is really self-hypnosisâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;a state that the subject produces himself with the hypnotist serving only as the guide or
the teacher. Anyone who is willing to apply himself can learn
this technique.
Hypnosis is a natural and relaxing state of mind that we all
enter into for seven hours every day. Daydreams and dreams
during our sleep are examples of this phenomenon. Everyone
can be hypnotized to some extent. People will, however, vary
as to the depth acquired and the length of time required for
conditioning. All one needs to experience self-hypnosis is a
desire and the application of simple techniques.
Hypnosis is not a medicine or cure. It is a powerful tool
that may be used in therapy to assist people in such goals as
developing self-confidence, controlling habits, overcoming
shyness, relieving insomnia, developing hidden talents, improving memory and concentration, and putting order into
your life.
Here is a list of some of the goals that hypnosis can assist
you in achieving:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Facilitating a better career path.
Eliminating anxiety and depression.
Overcoming bereavement.
Eliminating headaches, including migraines.
Eliminating allergies and skin disorders.
Strengthening oneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s immune system to resist
diseases.
Eliminating habits, phobias, and other
negative tendencies (self-defeating
sequences).
Improving decisiveness.
Improving the quality of people, and
circumstances in general, that you attract into
your life.
Increasing your ability to earn and hold onto
money.
Overcoming obsessive-compulsive behavior.
Improving the overall quality of your life.
Improving psychic awarenessâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;ESP,
meditation, astral projection (out-of-body
experience), telepathy, superconscious mind
taps, and so on.
Eliminating the fear of death by viewing oneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
past and future lives.
Attracting a soul mate into your life.
Establishing and maintaining harmony of
body, mind, and spirit.

In summarizing hypnosis, we can state:
1. You cannot be hypnotized against your will, and
even after a hypnotic state is achieved, you will
be able to hear, talk, think, act, or open your eyes
at any time.

B0Intro.pmd

12

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

Introduction

13

2. Even a directly proposed hypnotic suggestion
cannot make you do anything against your morals, religion, or self-preservation. If such a suggestion were given, you would either refuse to
comply or would come out of the trance.
3. The ego cannot be detached in hypnosis, so secrets will not come out while in a trance, and you
wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t do anything you wouldnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t normally do if
you felt relaxed about the situation.
4. The best hypnotic subjects are not unintelligent
people. The more strong-willed, intelligent, and
imaginative you are, the better subject you will
probably be.
Most people who inquire about hypnosis are interested
in one of the following:
1. Overcoming a problem.
2. Accomplishing an objective.
3. Having an experience.
Hypnosis is certainly no magic wand, but when used correctly, it can give you an edge. It can provide you with a running start and help you open all the necessary doors as you
proceed towards achieving your goals.

Note to the Reader
This book is the result of the professional experiences
accumulated by the author since 1974, working individually
with more than 14,000 patients. The material included herein
is intended to complement, not replace, the advice of your
own physician, psychotherapist, or other healthcare professional, whom you should always consult about your circumstances before starting or stopping any medication or any other
course of treatment, exercise regimen, or diet.
At times, the masculine pronoun has been used as a
convenience. It is intended to indicate both male and female

B0Intro.pmd

13

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

14

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

genders where this is applicable. All names and identifying
references, except those of celebrities, have been altered to
protect the privacy of my patients. All other facts are accurate
and have not been altered.
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;Dr. Bruce Goldberg
Woodland Hills, California

B0Intro.pmd

14

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

My Mission

15

Chapter 1

My Mission

I can trace the origin of my mission to train others in spiritual growth, or as I like to refer to it, psychic empowerment,
back to February, 1969. Up until that time (I was 20 years old),
I had never had a brush with death.
I was a junior at Southern Connecticut State College in
New Haven, Connecticut, majoring in biology with a minor in
chemistry. My goal was to enter dental school in the fall of
1970; I had no metaphysical aspirations whatsoever. As my
semester break ended, I began to drive back to New Haven
from my parents’ home in East Meadow, Long Island.
As fate would have it, a severe snowstorm ensued. Being
excited about starting a new semester, I ignored my parents’
insistence that I postpone my departure until the weather subsided. The storm worsened as I approached the Bronx. My car
simply drifted into a pile of snow and I was stranded.
There were no cars on the highway and I knew I had to seek
shelter. As I got out of the car, I tried unsuccessfully to free my
car from the snow and drive to some safety. My gloves, pants,
and jacket became wet and I began to experience severe chills.
I wandered across the highway and noticed absolutely no
cars (police, taxis, etc.) out. It is impossible for me to estimate
how long I traveled, but I knew I was in trouble and would die
of exposure if I didn’t find shelter soon.

15

B1Chapter 1.pmd

15

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

16

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Suddenly, a woman’s soft voice entered my mind and instructed me to walk at a 45-degree angle from my current path.
I did so and soon came upon a neon sign that read “Tardis”
(not the well-known New York restaurant Sardis).
This Tardis establishment was a catering company and the
only open building in sight. I entered the building and my life
was literally saved by that alluring female voice. The Tardis
employee allowed me to warm up for a few hours, provided me
coffee, and one of their employees drove me to a subway station, as the snowstorm had eased. I then obtained a motel room
for the night and took a train to New Haven the following day.
My parents returned my car to me a week or so later.
The next phase of my mission occurred in 1972 during the
summer following my sophomore year in dental school at the
University of Maryland. Up until that time, I still had no metaphysical aspirations or interest. My life was dedicated to studying dentistry and not much else, as I had little money and had
to work my way through school.
One Saturday afternoon, I heard that same voice I encountered in 1969 and was instructed to go to a local bookstore in downtown Baltimore. At first I rejected the idea, but
decided I had little to lose. This bookstore was a New Age
one, and shortly after I entered it, a tall, young beautiful woman
with long blond hair and piercing blue eyes approached me.
As she spoke to me, I instantly recognized her voice as the
one I heard a just few minutes before. She was dressed in a
white gown and appeared as a Greek goddess. The only thing
she said to me was, “I think you will find this book both interesting and profound to your life’s work.” After handing me a
book, she dematerialized right before my very eyes!
The book that she gave me was Morey Bernstein’s The
Search for Bridey Murphy.1 This nonfiction book described a
documented case of reincarnation that resulted from Morey
Bernstein’s (a Colorado businessman) hypnotic regression of
a housewife named Virginia Tighe into a 19th century past
life in Cork, Ireland as one Bridey Murphy.

B1Chapter 1.pmd

16

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

My Mission

17

This book stimulated me to delve more into metaphysics
and parapsychology. I immediately began reading books on
astrology, numerology, tarot, reincarnation, and the like. It
was at this time that I decided to learn hypnosis and use it in
my future career for pain control and dental fears, which I
did throughout my 13 years of dental practice.
I also decided to experiment with hypnotic past life regression and see if I could elicit past lives from people. By
1974, I had established a part-time hypnotherapy practice and
began doing past life regressions. Later that year, following
my graduation from dental school, I moved to Florida to begin a general practice residency.
It was in Tallahassee that my professional life took a
fortuitous change. One of my patients regressed into several lives and reported many verifiable details. That wasnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t as
significant as the fact that she overcame two habits (bulimia
and smoking) and a water phobia as a result of these sessions.
At no time did I give her therapeutic suggestions to do anything but explore a past life. This demonstrated to me the
unlimited potential of past life therapy.
By 1976, I had moved back to Baltimore to begin my practice of dentistry (full time) and past life regression hypnotherapy (part time). One fateful day in 1977, I asked a patient
to go to the origin of her problem, not back to the cause. Instead of regressing to a prior life, she moved forward (progressed) to the 23rd century! This was the beginning of my
discovery and development of future life progression hypnotherapy, which is documented in my first book Past Livesâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;
Future Lives,2 and is the first book ever written on future life
progression.
Experimentation with more than 500 patients established
that it was not the data from past or future lives that resulted
in permanent changes in peopleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s lives, but rather communication with their Higher Self or superconscious mind (the perfect component of our subconscious mind or soul that
originally came from the God energy complex).

B1Chapter 1.pmd

17

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

18

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

This led me to develop my now famous superconscious
mind tap technique (or cleansing), which consists of introducing the patient’s subconscious mind (soul) to its Higher
Self. The Higher Self can now train the individual to allow
the perfect energy of the Higher Self to effect a raising of
the quality of the soul’s energy (frequency vibrational rate)
during the dream (REM) cycle. We are all out of the body and
have access to our Higher Self without the distraction of our
defense mechanisms (rationalization, intellectualization, displacement, sublimation, etc.) during our dream state.
The discovery of the superconscious mind tap truly revolutionized my practice and hopefully the entire field. By 1978,
my dental practice became my part-time profession, and hypnotherapy was my full-time calling.
Throughout the years, I have had dreams and other manifestations of this woman, whom I assume was a spirit guide. I
relocated my hypnotherapy office to Los Angeles and retired
from dentistry in 1989. In July of 1999, I finally discovered who
this entity is. Her name is Nemil and she is a time traveler
(“chrononaut”) from the 35th century when teleportation is
mastered for time traveling back and forward through time.
Time travelers use names that represent their missions.
Nemil is an acronym made from “millennium” and her mission
is to assist those individuals who will assist the spiritual growth
of our planet. I am only one of many people she works with.
Nemil knows Traksa, the time traveler from the 36th century that is pictured in my book Time Travelers from Our
Future3 and on my Website. I have had much communication
with him. There is most definitely a consciousness shift coming and these chrononauts are here to guide us through it to a
more positive future.

Superconscious Mind Tap
A superconscious mind tap is the process through which I
as a hypnotherapist introduce the patient’s subconscious mind

B1Chapter 1.pmd

18

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

My Mission

19

to its superconscious or Higher Self. This superconscious mind
level is perfect and thus, accessing or tapping into this level
results in a raising of the energy level of the patient’s subconscious mind. Therapy is accomplished through tapping
into this superconscious mind. Another term for a
superconscious mind tap is cleansing.
The first step in hypnotherapy is to improve this selfimage. If you build a house on quicksand, it won’t be around to
benefit from appreciation. I highly recommend the use of cassette tapes to help establish a sound and strong psychological
foundation from which patients can more fully understand their
karmic purpose and make strides toward fulfilling their karma.
Most of a patient’s therapy will take effect during the dream
level at night. Recent medical research establishes that we enter REM (rapid eye movement), a characteristic of the dream
state, for three hours each night. Because our defense mechanisms (willpower or analytical mind) cannot function once we
enter the sleep cycle, this is a most efficient cleansing opportunity.4 Our brain waves now appears as alpha waves. During
this dream state, the emotional cleansing necessary for our
survival occurs, but deeper energy cleansing is not part of this
survival function. It will not occur unless we are trained for it.
If we are properly trained, we will use approximately one hour
of the REM cycle to cleanse our alpha level. Because each
minute in hypnosis is equivalent to three of our earth minutes, three to four hours of therapeutic energy cleansing is
actually experienced by the patient. It is no wonder that this
therapy is so short, successful, and popular. The patient is trained
in relatively few sessions to be totally independent of the therapist and to attain any goal that is humanly possible. The patient uses superconscious mind cassette tapes to assist in this
goal.
There are three levels of manifestation of an issue. First,
there is the physical level. Using depression as an example, the
associated lack of energy and malaise are examples of the physical level. Next is the emotional level. In this example, unexplained crying would be a symptom of this level. The last and

B1Chapter 1.pmd

19

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

20

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

most important level is the energy level. This level is the actual
frequency vibrational rate of the patient’s alpha level or subconscious mind. In other words, this is the level of spiritual
growth or karmic status of the individual. The energy level
controls the emotional level, which in turn influences the
physical level. Thus, the only level I am concerned with when I
conduct a hypnotherapy session is the energy level. Once we
raise the patient’s frequency vibrational rate to a new threshold—a major breakthrough—this new level or rate is established and irreversible. The patient may plateau for a while,
but this new rate cannot be lowered. Thus, the emotional and
physical symptoms, as well as the causes, are resolved by treating the ultimate cause, which is the patient’s energy level or
frequency vibrational rate.

ENERGY LEVEL
EMOTIONAL LEVEL
PHYSICAL LEVEL
CLEANSING
Figure 1

You will note that the arrows always flow down from the
energy level to the physical, but not in reverse; also observe
that the energy level can change the physical level directly
without having to use the emotional level as an intermediary.
An example of this latter phenomenon would be the removal
of psychosomatic pain or a headache.
How does past life regression, age progression, or future
life progression fit into this approach? The answer is simple.
These techniques are used as stepping stones to reach the
superconscious mind and to satisfy the patient’s curiosity.

B1Chapter 1.pmd

20

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

My Mission

21

These techniques, taken together, account for approximately
5 percent of the therapy; 95 percent of any therapeutic result
will come from cleansing at the superconscious level.
This cleansing will also greatly reduce the time and number of sessions required to train patients to resolve their conflicts and maximize their potential. Thus, it is not necessary to
explore past or future lives for this therapy to work. Because
this is not cognitive or analytical therapy, I am not particularly
interested in the intellectual “cause” of the issue. In this type
of therapy, process is everything. The whys are not important.
All that is necessary is that the patient must be motivated to
attain a goal, that goal must be possible to attain, and the
patient must trust the therapist. As long as these three conditions are met, any goal is achievable.
Throughout the therapeutic process, a patient will experience good days and bad days. The bad days are actually
more therapeutic, because during these days, the energy
needed by the conscious mind in order to interfere with the
therapy is drained, so the defense mechanism is disengaged.
The purpose of our defense mechanisms (rationalization,
intellectualization, displacement, etc.) is to keep our behavior the same. To this end, they will do anything to disrupt
change. Fortunately, the defense mechanisms’ energy supply is limited. Every time they exert themselves, they are literally burning themselves out. Good days do not result in a
direct drain to the defense mechanisms, but do indirectly
sap their energy. By raising one’s energy level (frequency
vibrational rate), as a result of these good days, the defense
mechanisms must expend even more energy in their attempt
to reverse this therapeutic progress. Because our subconscious mind has an unlimited energy supply (by accessing the
superconscious mind), it will always win in the end.

B1Chapter 1.pmd

21

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

22

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 2

The Big Picture

So you say you don’t believe you have lived in a past life?
Well, lie back, get comfortable and close your eyes while I count
slowly from 10…9…8…7….
Just mention hypnosis and most people have visions of falling into deep trance that leave them completely helpless. Of
course, they are in the hands of a hypnotist who wields total
control and can make them do anything he wants them to.
If that is what you think hypnosis is, you’re about to be
enlightened.
Actually, you hypnotize yourself every day. The average person slips into an alpha trance or hypnotic state from three to
six hours a day. You probably call it a daydream, lost in your
thoughts, or becoming engrossed in a television show or movie.
Another name for hypnosis is deep relaxation, which is all
that this process entails. While in hypnosis, you are aware of
all that is happening around you and won’t or can’t be forced
to do anything you don’t want to do.
All you are doing is bypassing your conscious mind and
allowing your subconscious to come through. Your subconscious is a vast storehouse of information and abilities and
is supposed to include details about your present, past, and
future life experiences.

22

B2chapter 2.pmd

22

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

The Big Picture

23

To get an idea of how regression works, sit back for a
moment and reflect back on your childhood. Like most
people, your mind will skip from significant event to significant event. You’re regressing. While it is not as accurate or
deep as hypnotic regression, it’s basically the same idea.
Your future lives are not necessarily better than the one
you’re living now. The pathway to perfection is full of ruts and
holes, it seems. Many people think they spent their past lives
as kings, queens, and clerics. Fact is, the average person has
had 1,000 or more lives and they can be, to put it kindly, varied.
You would probably find that you’ve been a little bit of everything you wanted, or didn’t want to be.
I believe we are basically energy, tuned to a particular
wavelength, so to speak. That energy, or the soul, leaves the
body at the point of death and goes on to what we’ll call
the soul plane. It is there that you evaluate your life and
become acclimated to your new existence with the help of
spirit guides and our Higher Self (the perfect component
of our soul).
On this “other side,” there is no time or space. This is
where you choose your next life, including where, when, and
how you will be born, who your parents, relatives, and friends
will be, and the major events in your life.
All of this is designed for you to learn lessons or to change
your karmic cycle, which simply means, “what you sow, ye shall
reap.” The positive and negative things you do in this life will
be carried over and karmic debts paid or received according to
your own plan.
Because there is no time or space on the other side, it is
possible to incarnate at different times in our sense of history
past, present, or future. The objective of reincarnation is simply to learn in this school called Earth. And you choose the
time and place to best learn your lessons.
Our Earthly series of lifetimes is certainly not the ultimate reality, but one of several possibilities. It is our mind, or
consciousness, that continues through each one of our

B2chapter 2.pmd

23

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

24

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

incarnations. It contains the memories of all of our past,
present, and future lifetimes, through accessing something
known as the Akashic records. These records are fifth dimensional charts on our reincarnation or karmic cycle. We
are in reality, energy. As such, we cannot be destroyed. We
cannot die. We simply appear to change bodies every 75
years or so.
Skeptics, especially those who pride themselves on their
rationalism, must come to terms with the fact that quantum
physics and superstring theory are now accepted scientific
paradigms. Concepts formerly ridiculed as “metaphysical”—
multidimensionality, simultaneity, even reincarnation and
karma—now have a scientific foundation.

Karma
The basic law of karma has come to mean action and reaction, or cause and effect. Any action that is considered harmful or evil to the well-being of another is recompensed exactly
in proportion to the harm done. The reverse also applies.
One of the basic principles of karma is that every soul (entity) has free will. There is always freedom of choice. Each soul
is drawn to parents who can provide the biological heredity and
physical environment needed to learn karmic lessons. Psychic
genetics is more important than biological genetics in determining the character of our lives. In addition, all lessons and
deeds are recorded in the entity’s Akashic records, which are
used to determine each new lifetime. These records, as I previously stated, are the sum total of our past, present, and future
lives, and are accessible through our superconscious mind
(Higher Self).
If you are unhappy about your life, your financial situation, your relationships, or your health, for example, then you
must realize that a cause exists. These causes can be traced
back to past lives. Your subconscious mind retains all of these
causes because it has a perfect memory bank. The subconscious mind also survives death, so that a new life means merely

B2chapter 2.pmd

24

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

The Big Picture

25

exchanging one body for another. You have the same subconscious, only now it has learned some lessons, and hopefully,
grown spiritually.
All of the things you have or have not done in this and all
of your past lives will generate certain effects in this life as
well as in future lifetimes. The laws of karma are perfectly just.
The soul always has free will. Karma can bring you happiness
or sadness, depending on the effects you have earned and the
paths you have chosen to take. It is not the purpose of karma to
reward or punish. Its purpose is to educate the subconscious,
and to purify it. Once the subconscious is purified, it no longer
needs karma, or the â&#x20AC;&#x153;karmic cycle,â&#x20AC;? as we refer to it. The result
is ascension and a return to God.
If, however, we react to certain tests in our lives negatively
(with hatred, revenge, jealousy, pettiness, or some other negative emotion), then we have not learned our lesson, but have
failed the test and will have to retake it in either this or a
future lifetime.

Free Will
Because the soul always has free will, it is our decision to
be born at a certain time and place. It is our decision to choose
our parents, friends, lovers, and enemies. We cannot blame
other people or a bad childhood or marriage for our present
problems. We are directly responsible for our lives because we
have chosen the environment.

The Next 1,000 Years
The information presented here is the result of several
thousand hypnotic future life progressions conducted on individual patients since I discovered this technique in 1977.
What I am about to report represents only one frequency, or
parallel universe. This means that you may not actually experience this future if you are on a different frequency. I refer

B2chapter 2.pmd

25

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

26

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

you to my books Time Travelers from Our Future and Custom
Design Your Own Destiny for an in-depth discussion of these
parallel universes.
No significant earthquakes causing massive loss of life
will occur until the year 2050. In that year Los Angeles, San
Francisco, and New York will suffer devastating property damage mostly, with few people dying as a result. Absolutely no
nuclear wars will take place until the 24th century.
During the 21st century, world peace will finally become a
reality. Peace lasts for 300 years. The Earth will undergo geographic changes; scientific progress will be most evident. Hunger, greed, jealousy, prejudice, and other negative aspects of
society seem to have been almost entirely eliminated by the
end of the 21st century.
Solar power will be incorporated into everyday life in the
22nd century. The lifespan of the average adult will be increased
to more than 90 years. Cancer and AIDS are finally cured.
The 23rd century will be characterized by noiseless and
efficient transportation. Nuclear power is used extensively
and is safe and clean. Experiments in weather control are a
top priority. The average lifespan is now more than 110
years. Politically, the Earth is democratic with two major
groups. One is called the Western Federation of Nations
and is composed of North America, South America, Europe, Africa, and the Middle East. The Eastern Alliance is
the other group, and is made up of Russia, China, India,
Japan, Southeast Asia, New Zealand, and Australia.
A small-scale nuclear war occurs in the 24th century. Further geographic changes take place on the Earthâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s surface,
and the League of One is the democratic form of government
for the entire planet, replacing the Western Federation and
the Eastern Alliance. Cold fusion and other free energy
sources are now in use.
It is during the 25th century that we finally control the
weather. Androids are used to perform all menial tasks.

B2chapter 2.pmd

26

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

27

The Big Picture

Underwater cities, genetic engineering, and interplanetary
travel dominate the 26th century. We will have regular contact with extraterrestrials. Information pills will keep citizens well informed. The lifespan is increased to more than
215 years. Sickness and disease are almost unknown.
During the 28th century, the League of One is replaced by
the Atlantic and Pacific Federations. These groups are also
democratic, and are composed of the same nations that were a
part of the old Western Federation and Eastern Alliance. There
are no wars.
This paradigm remains relatively stable through the beginning of the 31st century, when we finally master time travel.
At this time, time travelers from our future begin to go back in
time to not only the 20th century, but all the way back to millions of years into prehistory to supervise both our evolution
and spiritual growth.
Some examples of the technology of the next 1,000 years are:
Anti-gravity amusement parks (like Disneyland)
that float several thousand feet above the Earth.
A force field protects people from falling off
the edge.
A food simulator that creates any meal you desire from your thoughts alone.
An alpha syncolarium device that looks like an
isolation tank. By sending energy signals
through the body, along with sounds, the body is
distressed and our DHEA production by the adrenal glands and gonads are accelerated so that
our life spans may be increased to 900 years.
Holographic relaxation centers equivalent to the
holodeck in Star Trek.
Virtual reality techniques are applied to a small
room to make it appear vast in size.
Objects can be shrunk in size for storage and later
enlarged back to their original configuration.

B2chapter 2.pmd

27

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

28

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
Each home and office contains a teleportation
station so there is no need for vehicles of any
kind for short trips.
Ships are still used to transport large groups of
people for long distances, but these vehicles are
piloted by thought.

B2chapter 2.pmd

28

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

29

A Past Life in the Amazon

Chapter 3

A Past Life in the Amazon

Before I begin depicting past and future lives of some of
my patients, a discussion of how they receive this data is important. Very few people receive visual images accompanied
by a tremendous amount of data or emotions. Most people
receive information followed by a cloudy impression or sense
of an environment.
In my book Past Lives—Future Lives1, I described the five
ways of receiving past life data.
Many people are curious about what they will experience
in a past life regression. There are many possible experiences.
1. You may see a scene and at the same time. Be
aware of information related to this scene. I refer to this as both an audio and visual experience and it results in excellent data. It’s as if you
are watching a movie or television show.
2. You may see cloudy or quick impressions that
tend to disappear just as you are about to understand them.
3. You may appear to “know”or be aware of the
environment without actually seeing or hearing
anything.
4. You may feel as if someone is whispering in your
ear.

29

B3chapter 3.pmd

29

2/5/2004, 9:26 AM

30

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
5. Reading words that appear before your inner
eyes is a very rare type of experience, although
this may be how some people know what the data
is or what country they are living in.

Ann was a 40-year-old divorced nurse when she came to my
Los Angeles office in 1997. Her problem was sexual dysfunction
and it began during her 12-year marriage to her now ex-husband,
Fred. Fred was a former professional football player and was not
very tender in bed. He was generally cruel and vulgar to Ann.
Her recent relationships had been sexually frustrating and
all ended prematurely, mostly due to this unresolved issue.
Ann wanted help and was curious to see how a former life
might fit into her current problem.
We begin Annâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s past life exploration with this most interesting and relevant life in the Amazon.
Dr. G.:

Where do you find yourself?

Ann:

I am by a river, a very long river.

Dr. G.:

Are you a male or female?

Ann:

I am a young girl.

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Ann:

Fawa. My name is Fawa.

Fawa was a young teenage girl living in Brazil near the
Amazon River. She described her people as a tribe that spent
most of their time in the jungle hunting and gathering. This
jungle girl lived with her parents and was an only child. Their
village was very small and was lead by their Chief, Sagu.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your Chief.

Ann:

He is a tall and strong man, but I am afraid of him.

Dr. G.:

What is it about him that you fear?

Ann.:

He is very mean and when he makes a bad decision he
takes it out on others, including my father.

Dr. G.:

Is Sagu mean to you?

B3chapter 3.pmd

30

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

31

A Past Life in the Amazon
Ann:

No. He is nice to women. He has many women.

Sagu was quite a character. According to Fawa, he was a
poor Chief who often made improper tribal decisions. Might
was more important than intelligence or good judgment in
Fawa’s tribe. Sagu obtained his position as Chief by successfully challenging and killing his predecessor. One of his many
fringe benefits as Chief was a pick of any woman in the tribe
at any time.
It didn’t matter if they were married or very young; he
could do whatever he wanted. The only way to change the
leader was by death, either natural, accidental, or as a result
of a successful challenge by one of the men.
Sagu was the biggest and strongest, so he didn’t have
much to worry about. However, he was quite insecure and
paranoid and had to constantly justify his actions and blame
all of his errors on others or the Gods.
Dr. G.:

Fawa, has Sagu forced himself on you sexually? Is
that why he frightens you?

Ann:

No, he hasn’t done that to me. He thinks I’m too
ugly. He is just so mean to the men that I feel very
uncomfortable in his presence.

Fawa did her best to keep away from Sagu. She did her
chores, helped prepare the food, and assisted with the caring of the younger children. There was plenty of food, but
the one persistent problem they faced was attacks by neighboring tribes. Apparently, there was no comraderie between
the various tribes, and these attacks were common.
Fawa’s father was not a fan of Sagu. For one thing, he
didn’t like the fact that the Chief slept with his wife whenever
he chose. For another, he disagreed with most of Sagu’s decisions. It seemed that Sagu just wasn’t very bright, but all the
men were afraid of him because of his size.
Dr. G.:

B3chapter 3.pmd

Is Sagu that much larger than the other men?

31

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

32
Ann:

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
It’s not that he is that much larger, it’s more like he is
more savage. He is stronger than the others but he just
likes to hurt people and killing gives him pleasure.

Fawa went on to describe how Sagu took particular pleasure in killing an invading warrior. It was as if he just couldn’t
wait for a fight so he could kill someone. Sagu did not believe in taking prisoners. He did believe in killing.
The Chief had never been wounded in battle. He was a
skillful warrior and, although hated by his people, they needed
him for protection.
Such was the environment Fawa found herself in as I
questioned her further.
Dr. G.:

Fawa, do you have a boy that you like?

Ann:

Yes, I like Moke.

Dr. G.:

What does Moke think of the Chief?

Ann:

Like everyone else, he hates Sagu. Sagu killed Moke’s
father when his father challenged Sagu for leadership.

Moke thus had a special axe to grind with Sagu. Any man
at any time could challenge Sagu for the privilege of leading the
tribe. The only problem was that it consisted of a fight to the
death and Sagu was by far the most skillful fighter in the tribe.
I progressed Fawa forward to a significant event in her
life. She is now 18 and some things have changed.
Dr. G.:

What is going on at this time Fawa?

Ann:

It’s Sagu. Yesterday I was summoned to his hut. He
took me.

Dr. G.:

Do you mean he had sex with you?

Ann:

Yes, and he was not gentle. He hurt me and laughed
at me.

Dr. G.:

I’m sorry to hear that. Didn’t you say he always
thought that you were ugly?

Ann:

That was before. I’ve grown now and Moke tells me
I’m beautiful. Sagu thought so too. He is an animal.

B3chapter 3.pmd

32

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Past Life in the Amazon

33

Dr. G.:

What can you do about that?

Ann:

My father is very angry. He never liked Sagu being
with my mother, but now that he has had his way
with me, I’m afraid.

Dr. G.:

What is your father going to do?

Ann:

He is going to challenge Sagu to a fight to the death.
I know my father loves me but he cannot win. Sagu
will kill him.

The challenge was made official. Fawa’s father prepared
himself for the battle as best he could. He was a fine warrior,
but Sagu was the best. Fawa’s father fought bravely, but Sagu
bested him and slit his throat.
Dr. G.:

What is happening now?

Ann:

I can’t look. My father is dead. I hate Sagu. I wish I
were a man so I could challenge him.

Moke consoled Fawa while this happened. He was very
supportive and loved her dearly.
Dr. G.:

What did Sagu do after his victory?

Ann:

He had my mother killed. Just like that he performed
a ceremony in which poisonous snakes were placed by
my mother. They bit her and she died a horrible death.

Dr. G.:

How can he do that?

Ann:

Sagu can do anything he wants. When a Chief successfully defeats a challenger, he can celebrate anyway he can. I’m lucky he didn’t have me killed.

Dr. G.:

Why did he spare you?

Ann:

He wants me physically again. He is an animal and I
don’t know what I’m going to do. If it weren’t for
Moke, I think I would drown myself in the big river.

Fawa was in a precarious situation. Moke was, indeed,
her only saving grace. I learned from Fawa that Moke was a
bright native. He was not quite fully grown, but was a natural

B3chapter 3.pmd

33

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

34

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

warrior. Moke shared Fawa’s disdain for Sagu but there wasn’t
much he could do about it at the time.
Dr. G.:

Do you and Moke plan to wed?

Ann:

Yes. I love him and we will wed soon. I am worried.

Dr. G.:

About what?

Ann:

Moke hates Sagu almost as much as I do. He tells me
that someday he will challenge him and I know he
will be killed by Sagu if he does.

Dr. G.:

How does Sagu feel about Moke?

Ann:

Sagu tries to make fun of Moke any chance he gets.

It seemed Sagu was jealous of Moke’s intelligence. Sagu
was all brute strength. He made poor decisions and noted
how bright and quick Moke was. Moke was popular with the
tribe and helped plan certain strategies that greatly benefited
Fawa’s people.
Sagu couldn’t just throw Moke out of the tribe without
causing many problems. He could, however, embarrass Moke
at any chance he got, which was often.
As time passed, Fawa and Moke were wed. Sagu appeared to lose interest in Fawa and entertained himself with
the other women in the tribe.
Dr. G.:

How is married life treating you?

Ann:

It’s wonderful. Moke is a good provider and always
so considerate to my needs.

Dr. G.:

And the tribe?

Ann:

Well, Moke has designed some new weapons that
allow the men to hunt better. Moke is always thinking about ways to improve our life.

Dr. G.:

How do the others respond to his efforts?

Ann:

Oh, everybody likes him. They are amazed at his ability to do things.

Dr. G.:

And Sagu?

B3chapter 3.pmd

34

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Past Life in the Amazon

35

Ann:

Well, that’s another matter. Sagu is threatened by
anyone who can do things he can’t, like think. He
has little choice but to accept Moke’s inventions only
because they work and everyone in the tribe realizes
their usefulness.

Dr. G.:

Please continue.

Ann:

Sagu takes every opportunity he can to put Moke
down. There is nobody else in the tribe that does the
things my Moke can do.

It became obvious that a dangerous pattern was emerging. Moke was a bright and inventive young adult. His ideas
were popular with the rest of his people. In fact, Moke himself was very well liked.
If circumstances were different Moke would easily have
been elected tribal Chief. Even though he was young, he was
far superior to everyone else in the tribe.
Sagu’s insecurity and jealousy of Moke made the Chief
even more neurotic. He couldn’t just kill or ostracize Moke
without initiating a rebellion among his people. This tribe
was small, but there were enough men present to remove
Sagu if he was foolish enough to attempt such an act.
Fawa understood this situation all too well. She supported
Moke in his actions and noted the conflict between Sagu’s
totalitarian rule and the will of the people.
Dr. G.:

Do the other men in the tribe share your feelings
about Moke being the new Chief?

Ann:

Yes, they do. The problem is, even Moke with all his
cunning just could never beat Sagu in a challenge.
There is no exception to the rule of challenge. For
Moke to be our Chief, he must kill Sagu in a battle.

Dr. G.:

What does Moke say about this?

Ann:

My Moke is very wise for his years. He tries not to get
emotional about his problem, but he does want to
challenge Sagu.

B3chapter 3.pmd

35

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

36

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

How do you feel about this?

Ann:

I don’t want him to die. My feelings are known to
him and he assures me he will do nothing about it
now, but will wait for the proper time.

Dr. G.:

How can he possibly beat Sagu?

Ann:

Moke is working it out. He is strong and spends some
extra time every day adding to his strength. He is a
planner and I know if anyone can do it, he can.

Fawa had complete confidence in Moke. She knew it
was a nearly impossible task. What is interesting to note about
Moke’s extra preparation was that it was similar to a 20thcentury boxer working out—running, exercising—to get into
condition for a big fight.
It was impossible to establish a date for this life, but it
was most definitely a primitive one. There were no technologically advanced civilizations here.
I progressed Fawa forward to an important event in her life.
Dr. G.: What has happened since I last spoke to you?
Ann:

I’m with child and I am so happy.

Dr. G.:

I’m happy for you too, Fawa. How does Moke feel
about your pregnancy?

Ann:

Moke is wonderful. He is looking forward to the baby
and wants to have more children.

Dr. G.:

I know this is a difficult and delicate matter, but what
about Sagu? Has he been with you since the time
you told me about?

Ann:

No.

I moved Fawa ahead in time.
Dr. G.:

What is happening at this time?

Ann:

I’m so angry.

Dr. G.:

What is it?

B3chapter 3.pmd

36

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Past Life in the Amazon

37

Ann:

It’s Sagu. He almost got us all killed with his latest
decision.

Dr. G.:

What was that?

Ann:

Most of the men are in the jungle hunting. One of
the scouts saw a tribe moving very far away from
them. This was a tribe that we have faced before in
battle. They are mean and like to fight.

Dr. G.:

Please continue.

Ann:

Sagu could easily have ignored them because they
were too far away and didn’t notice our people.

Dr. G.:

What did Sagu do?

Ann:

He decided he wanted to fight. It has been a while
since he was in battle so he decided to do some killing.

Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Ann:

Sagu and the other warriors then followed this tribe
of men and they started fighting.

Dr. G.:

Please continue.

Ann:

We were outnumbered. Sagu didn’t think that was
important. Some our best men were killed in this battle.

Dr. G.:

What about Moke?

Ann:

Moke survived. He was wounded, but he will be all
right.

Dr. G.:

And Sagu?

Ann:

Our Chief escaped this battle without so much as a
cut. He killed a number of their men and was the
main reason they ran away.

So Sagu did his thing again. He did not carefully weigh
the situation but ordered this attack just to satisfy his own
selfish needs.
Moke’s wound healed, and a number of months later,
Fawa gave birth to a son.
Dr. G.:

B3chapter 3.pmd

How is your baby?

37

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

38

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Ann:

He is fine. I can tell he will be smart just like his father.

Dr. G.:

How is Moke doing?

Ann:

He is doing well. His pride of our son is known to all.
Moke will make a good father.

Dr. G.:

How did Moke feel about that last encounter in the
jungle with the war-like tribe?

Ann:

That is something else. Ever since that time, he has
been trying to devise a plan that would allow him to
beat Sagu.

Dr. G.:

Does he talk to you about it?

Ann:

Yes, very much. I try to talk him out of this idea, but
it’s no use. He says he wants to raise our son in a
better way than following the ways of Sagu.

Dr. G.:

How can he beat Sagu?

Ann:

That’s just it. I don’t know. He is giving it a lot of
thought and I know he will come up with something.
I just pray to our Gods that it will work. I just don’t
know what I would do if I lost him. We need him. I
need him.

Moke went off into the jungle every now and then by himself. This was not unusual, so it did not attract suspicion. The
only person Moke had to worry about was Sagu. Even if his
neighbors knew what he was up to, they would never tell Sagu.
Fawa was the only person Moke told about his plan.
Dr. G.:

What is this plan?

Ann:

Moke is so smart. When he goes into the jungle he
stays in one spot for hours. What he is doing is setting a trap for Sagu.

Dr. G.:

What exactly is this trap?

Ann:

I don’t know all the details but he is digging a hole
and putting wooden stakes that are very sharp at the
bottom of this hole. He wants to make it so Sagu will
fall into this trap.

B3chapter 3.pmd

38

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Past Life in the Amazon

39

Dr. G.:

But how does he know that Sagu will agree to fight
him in this spot?

Ann:

That’s easy. The one who challenges the Chief
chooses where the fight will take place.

Dr. G.:

But how does he know that he could position Sagu
to fall into this trap? If he can’t, won’t he be killed in
battle?

Ann:

Yes. I do not know the answer to that. He won’t even
tell me those details.

So the plan was being finalized. Moke met secretly with
some of the other men to work out the details. Sagu had no
loyal subjects. He had no spies. The other men hated him,
but were deathly afraid of him also. There was no way this
plan was going to find its way back to Sagu.
While all of this was going on, Sagu is enjoying himself.
He sleeps with the wives and daughters of his fellow tribesmen and acts in his usual arrogant way.
Moke and his friends were ready, so the next step was to
formally make the challenge.
Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Ann:

Moke challenged Sagu and the Chief just laughed
at him.

Dr. G.:

Did Sagu accept this challenge?

Ann:

Yes, he had to.

Dr. G.:

How do you feel about what Moke is about to do?

Ann:

I don’t like it. Of course, I am worried about him but
something tells me that it’s going to work out. I will
pray to the Gods for Moke’s victory.

A few days later, the battle of his life and death began.
Because Moke was the challenger, he chose the weapons.
Sagu was surprised the only weapon allowed was a long pole.
This was definitely not Sagu’s style, but he didn’t care.

B3chapter 3.pmd

39

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

40

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Sagu tried to unnerve Moke on this fateful morning by
bragging how fast he would disarm him and then beat him to
death. The problem that worried everyone was just that. Moke
didnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t stand a chance with besting Sagu by hand-to-hand
combat. His plan had to work.
When they began, everyone in the tribe relocated to the
clearing in the jungle that Moke chose.
Dr. G.:

Was Sagu suspicious of the spot selected?

Ann:

No. He was just ready to kill my Moke.

Dr. G.:

Tell me what happened next?

Ann:

They stood facing each other in the clearing. Moke
positioned himself in a certain spot and two men
brought the poles for each of them.

Dr. G.:

Go on.

Ann:

When they were ready, a strange sound, like a large
animal was heard. Moke looked in that direction
and he froze.

Dr. G.:

Please continue.

Ann:

The other men looked in the same direction and as
soon as Sagu (whose back was to the sound) turned
to see what the source of the sound was, Moke picked
up the pole and lunged forward. Sagu fell back a few
steps and the grass opened up and all I heard was a
horrible scream.

Moke constructed some kind of horn and when used in a
certain way it made an animal sound that was quite loud.
One of the men in the tribe made this sound when Moke
gave him a certain signal.
That momentary distraction as Sagu turned around was
all that Moke needed to execute his plan. When Sagu fell into
the pit he was instantly killed by the wooden stakes. Moke
became Chief and Fawa had a happy ending to their past life.

B3chapter 3.pmd

40

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Past Life in the Amazon

41

From the superconscious, I discovered that Moke is a man
named Paul, who Ann wasn’t aware of when this regression
was conducted. Sagu was Fred, as I suspected. The
superconscious mind is the perfect part of our soul’s energy.
By accessing the superconscious, a patient can find out if an
individual from a past life is someone the patient knows, or
has known. I call this karmic scripting. It can also allude to
future relationships.
Within four months after this regression, Ann met a man
named Paul and began a rather fulfilling relationship with
him. Her sexual dysfunction disappeared and never returned.
She described him as brilliant and classy.
Another aspect of Ann’s past life as Fawa that impressed
me was the ingenuity of Moke (Paul). He was smart enough
to overcome tremendous odds to defeat Sagu and assist his
tribe in their future endeavors with competent leadership.
One final point to mention deals with the violence and
sexual components of Fawa’s life. When a patient explores
the origin of a difficulty or past life ties with someone who
mistreated them, such negative scenarios are to be expected.
We will see this pattern repeated several times throughout
this book.

B3chapter 3.pmd

41

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

42

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 4

A Documented Case
of Reincarnation

My second book, The Search for Grace1, deals with a documented case of reincarnation. It traces the past life relationship a woman had with a man who murdered her in 20 of 46
past lives that we explored! The Search for Grace (1994) has
also been featured as the â&#x20AC;&#x153;CBS Movie of the Week.â&#x20AC;? I had the
pleasure of being the consultant on this film.
The Search for Grace illustrates some of the many therapeutic benefits of past life hypnotherapy through one particular patient, Ivy.
Ivy was a trained scientist and a very intelligent woman.
The idea that she had lived before fascinated her. She showed
no interest in either age progression or future life progression. She had no prior interest in history, but to return to a
point in history and have historical support that she was there
made the idea of regression very exciting to her.
All of the instructions to Ivy prior to regressing her were
designed to have her choose a past life that would explain and
remove the difficulties surrounding her current relationships:
her relationship with John, a man who had literally tried to
kill Ivy on three previous occasions; and Dave, a man whose
company she enjoyed, and with whom she wanted to continue
her relationship.

42

B4chapter 4.pmd

42

2/5/2004, 9:27 AM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation

43

In this chapter, we will explore one of Ivy’s past lives with
John that was not depicted in my book. Fortunately, she was able
to overcome her obsession with John and resolved this issue.
Ivy did relate her last life to me as a 1920s Buffalo, New
York housewife named Grace Doze who was murdered on
May 17, 1927 by her bootlegger lover (the past life of John)
named Jake. She provided me with two dozen verifiable facts.
CBS television hired a researcher to check out the facts Ivy gave
me and aired this case as a television movie on May 17, 1994
(exactly 67 years to the hour from Grace Doze’s murder!).
Of the facts Ivy gave, 22 of 24 checked out with newspaper
reports. The only two errors were her age and the name of her
son. Grace Doze was consistently reported as being 30 years
old when she was murdered and her son’s name was stated as
Chester, Jr. Ivy informed me, speaking as Grace Doze, that she
was 32 years old, and her son’s name was Cliff. I asked the
researcher to obtain Grace’s death certificate and her son’s
birth certificate. As it turned out, Ivy was correct. In order to
obtain these records, one must be a family member or have
permission from the Governor’s office, proving that Ivy could
not have obtained these records on her own.
In either case, a paper trail would exist. Nobody requested
these records from 1927 to 1992 (CBS’s researcher represented
the 1992 request), so this case stands out as a very well documented case of reincarnation. My appearance on the 11 p.m.
news nationwide following the airing of this film further added
to its message of psychic empowerment.
In this particular past life, we find Ivy living as a woman in
Denmark in 1061. During this particular regression, as well as
many others, Ivy experienced changes in the depth and tone
of her voice. When you regress the same person into 46 different past lives as I did with Ivy, a wide range of experiences and
changes in personality traits are observed.
Dr. G.:

Where are you at this time?

Ivy:

I’m in a large dining room.

Dr. G.:

Are you alone?

B4chapter 4.pmd

43

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

44

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Ivy:

No, there are two adults present. I think they are my
mother and father.

Dr. G.:

What is this occasion?

Ivy:

It’s not a special day. We are just having dinner. This is
a rather large dining room table for just the three of us.

Ivy’s family was rather wealthy. She was an only child
and approximately 16 years old. She was an attractive teenager and she had an easy life.
Dr. G.:

What does your father do?

Ivy:

He works for the King in some capacity. I think he is
an advisor.

Dr. G.:

Do you enjoy your life?

Ivy:

Oh, yes. I get to go to parties and the men always
treat me like a lady.

Dr. G.:

Do you wish you had brothers and sisters?

Ivy:

No, no I don’t. I like the attention I receive as being
an only child. Father’s friends often bring me gifts
when they come over the house.

Dr. G.:

Do you have a suitor?

Ivy:

Well, there is a boy who likes me and I see him once
in a while.

Dr. G.:

Do you want to see him more often?

Ivy:

It doesn’t really matter. I like him, but not so much as
other people in my life.

I was trying to find out if this suitor represented someone of
significance to Ivy. All of my instructions to Ivy prior to regressing her were designed to have her choose a past life that would
be significant in explaining and removing the difficulties surrounding her current relationships with John and Dave.
This particular boyfriend was not that important to Ivy,
but she still enjoyed his company and wanted to continue
seeing him. Ivy’s name was Rachael and her life was very

B4chapter 4.pmd

44

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation

45

much occupied with social activities. Because her father was
an advisor to the King, their attendance at social functions
was mandatory.
Dr. G.:

Can you tell me about your father’s work?

Ivy:

I don’t know much about what he does.

Dr. G.:

Doesn’t he ever discuss it?

Ivy:

All I know is that he deals with things that are supposed to be secret. I think it has to do with the Army
and protecting the King.

Dr. G.:

Does your father enjoy what he does?

Ivy:

Sometimes he is very excited, even though he can’t
tell us [her mother and herself] what is going on.

Dr. G.:

And other times?

Ivy:

He gets very sad and worried. I can tell when something is wrong.

Dr. G.:

Does this worry you?

Ivy:

A little, but there is just nothing I can do about it, so
I try not to worry.

At first, I thought that Rachael was just a frivolous girl, but
the more I conversed with her, the more I realized that she was
a realist. Being a woman in the 11th century means having no
control over your life. Rachael accepted this and merely dealt
with life on the terms and conditions that were presented to her.
She was a bright, active, and strong woman from a powerful family heavily involved in politics during a very difficult time. She described many invasions and wars with
neighboring countries. It was not a time of political stability.
The King was very security conscious, almost to the extent of
paranoia. Considering the many unexplained deaths among the
nobility, this attitude was probably necessary for survival.
I progressed Rachael forward to a significant event in
her life.

B4chapter 4.pmd

45

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

46

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What has happened since I last spoke to you?

Ivy:

I am very upset with my father.

Dr. G.:

Why?

Ivy.:

He has been very moody with me lately. No matter
what I do, it’s just not right.

Dr. G.:

Do you know what is troubling him?

Ivy:

Yes, I think I do. The King has been worried about
all of these wars and invasions. He has ordered more
ships to be built than usual. I think our King is putting pressure on all of his advisors. Because my father advises him on military matters and security
issues, father is under a lot of stress.

Dr. G.:

How has he taken this out on you?

Ivy:

He has forbid me to see my boyfriend. Just like that,
he tells me I can’t see him anymore.

Dr. G.:

But I thought you told me that he wasn’t that close a
friend to you. So why does this make that much of a
difference?

Ivy:

I may not be in love with him, but I am a woman [she
is now 19]. I don’t like being told that I simply can’t
see someone.

Dr. G.:

Did he tell you why he doesn’t want you to see this
man?

Ivy:

Not really. I think it has to do with security or military matters. Nobody tells me anything.

It seems that Rachael’s suitor was suspected of being a
spy, possibly an assassin. Her father was ordered to keep his
daughter away from that man because they feared he was
trying to use Rachael to somehow get to the King. There apparently was some incriminating evidence to substantiate
these allegations.
Dr. G.:

B4chapter 4.pmd

Will you see this suitor anyway?

46

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation
Ivy:

47

Absolutely not. If father forbids me, then I will not
see him again. I will not go against the wishes of my
father, not for anyone.

Rachael accepted this situation with class. She didn’t
really miss seeing that man as much as she just didn’t like
being told what to do. Being the realist that she was meant
going on with her life and maintaining loyalty to her family.
Dr. G.:

Do you ever think about getting married?

Ivy:

Not really. I don’t have much of a say in it anyway.
When my father thinks the time is right, he will arrange for my marriage.

Dr. G.:

Is that acceptable to you?

Ivy:

It’s the way it is and I will do what is expected of me.

From that exchange, I learned to deal with other matters.
Relationships with men just weren’t that important to Rachael.
Because I knew this life would somehow involve either John,
Dave, or both, I continued.
Dr. G.:

Is there anything special that you are looking forward to?

Ivy:

Yes, there is. The King is having a large dinner party
and he has invited us. I can’t wait.

Dr. G.:

What is special about this function?

Ivy:

A lot of important people are going to be there. It
won’t be just the usual people, but nobility from all
over the country.

Dr. G.:

Do you know why these people have been invited
here at this particular time?

Ivy:

Well, it probably concerns the Army. Either we are
going to war or peaceful negotiations are in progress.
I try not to concern myself with these matters.

That is an interesting choice, indeed. Nothing else of
significance seemed to be happening in Rachael’s life so I
next progressed her to the dinner itself.

B4chapter 4.pmd

47

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

48

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What is gong on now?

Ivy:

Oh, it’s really great. Everyone seems so relaxed now.

Dr. G.:

What happened?

Ivy:

For the past few days, there have been all kinds of
meetings. Father has been working day and night.
He hasn’t slept well and is always worried.

Dr. G.:

So why have this party now?

Ivy:

They always celebrate after these kinds of discussions.

Dr. G.:

But you said that everyone seems so relaxed. What has
happened to change the previously tense situation?

Ivy:

It seems that the threats to our nation have been
dealt with. Apparently, some sort of peace treaty
was signed or some agreement was reached. This was
the result of the work of the King’s advisors and
emissaries.

Dr. G.:

And your father?

Ivy:

Yes, that is the best part of it. Because of Father’s
work, he is being rewarded. The King is giving him
more land and power.

Dr. G.:

I can see why he is so relaxed.

Ivy:

I do worry so when he works like this. But now things
are safe and he is in great favor with our King.

Dr. G.:

This sounds very important.

Ivy:

The opinion of the King is everything to my people.

The King can have anyone he wants killed or imprisoned or forced out of the country.
Dr. G.:

Is anything else going on that you are excited about?

Ivy:

The King wants to come to my home for dinner. Can
you imagine that? It is a great honor for our family.
I can’t wait.

The party went on for quite a while. Eventually Rachael
and her parents returned to their home. Rachael and her

B4chapter 4.pmd

48

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation

49

mother were in charge of making the necessary preparations
for the King’s visit. Their servants were busy preparing the
house and Rachael became more and more excited as the
special day drew near. The only person more important to
Rachael than her father was the King. Rachael was most
definitely a loyal subject. We shall shortly see an ironic twist
of fate in relationship to this loyalty.
Having a King over to your house is no simple matter.
Security preparations had to be taken, even when he dined
with a trusted advisor. Rachael didn’t mind all of the extra
people around. She was so honored to be part of a family
hosting a visit from the King that any minor inconvenience
could be forgiven.
I progressed Rachael to the actual dinner with the King.
Dr. G.:

How are things going?

Ivy:

All right, I guess.

Dr. G.:

You don’t sound particularly happy.

Ivy:

Well, it’s just that there are so many strange people
around in the kitchen and other places. I feel like a
stranger in my own home.

Dr. G.:

I thought you were excited about the King’s visit?

Ivy:

Yes, I am. It’s just that there are so many details to
attend to that it’s hard to find time to relax.

Eventually, things settled down and Rachael and her
parents dined with the King and his men. The meal was large
with many courses. Because Rachael’s father was such a
trusted advisor, the King did not bring his food taster.
Dr. G.:

How are things now?

Ivy:

Much better. The meal is excellent and everyone
seems to be enjoying themself.

Dr. G.:

And your father?

Ivy:

He looks relaxed and very proud of Mother and me.

B4chapter 4.pmd

49

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

50

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

I then progressed Rachael to a significant event, if any,
in relationship to this dinner.
Dr. G.:

What is happening at this time?

Ivy:

I don’t know, but I’m frightened.

Dr. G.:

Slowly, tell me what is bothering you.

Ivy:

It’s the King. He looks ill. Everyone thinks it must be
the food. They think he’s been poisoned.

Dr. G.:

Is anyone else sick?

Ivy:

No, that’s just it. It’s only the King who looks as if he
is ill.

Dr. G.:

Isn’t that unusual?

Ivy:

It means that if it is food poisoning then only the
King’s meal was poisoned. That means someone in
our house is responsible and we will all be in great
danger. I am really scared.

I progressed Rachael forward to the final outcome of the
King’s illness.
Dr. G.:

What has happened, Rachael?

Ivy:

Oh, it’s terrible. We all seem to be under some sort of
house arrest. The King is in my parents’ bedroom with
his people. He looks bad I’m told and everyone thinks
he is going to die. Even if he doesn’t die, this will
mean a lot of problems for my father and my family.

Dr. G.:

Move to the resolution of the King’s condition.

Ivy:

He died. Oh my lord, the King is dead and he died in
my family’s house.

Dr. G.:

Now please stay calm, Rachael, and tell me what his
security people found out, if anything, about who
did this?

Ivy:

It took a long time, many hours anyway. Everyone
was searched and the kitchen was almost taken apart.

Dr. G.:

What did they find?

B4chapter 4.pmd

50

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation

51

Ivy:

They finally caught the murderer. You are not going to believe who it was.

Dr. G.:

Who is it?

Ivy:

It’s my former suitor. Do you remember the man I
used to see sometimes?

Dr. G.:

Yes, please go on.

Ivy:

Well the reason my father forbade me to see him was
that this man was suspected of being a spy. They knew
he was involved with the King’s enemies and plotted
to kill our leader.

Dr. G.:

Why didn’t your father tell you this?

Ivy:

He was ordered not to. He also didn’t want to frighten
me. The King and his other advisors didn’t want to let
their enemies know they were on to them.

Dr. G.:

Then why this visit? I would think that the King would
consider this outing particularly dangerous.

Ivy:

I’m told that he would, except that when this peace
treaty was signed or whatever they did to come to an
agreement, they felt the assassination plot was dropped.

Dr. G.:

It looks as if they miscalculated. So what will happen
to your father?

Ivy:

We are all under arrest and will be taken to the castle
in the morning.

The next day, Rachael and her family, along with the
murder and others who came with the King, were taken to
the castle. The murderer was executed immediately and
Rachael and her parents were placed in the dungeon. The
murderer could not say who put him up to it and was killed
before he could clear her family. The cook was killed and an
investigation with a type of hearing was held to determine
what to do about Rachael and her family.
Rachael’s parents were placed in different cells so that
Rachael was alone and frightened.

B4chapter 4.pmd

51

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

52

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

How are you being treated?

Ivy:

It’s terrible. I’m so scared. There are two guards and
I’m confused.

Dr. G.:

About what?

Ivy:

One of the guards (Lars) is very nice to me. He brings
me extra food and talks to me in a very respectful
manner.

Dr. G.:

And the other guard?

Ivy:

Erik is the other one. He is tall and mean. I am really
afraid of him. He hits me for no reason and threatens me often.

Dr. G.:

Can Lars help you out?

Ivy:

I told Lars about it and he is sympathetic. He tells
me that Erik has a bad reputation. Erik likes to abuse
the prisoners, especially the women. (Ivy blushed in
her chair when she said this).

Dr. G.:

You mean he rapes the women?

Ivy:

Yes. He is also known to kill the women after he uses
them. Nobody seems to mind because he does his
job and the prisoners are all afraid of him so they
don’t cause many problems.

Dr. G.:

But aren’t things different with your family due to
your father’s status with the court?

Ivy:

That’s all changed now. My father, and my mother,
and myself too, are accused of conspiring to murder
the King. My relationship with the murderer is very
serious evidence against us. It doesn’t look good at all.

I next progressed Rachael to a significant event that occurred during her incarceration.
Dr. G.:

What is happening now?

Ivy:

Oh my God, I can’t get out.

Dr. G.:

What is going on?

B4chapter 4.pmd

52

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation

53

Ivy:

Erik is torturing me. I pass out a lot and I hurt all over.

Dr. G.:

What does he do to you?

Ivy:

It’s hard to describe. I feel so drained. Now he ripped
my clothes off and is going to rape me. No, no, keep
away...

Rachael described a rather traumatic scene of being repeatedly raped by Erik. She was a virgin so this was even more
traumatic for her. She described blood everywhere. She thought
she would be killed but when she woke up Lars was in her cell.
Dr. G.:

How does Lars treat you?

Ivy:

He is wonderful. Lars tends to my wounds and talks
to me. I can’t move a muscle. Lars could do anything
he wants to me but instead he is kind and almost
loving.

Dr. G.:

Does he tell you anything about your parents?

Ivy:

They’re both dead. Neither my father nor mother
could take the torture. Erik killed them both and
then he raped me.

Dr. G.:

Why didn’t Erik kill you too?

Ivy:

They gave him some extra time to work on me, since
I was the one socializing with the King’s murderer.
But Lars tells me that the real reason is probably
that Erik just wants to rape me again.

Dr. G.:

What can you do about this? Can Lars help?

Ivy:

Not really. Lars is being wonderful, but Erik is his superior and nobody in the castle is willing to show me
any mercy. There is no way I’m going to survive long.

Rachael was in deep trouble. Over the next week, Erik
came into her cell and tortured her. He took great pleasure
in giving her pain. After each encounter, he raped her, and
rather brutally. Rachael conditioned herself to go unconscious
and prayed for death. She knew that there was no way out of
this. Erik would abuse her as long as he wished and then kill

B4chapter 4.pmd

53

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

54

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

her when he became bored. He would then report that she
confessed or whatever they wanted to hear.
Dr. G.:

Rachael, what has happened since I last spoke to you?

Ivy:

I just want to die. Erik is a disgusting animal. When
he knows I’m awake he stands by my cell and mocks
me. Then he teases me and tells me what he is going
to do to me later.

Dr. G.:

What about Lars?

Ivy:

Lars is very supportive. He knows I don’t have much
time left. Lars tells me that it’s up to Erik when I die
and that will be probably in the next couple of days.

Dr. G.:

What will you do?

Ivy:

You know it’s really strange. I should be scared to
death but I spent most of my time thinking of Lars.

Dr. G.:

Because he has been so kind to you?

Ivy:

Yes, but it’s more than that. I actually think Lars
loves me in some strange way.

Dr. G.:

And how do you feel about him?

Ivy:

I have never felt this way for a man before, but I
really care for him. It’s not just because he is kind to
me. I just like him. If only things were different.

The next 24 hours proved to be most unusual. Erik
bragged to Lars that he was going to kill Rachael in two days.
Lars not only told Rachael this, but suggested a plan that
could save her. He told Rachael that he was going to help
her escape. He didn’t care what happened to him.
Rachael didn’t know what to say. She readily agreed and
tried not to get her hopes up too high.
Dr. G.:

How are you going to escape?

Ivy:

Lars is going to unlock the cell and have a horse
waiting for me in the middle of the night. He has
provided some food and water and instructed me
where to go for safety.

B4chapter 4.pmd

54

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

A Documented Case of Reincarnation

55

Dr. G.:

Please go on.

Ivy:

I asked him if he would come with me but he said he
couldn’t. He told me he loves me but his traveling
with me would make it impossible for me to reach
the border.

Later that night, Lars executed his part of the escape perfectly. The problem was that Erik chose a most inopportune
moment to pay a visit to Rachael’s cell. When he discovered
her gone, he went berserk. Erik knew that Lars had to be
responsible, so he found him and beat him up terribly. Then
when Lars was unconscious, Erik slit his throat. Lars died
defending the woman he loved. Meanwhile, Rachael was able
to escape from the castle and made it to the countryside.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now?

Ivy:

I’m lost. I have run out of food and water and don’t
know where the border is.

Dr. G.:

Move to the resolution of this problem?

Ivy:

I can’t move. I’m so weak. All I want to do is sleep.

Rachael died of exposure on her way to the border. From
the superconscious mind level, I discovered that her father
in her life as Rachael was her current-life father. Erik is John
and Lars is Dave in her life as Ivy. The murderer was a man
at a former job she held who harassed her daily before she
finally quit.
Thus ends this most unusual and different life from the
ones we previously explored. The karmic triangle with John
and Dave was becoming more and more evident with each
past life regression I conducted.

B4chapter 4.pmd

55

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

56

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 5

Roots, Caribbean Style

Out of the more than 35,000 past life regressions and future life progressions I have conducted on more than 14,000
individuals, soul mate cases are the most rewarding.
My research shows that there are three types of soul mates.
The most desirable classification is called a â&#x20AC;&#x153;twin flameâ&#x20AC;? or
true soul mate. Both of these souls originated from the same
oversoul, which split into two subsouls. Because they both have
the same energy source, they are perfectly compatible.
The boundary soul mate represents the second category. This
is a positive relationship with only minor problems and differences. You have only been with this person in a limited number
of past lives, and they have all been rewarding experiences.
A retribution soul mate has shared many more lives with you
and is the least attractive type. You feel irresistibly drawn to this
person, but the results are commonly negative and long lasting.
Kim and Brett represented a truly loving couple from the
Midwest, who had been married for seven years and in a blissful
relationship. Kim was the only member of the couple to be regressed. She wanted to see if they were together in previous lives.
Frank was Kimâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s ex-husband, who stole several hundred
thousand dollars from her and cheated on her constantly
during their marriage. Fortunately, none of these traits were
exhibited by Brett.

56

B5chapter 5.pmd

56

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

57

Roots, Caribbean Style

In some cases, a primitive past life can be contaminated by
civilization when a more technologically advanced society
encroaches on the former.
Kim’s past life illustrates such a development.
Dr. G.:

Where do you find yourself?

Kim:

I am in a jungle.

Dr. G.:

Where is this jungle?

Kim:

Africa. I’m in an African jungle and I’m scared.

Kim described herself as a 5-year-old African female.
She was on her way back to her village with her older brother.
He decided to climb a tree to get some food, and Kim was
frightened by an animal.
Shortly after this exchange, I progressed her to a time
when she returned to her village.
Dr. G.:

What is your name? (Kim hesitated before she answered. She needed some time to translate her name
into something her 20th-century mind could relate).

Kim:

Ruby. You can call me Ruby.

Dr. G.:

Ruby, tell me a little about yourself.

Kim:

I am just a child. I like to play, but nobody has any
time for me.

Ruby was lonely. Her village was quite small and there
were only a few children her age. The teenagers and adults
spent most of their time hunting, gathering, and protecting
themselves from the elements.
As I moved her forward, she was now about 13 years old.
Dr. G.:

Ruby, what has happened since I last spoke to you?

Kim:

My people died from a sickness. We have to move. I
don’t like to move around.

Ruby’s village was almost wiped out by some sort of plague.
She and her people constantly moved to different locations
in search of food and to escape what was infecting them.

B5chapter 5.pmd

57

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

58

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

I would not use the term adventurous to describe her.
Ruby liked to be secure and stay in one place. That was
rather difficult in her African jungle environment. As far as I
could determine, the year was about 1650.
I moved her forward again to follow her progress.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now?

Kim:

There is trouble. We must move again.

Dr. G.:

What is it?

Kim:

White people. They come from the water and have
taken my people. Nobody is safe. We must go and hide.

Apparently some English slave traders have been active
near Ruby’s village. Those men kidnapped the local natives
and shipped them off to the Caribbean islands and colonial
America.
Ruby’s people were in a bind. They had disease to fear.
In addition, it was a constant struggle to get enough food and
provide shelter. The last thing they needed was the threat of
slave traders following them through the jungle with their
nets and other weapons.
I moved Ruby ahead to a significant event.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now?

Kim:

I’m by a hut waiting for my family to return.

Ruby’s family and the rest of the village were out scouting a new location. She didn’t like to wander around with
them so she stayed in the village by herself.
The next thing she reported was the most traumatic to
her. The slave traders discovered her people and captured
every one of them. Their next procedure was to look for signs
of a village and remove anybody else they could find. When
they came to Ruby’s village, she was alone.
Dr. G.:

Ruby, what are you going to do?

Kim:

I, I don’t know. There’s no place to hide. I just don’t
know.

B5chapter 5.pmd

58

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

Roots, Caribbean Style

59

Ruby was almost motionless. She was frightened of the
white men and just sat by her hut. They came and carried her
away. She didn’t make it any easier for them but was transported to their ship nevertheless.
She described the voyage as being most unpleasant.
Because she was a skinny 12 year old, who looked even
younger, she escaped the degradation of being raped. Her
mother and some of the other women weren’t so fortunate.
It seemed like an eternity, but eventually the ship docked
at a Caribbean island. It was there she was separated from her
family and sold to a white man who manufactured furniture.
Dr. G.:

How are you being treated?

Kim:

It’s not that bad.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about your life.

Kim:

I am being trained to take care of this man’s house.

Dr. G.:

How many slaves does he have?

Kim:

Just a few. They are nice to me, but I am lonely and
miss my family.

During the next four or five years, Ruby was taught to speak
English and trained to cook and clean the home of the man who
owned her. His name was Edward and he was very strange.
Ruby described him as being totally unpredictable. Some days
he was nice and pleasant and others he was mean and arrogant.
His furniture business prospered on this island and he
shipped most of his products to other lands. Edward paid
little attention to Ruby. Sometimes he would yell at her, but
he never physically abused her.
Dr. G.:

Did you ever find out where your family was sent?

Kim:

No. They were shipped off and I know I will never
see them again.

Dr. G.:

Tell me more about Edward.

Kim:

He is a very strange man.

B5chapter 5.pmd

59

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

60

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Is he married?

Kim:

No. He is middle aged and he never brings women to
the house.

Dr. G.:

Does he date?

Kim:

He only goes with whores. He goes into the bad section of town and buys a woman for the night.

Edward was not a man of personality. In addition to his
mood swings, he believed in buying people. He purchased
his slaves and rented his evening’s entertainment. In business, he was the same way. It was common practice for him
to bribe officials and to make all sorts of underhanded deals
to secure additional business.
His reputation was that of a man you dare not cross. Edward fully abided by the concept of vengeance. If any competitor or other contact of his wronged him in any way, Edward
would find some way to enact his revenge.
Ruby was understandably frightened of him, but fortunately he left her alone. I progressed her forward to a significant event.
Dr. G.:

What is going on at this time?

Kim:

It’s late at night and I’m frightened.

Dr. G.:

What are you scared of?

Kim:

It’s him [Edward]. He came home drunk and started
throwing things around. I’ve never seen him so mad.

Dr. G.:

Do you know what caused this?

Kim:

Yes, I heard he lost a shipment of furniture and he
doesn’t like losing money. I must attend to his needs.

It was one of her duties to make sure her drunken master
got himself to bed in one piece. As she helped him to his
room he became a little more sober.
Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Kim:

He, he is ripping my clothes off. No, please no, don’t....

B5chapter 5.pmd

60

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

61

Roots, Caribbean Style

Ruby was raped by this drunken furniture maker. In his
usual unpredictable personality, he just decided to rape her.
This man had never so much as touched Ruby before.
Dr. G.:

How are you doing now?

Kim:

I’m okay. I guess. I feel so ashamed. What am I supposed to do?

Ruby was not the most decisive person. She knew there
wasn’t much she could do about her situation, so she continued with her duties.
I moved her forward by a few months to see how she was
making out.
Dr. G.:

Did Edward continue having sex with you?

Kim:

No. I don’t understand that man. That night he raped
me, I saw a different side of him. I was so frightened
that he would continue forcing himself on me.

Dr. G.:

And he hasn’t?

Kim:

Not once since then. Thank God he seems to have
returned to his usual routines and sees his whores
just like before.

Edward was indeed a strange man. He never brought his
prostitutes home with him. In fact, he kept a clean and respectable home. With the exception of the night he raped
Ruby, nothing of a sinister nature occurred in Edward’s personal residence.
One thing Ruby did describe that I found significant was
Edward’s aversion to children. He hated children. A year or
two after she arrived at his home, one of the other slaves
became pregnant by a native islander. Edward immediately
sold her and lost his temper on a daily basis for weeks following that event.
I progressed her forward to a significant event.
Dr. G.:

What is going on with you Ruby?

Kim:

I’m in trouble.

B5chapter 5.pmd

61

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

62

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What is the matter?

Kim:

I’m pregnant. He [Edward] is going to get rid of me.

Ruby was summoned into Edward’s den one evening.
He was sober and just looked at her with disgust. She was so
frightened, she was shaking. He proceeded to beat her while
repeating over and over again how she broke the rules.
Fortunately for Ruby, Edward stopped this beating before seriously hurting her. He sold her to a man who owned
and ran a hotel in town.
Dr. G.:

I know this has been a difficult time for you. What
has happened since I last spoke to you?

Kim:

I’m not pregnant.

Dr. G.:

You mean you lost the baby?

Kim:

No. I was never pregnant to begin with.

Ruby’s luck was definitely improving. She did not like
being Edward’s slave one bit. This false pregnancy of hers
was the only practical way she could have escaped this most
uncomfortable life.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your new master?

Kim:

His name is Roger and he runs a nice hotel.

Dr. G.:

What are your duties?

Kim:

I make the beds and clean the rooms. Master Roger
is very kind to me.

This was most definitely a move up for Ruby. This was a
good-size hotel, but there were other girls there to help her.
Roger lived in a nice home not far from the hotel and her
quarters were in his personal residence. This was a nice “job”
for Ruby. Everyone seemed to get along with each other, and
Ruby was happy for the first time in her young life.
Dr. G.:

Ruby, does anything scare you these days?

Kim:

No. I can’t recall when I wasn’t frightened of someone or something. I feel safe now.

B5chapter 5.pmd

62

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

63

Roots, Caribbean Style

As time went by, Ruby adjusted easily to this life. She
forgot about Edward and worked very hard for Master Roger.
Dr. G.:

Do you have a special man in your life?

Kim:

Not really. I do get into town once in a while, and I
go out with some of the men. But there’s nobody
special in my life.

Ruby’s self image was improving. She found it easier to
meet some of the male slaves and local laborers on her days
off. She would socialize, and even become intimate with them,
but there was no special person in her life, nor was she looking for a Mr. Right at this time.
Dr. G.:

Do you want to get married some day?

Kim:

No. I like my life right now just the way it is. I have
everything I want and I’m satisfied.

Ruby’s needs were simple. She had everything she wanted
in life and a kind master.
Dr. G.:

Tell me more about Master Roger.

Kim:

He is a very kind man. Sometimes he gives me gifts of
clothes that are fancy when he knows I have a new
man in my life.

Dr. G.:

Does he show a special personal interest in you?

Kim:

He’s not interested in me sexually, if that’s what you
mean. He just tolerates me and the others well.

Dr. G.:

Does Master Roger have a family?

Kim:

His wife died some years back and he has no children. He seems to be happy just taking care of his
hotel and providing for our needs.

There didn’t seem to be any immediate threat or causes
of concern to Ruby. She had a safe and secure life and she
became involved with men whenever she wanted without the
obligations of a long-term relationship.
Dr. G.:

B5chapter 5.pmd

Is there anything about your duties that you find
unpleasant?

63

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

64

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Kim:

Yes. Sometimes a man stays in the hotel with a
woman who is not his wife and this can become uncomfortable.

Dr. G.:

How so?

Kim:

Master Roger doesn’t encourage that kind of behavior when it happens. Some of these whores act in
a low class way. Master Roger nicely asks them to
leave.

Dr. G.:

Doesn’t he know who these regulars are so he can
just not give them a room?

Kim:

It’s not regulars. These are men who travel here on
business, so Master Roger doesn’t know who they are.

Dr. G.:

What about the women?

Kim:

There are so many new women coming and going to
our island that it is impossible to keep track of them.
I don’t even know who is really a man’s wife and who
is just a whore.

Roger really did try to run a respectable hotel, but the transient nature of the island and the business of trading made it
very difficult to enforce. Apparently, these incidents were few
and far between, so Roger wasn’t that concerned about them.
Ruby assimilated very well into this culture. She never
seemed to miss her family or African heritage. Her life was
simple, but relatively free from stress, and was fulfilling to her.
When I progressed Ruby forward, a most unusual event
transpired.
Dr. G.:

What is happening at this time, Ruby?

Kim:

I was cleaning up a room when I heard a strange
sound down the hall.

Dr. G.:

What was it?

Kim:

I thought I heard a scream, but it was more like a
high-pitched sound.

B5chapter 5.pmd

64

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

65

Roots, Caribbean Style

Ruby went to investigate this situation and when she
knocked on the door to the suspect room, a familiar face
greeted her.
Dr. G.:

Who is it?

Kim:

It’s him! It’s Edward.

Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Kim:

He, he pulled me into the room and told me he
wanted me in the bed with the other woman.

Edward was somewhat drunk. He brought a prostitute to
Roger’s hotel and spent the night with her. This was the first
time he had gone to this hotel.
Ruby’s former master now decided to expand his sexual
interests. He, of course, recognized Ruby and demanded
she join him and his rented escort for a threesome.
Dr. G.:

What did you do?

Kim:

I, I had no choice. I knew he would beat me if I
objected.

Dr. G.:

Why didn’t you just scream for help?

Kim:

He had a gun on a nightstand by the bed. I was afraid
he would use it on me. He is out of control when he
drinks.

Edward wasn’t exactly predictable when he was sober.
As sexually free and uninhibited as Ruby was with her various lovers, this was quite different. The thought of having
sex with Edward was utterly repulsive to Ruby. However, the
homosexual acts she was being forced to commit with Edward’s
prostitute disgusted her even further.
After it was over, Edward hit Ruby a few times for good
measure, and she ran out of the room. Ruby went to her
quarters in Roger’s house and cried. She refused to leave
her room.
Dr. G.:

B5chapter 5.pmd

What did Roger do?

65

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

66
Kim:

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
After he came home, he knocked on my door and we
talked. He is such a good listener. I was afraid to tell
him because he bought me from that man [Edward].

NOTE: Whenever Ruby described Edward, it was almost
always “that man” or “him.” She couldn’t even bring herself
to call him by name.
Dr. G.: Did Roger tell you how he was going to deal with
this situation?
Kim:

Roger said he was going to have a talk with him.
Roger is not a violent man, so I didn’t think he could
do anything rash.

Dr. G.:

What about Edward? Are you concerned he will do
something violent?

Kim:

I really don’t know.

Nobody, not even Edward, knew what he was going to do
next. This didn’t sound good. Roger was a gentleman, and
he was going to pay a call on a man who was armed and
dangerous and has absolutely no respect for human life, especially that of a slave.
Roger decided the best place to discuss this delicate
matter was Edward’s home, rather than his place of business.
That evening, Roger drove over to Edward’s home.
Dr. G.:

Ruby, what did you do while Roger was away?

Kim:

I went with him.

Dr. G.:

What? You mean Roger let you come along on a
visit like this?

Kim:

He didn’t know it at the time, but I hid in the back of
his wagon. It was a bumpy ride, but I got there all
right.

As Roger pulled his wagon up to Edward’s house, Ruby
waited. Edward’s servant let Roger in and Ruby went around
to a window by the living room. She guessed correctly that
this was where the discussion would take place.

B5chapter 5.pmd

66

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

Roots, Caribbean Style

67

She didn’t hear anything, but she could see them. At
first, the conversation seemed quite civil. Roger came to work
this out and to make sure that Edward never harmed Ruby
again. He also made it clear that Edward was never to come
to his hotel again. Roger was calm and direct during this
conversation.
Ruby was straining herself trying to hear what was going
on, but she just couldn’t. Using her knowledge of the house,
she remembered that one of the windows could be opened
from the outside, so she tried to do just that.
Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Kim:

I made a noise and both of them turned my way to
see what caused it.

Dr. G.:

Go on.

Kim:

I felt embarrassed, but there was nothing else I could
do.

Dr. G.:

What did you do?

Kim:

Roger motioned for me to come in and I went
around to the front door and joined them.

This was a mistake because as soon as she entered the
living room, Edward started yelling. He lost control and attacked Roger.
Dr. G.:

What did Roger do?

Kim:

He was taken by surprise. That man [Edward] started
strangling my master, and I was frightened.

Dr. G.:

Please continue, I know it’s difficult.

Kim:

Roger started to turn blue and his tongue was
sticking out so I grabbed a vase and hit that man
[Edward] with it.

Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Kim:

I grabbed a shotgun from the hunting rack and shot
Edward three times. He died instantly.

B5chapter 5.pmd

67

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

68

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Kimâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s superconscious mind tape informed me that Roger
is Brett and Edward is Frank. What I like about this case is
that a woman saved her male soul mateâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s life. Usually, the
reverse occurs.
Today, Kim and Brett are as happy as ever. Whether they
are boundary soul mates or twin flames, only time will tell.

B5chapter 5.pmd

68

2/3/2004, 12:21 PM

69

A Nymphomaniacâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Past Life

Chapter 6

A Nymphomaniacâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Past Life

I have always felt that some of the most significant experiences come from primitive lifetimes. Our highly technological
society is quite stressful and confusing to most people. The
more advanced the civilization is, the more detached we get
from our basic being.
Consider those who involve themselves in spiritual development. Living in a monastery in the 21st century requires a
return to a very simplistic life. Daily meditation would be far
more common to those cultures today. Next, we can consider
primitive societies that exist today in remote locations such as
parts of South America, Africa, or Australia.
The Aborigines of Australia are an excellent example of
how primitive people utilize these principles for survival. It is so
hot in the Australian desert, that these people must sit motionless for hours at a time to preserve their energy.
Another benefit of exploring these primitive lifetimes is
that they are pure experiences. These lives are less contaminated by artificial technological improvements. Basic emotions,
basic drives, and more natural responses to the world around
them are far more characteristic of these simple existences.
In 1996, a 31-year-old graphic artist named Fran called
me to assist her in overcoming her problem with nymphomania. She simply could not refuse to sexually satisfy nearly every

69

B6chapter 6.pmd

69

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

70

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

man she met. This compulsive behavior caused her difficulties
both personally and professionally.
She recently met Allan and began dating him, but could
not be faithful. Fran wanted to be rid of this compulsive behavior and move on with her life.
I have no idea where a patient is going to go when I begin
a past life regression. Sometimes they have an idea if they
have had a recent dream about a possible past life, or if they
have responded well to my past life regression conditioning
cassette. Fran’s past life was most definitely related to her
present nymphomania problem.
Dr. G.:

Where do you find yourself?

Fran:

I’m on an island. It’s not a very large island.

Dr. G.:

Are you male or female?

Fran:

I’m a girl.

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Fran:

[Fran couldn’t answer this question immediately. She
had to translate the name into something she could
relate to me] Eva. I am called Eva.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about your family.

Fran:

I live with my parents and brother.

Dr. G.:

Are you happy?

Fran:

I can’t really answer that. I have fun and play a lot,
but I get into trouble also.

Fran described her life as a 10-year-old girl on a
Polynesian island. She was a very rebellious child and her
parents had to discipline her often. Her brother was the
complete opposite. He loved to fish with her father and was a
quiet and well behaved older brother.
Eva didn’t resent her brother or her parents. She just
wanted to do whatever she wanted to do and whenever
she felt like it. This independent form of behavior was not

B6chapter 6.pmd

70

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

71

A Nymphomaniac’s Past Life

acceptable to her tribe. Eva was also a loner. She did not
relate well to others and spent a lot of time by herself.
Dr. G.:

Eva, what have you been up to?

Fran:

I went exploring.

Dr. G.:

Where to?

Fran:

I took one of the canoes and just went to sea.

Dr. G.:

How long were you gone?

Fran:

I don’t know. It was a long time. My parents didn’t
like it.

Dr. G.:

Were you punished?

Fran:

Yes. My father was especially bothered by this because the chief held counsel with him.

Eva was an adventurous young island girl. The problem
with the tribe was that she was setting a bad example, particularly for the girls. The chief of the tribe discussed this
with Eva’s father many times. This was embarrassing for her
father, and didn’t exactly please her mother. From what Eva
described, her father was pretty easygoing, but her mother
was much more of a disciplinarian.
Dr. G.:

Did the chief speak to you directly about this?

Fran:

No. That is not our way. It is the responsibility of the
parents to guide their children.

Dr. G.:

Are you purposely trying to humiliate your father?

Fran:

No. I love my father. It’s hard to describe. Sometimes
I just get this feeling that makes me do something
that I know is wrong.

Dr. G.:

Are there any other reasons you do this?

Fran:

Yes, it’s fun. I am skillful at going to sea, and I like to
go out farther and to different places each time.

Dr. G.:

How do you know where to come back?

B6chapter 6.pmd

71

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

72
Fran:

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
I don’t know. I just use my instincts and I always come
home safely. I never get lost. There is no need to
worry about me.

Many parents of adolescents today could identify with
this trait. Eva felt indestructible and her success at these
tasks just added to her confidence. The one thing that
bothered me about what she said was the “feeling” that
made her do the wrong thing. I made a mental note to follow
its path, if any.
Dr. G.:

Eva, how do you get along with your brother?

Fran:

Okay, I guess. He’s not much fun. He’s older and he
works with my father. Sometimes he tells me I should
be more like him.

I next progressed Eva forward in time to a significant
event. She was about 16 years old.
Dr. G.:

What has transpired since I last spoke to you?

Fran:

There was an eruption on a nearby island.

Dr. G.:

What kind of an eruption?

Fran:

It’s a volcanic eruption. Some of my people were
visiting this island, and all of a sudden, it erupted.
There was all this stuff coming out of the volcano.
Many people were killed or hurt.

Dr. G.:

What happened to the rest of them?

Fran:

My people helped them leave and took them to another island.

Dr. G.:

Are your people worried that the same thing might
happen to your island?

Fran:

They try not to think about it. There are volcanoes
on most of the nearby islands and this is the first one
to do this since I can remember.

Dr. G.:

So, what does the chief do?

B6chapter 6.pmd

72

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

73

A Nymphomaniacâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Past Life
Fran:

He held counsel with the elders and they decided
that we should not concern ourselves with erupting
volcanoes. Our island is good and there is plenty to
eat. We will be all right.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about yourself. Do you have a boyfriend?
[When I asked her this Fran looked very shy and embarrassed. This was quite a change from the indestructible and unmovable Eva I have spoken to before.]

Fran:

Well, there is a boy whom I like. He is a great fisherman and the son of an elder.

Dr. G.:

What is his name?

Fran:

Sim.

Dr. G.:

Do you see him privately?

Fran:

Well, not exactly. He knows my reputation as being a
little difficult. Sim is very quiet and I think I frighten
him.

Dr. G.:

What are you going to do about this?

Fran:

I help him with his other work and I think he is starting to like me more.

Dr. G.:

What other work is that?

Fran:

He makes the carvings on wood and sometimes stone.
It takes a long time and I bring him things and talk to
him to help pass the time.

Eva described Sim as being tall, light skinned, and black
haired. He had an athletic physique and Eva really looked
forward to spending time with him.
Dr. G.:

What kind of carvings does Sim make?

Fran:

He carves figures of the Gods.

Dr. G.:

What does he do with them?

Fran:

Most of them are used in our rituals and religious rites.

Dr. G.:

How are things with your family?

B6chapter 6.pmd

73

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

74

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Fran:

My parents argue a lot, mostly over me. They think
I’m too wild and should take a mate.

Dr. G.:

Is that why you are interested in Sim?

Fran:

I’m interested in Sim because I like him, not because
my parents think it’s the right thing.

Not long after this conversation a very unusual thing
happened to Eva.
Dr. G.:

What is going on now, Eva?

Fran:

I have become a dancer during our rituals. It’s a lot
of fun.

Dr. G.:

Is this part of your custom?

Fran:

Yes. I asked to do this and the elders agreed. I guess
they thought it would keep me out of trouble.

Dr. G.:

How do your parents feel about your dancing?

Fran:

My father doesn’t object to it, but my mother doesn’t
like it at all. She says that it will be harder for me to
find a mate.

Dr. G.:

What does Sim say about this?

Fran:

He has no control over me. We are just friends.

I next moved Eva forward to any significant event that
would involve her dancing.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now?

Fran:

I’m dancing. It’s night and I feel strange.

Dr. G.:

How strange?

Fran:

I don’t know. It’s like I can’t control my body. Something is making me do things.

What occurred next was even stranger. Eva danced in a
rather exotic and sensual fashion. She had no control over
her action whatsoever. This was extreme even for her.
Dr. G.:

B6chapter 6.pmd

Tell me what happened next.

74

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

75

A Nymphomaniac’s Past Life
Fran:

I danced around the men and started taking my
clothes off. I teased them and then I made love to
them, most of them.

Dr. G.:

What did your father do while this was going on?

Fran:

He just watched. I know he didn’t approve, but this is
not against our ways.

Dr. G.:

What about Sim?

Fran:

I made love to him, too. I wasn’t aware of him as Sim.
I just did what the feeling made me do.

Dr. G.:

Tell me more about this feeling.

Fran:

It’s very strange. I mean, one minute, I’m Eva dancing and having a good time. Then, all of a sudden, I
don’t know who I am. It’s as if my body was being
controlled by someone else.

Dr. G.:

This feeling, is it anything like you described when
you were younger? You know, the feeling that made
you do things that you knew were wrong.

Fran:

You know, you are right. I never thought of that.
What I felt as a child was much weaker, but now that
I think about it, it was similar.

I was now more concerned for Eva. She was no longer
describing mere independence or teenage thoughts of immortality. She was describing possession. Her people didn’t
treat this possession as something evil or something to remove. These were primitive people who believed in many
Gods. This was just an action by the Gods, so they included
it in their rituals.
Dr. G.:

How long does this feeling last?

Fran:

A couple of hours, I guess.

Dr. G.:

And when it disappears, how are you left?

Fran:

Well, I feel cold when the feeling comes over me. When
it leaves, I don’t remember that much. I do recall what
I did, but there are times that I just blank out.

B6chapter 6.pmd

75

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

76

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

These are classic characteristics of possession. It’s too bad
that she didn’t practice spiritual protection techniques with
white light and other means. This could have prevented this
spell. We will deal with this issue in detail in Chapter 10.
Dr. G.:

How does Sim respond to you after the ceremony?

Fran:

The next day I saw him and he just wouldn’t discuss
it. He ignored it completely. I sure wasn’t going to
bring it up.

Eva became known for her dancing. The feeling came
into her body just about every time she danced. It became
expected and merely included as part of their rites.
Dr. G.:

How did this role affect you?

Fran:

I went on with my chores as usual. It was only during
these rituals that I felt strange.

Dr. G.:

Do you feel guilty about this?

Fran:

No, I wouldn’t say that.

Dr. G.:

What about your relationship with Sim?

Fran:

Sim and I are getting closer. I don’t really think it has
much to do with my duties as a dancer. We were
getting closer before this started.

Dr. G.:

Has anything else significant happened?

Fran:

Well, I have become well-known as a dancer. I guess
I’m the only one on my island and in the neighboring islands with this feeling.

Dr. G.:

How does this affect you?

Fran:

Men come from other islands to see me and to take
part in the ceremony. I kind of like this attention.

Dr. G.:

Does Sim like it?

Fran:

As I said before, he is very quiet and shy. He doesn’t
come right out and say so, but I just know he doesn’t
like it.

Dr. G.:

Have you thought of giving this up?

B6chapter 6.pmd

76

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

77

A Nymphomaniac’s Past Life
Fran:

I have, but I can’t just now. Sim is the son of one of our
tribal elders. His father would not want his son to be
the reason these rituals stopped. Also, the men who
come from the other islands trade with us more regularly. So this is good for our people.

Dr. G.:

And your parents?

Fran:

My father doesn’t object, but my mother does. Even
though she knows Sim and I will wed, she gives me a
hard time.

This went on for many months. Eva kept dancing and
being the center of these orgies. People came from near and
far to see her and take part in these ceremonies. The island
prospered and Eva’s relationship with Sim grew.
Dr. G.:

What is going on at this time?

Fran:

Sim and I are married. We are very happy and I think
my mother finally approves of something I did.

Dr. G.:

Are you still dancing?

Fran:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

Do you still get that feeling when you dance?

Fran:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

Does that feeling ever come over you at times other
than when you are dancing?

Fran:

Now that you mention it, no. It’s only when I’m dancing that I notice this feeling. Isn’t that strange?

I progressed her forward by a few years to a significant event.
Dr. G.:

Tell me what you have been up to.

Fran:

The feeling has almost left me since you last asked
me about it.

Dr. G.:

When did this happen?

Fran:

Very recently. First I noticed it getting a little weaker
each time I danced. Then it wouldn’t be there at all.
Now I haven’t had the feeling in more than a month.

B6chapter 6.pmd

77

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

78

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Do you still dance?

Fran:

Yes, but I don’t engage in sex with the men.

Dr. G.:

Isn’t that part of the ritual?

Fran:

Only if I want it to be. You see, if I don’t experience the
feeling, then I don’t want to have sex with the men.

Dr. G.:

What effect does this have on the tribe?

Fran:

I’m not as special as I was. Because I just dance, it’s
not as exciting, so the men from the other island
don’t come here as often.

Dr. G.:

What about the trade they engage in?

Fran:

Oh, those people still come and our island has prospered much since I started dancing. It’s just these
other men don’t come.

Dr. G.:

So, does that mean that you haven’t hurt the tribe by
your change in dancing?

Fran:

Yes, that’s right. As a matter of fact, the Chief and
the elders actually like me.

Shortly after this, Eva decided she didn’t want to dance
anymore. She was replaced by another girl who just did routine dancing, and Eva returned to a normal life.
Dr. G.:

Do you miss the attention you received when you
were dancing?

Fran:

Not really. It was fun for a while, but now I keep
myself busy and am very happy with Sim.

Dr. G.:

Do you plan to have any children?

Fran:

Yes. We are working on it, but the fertility Gods
have not been kind to us.

Dr. G.:

Is there something wrong?

Fran:

I don’t know. Maybe it’s all the excitement and
changes from the feeling.

Dr. G.:

How does Sim respond to this?

B6chapter 6.pmd

78

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

79

A Nymphomaniac’s Past Life
Fran:

He is very loving and supportive. My father is not
taking it well.

Dr. G.:

In what way?

Fran:

It does not look good for me to not be with child.
Sim is the son of an elder and this is a reflection on
his manhood. It’s embarrassing to everyone.

Dr. G.:

What can you do about it?

Fran:

My mother and I pray to the Gods, but there is nothing else I can do.

Dr. G.:

Does this cause conflict between your parents?

Fran:

Yes it does. My mother argues often about this with
my father and this is not good. Just when they were
feeling proud of me, this dancing and these child
bearing issues crops up.

During the next few months, things began to settle down.
Eva reported no other experiences with the feeling.
I progressed her to a significant event in her life.
Dr. G.:

What is happening at this time?

Fran:

It’s that new man.

Dr. G.:

Who’s that?

Fran:

There is a new man from a nearby island who used to
come here when I was dancing. He stopped coming
after I stopped dancing. Now he is back again.

Dr. G.:

Is that unusual?

Fran:

Yes it is. He is not a trader. He just came to see me
dance and I don’t know why he is here now.

Dr. G.:

Are you attracted to him?

Fran:

No, I am afraid of him. I try to keep away from him,
but it’s hard.

Dr. G.:

What does he do when he comes to the island?

Fran:

It’s strange. He collects things. One time he asked
me for a shell necklace I was wearing.

B6chapter 6.pmd

79

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

80

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Did you give it to him?

Fran:

No. When I refused to give it to him he offered to
trade a special carving knife for it.

Dr. G.:

What did you do?

Fran:

I knew that Sim would like the knife so I traded with
him. The knife was worth much more than the necklace, so I just couldn’t resist.

The mysterious islander’s name was Mar. I didn’t like the
idea of him obtaining Eva’s necklace. It could be a simple and
harmless souvenir from Eva’s former dancing days (equivalent
to getting an autograph from a celebrity). On the other hand, it
could be used in some magick ritual (love spell, etc.), which
was not uncommon for these primitive people. Also, it could
help explain the origin of the “feeling.”
Dr. G.

What happened next?

Fran:

Everything went well. Sim loved the knife and was
proud of me for the trade.

Dr. G.:

Does he know of Mar’s interest in you?

Fran:

He doesn’t think there is one.

As I moved Eva forward, I instructed her to move to any
significant event involving Mar.
Dr. G.:

What has happened since I last spoke to you?

Fran:

It’s back.

Dr. G.:

What is?

Fran:

The feeling. I’m getting the feeling again.

Dr. G.:

How strong is it and what do you do when you get
this feeling?

Fran:

It’s not as strong as it was when I was dancing but I feel
tingly all over. I am drawn to Mar and I want to see him.

Dr. G.:

Have you seen him?

Fran:

Yes. We have been together a few times.

B6chapter 6.pmd

80

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

81

A Nymphomaniac’s Past Life
Dr. G.:

This is important, Eva. When you are with Mar, is it
always preceded by this feeling?

Fran:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

And do you feel powerless to stop when it is going
on at that time?

Fran:

Yes.

It was as I suspected. Eva was the victim of some magick
ritual. For those readers who think voodoo is bunk, I would
suggest reading my book Protected by the Light1, which discusses many forms of psychic attacks.
Eva was powerless to resist Mar and began having an affair
with him. She didn’t find him particularly attractive and her
relationship with Sim was good, but this didn’t matter. Mar told
Eva that if she pleased him, he would use a spell to eliminate
her infertility problem. But he made her promise never to tell
Sim about their relationship. She readily agreed to this.
Dr. G.:

Do you think Sim suspects your affair?

Fran:

No, I don’t think so.

Dr. G.:

Wouldn’t he talk to you about it if he did suspect
you seeing another man?

Fran:

He is a very proud man and doesn’t like to face things
like that.

Dr. G.:

You mean when he didn’t discuss your sexual activities with all those men when you danced?

Fran:

Exactly.

This affair kept going on for about six months. Unfortunately for Eva, people suspected this affair. Mar made many
extra trips to their island and Eva just couldn’t camouflage
the effects and the feeling and her sporadic interest in Mar.
Dr. G.:

What is happening now?

Fran:

It’s terrible. Mother confronted me about my affair
with Mar.

B6chapter 6.pmd

81

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

82

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Does Sim know?

Fran:

Everybody knows. Sim won’t talk to me about it, but
he is being pressured by his father, and my father is
being confronted by the chief.

Dr. G.:

What are you going to do?

Fran:

I will have to end it now.

Eva tried to end this affair, but Mar was just too influential over her. He promised to let her get pregnant and he was
good to his word.
Dr. G.:

Whose baby is it?

Fran:

I really don’t know. It is something I want and it is
taking a lot of pressure off of me and my family.

Dr. G.:

Does Sim ask you who the father is?

Fran:

No. I told you he supports me in all that I do. He still
hasn’t confronted me about the affair.

Eva stopped seeing Mar. Mar somehow lost his control
over Eva. He returned to his tribe and tried to have war declared against Eva’s people. One young warrior from Mar’s
tribe argued with him and a fight ensued. Mar was killed and
the Chief was furious.
The Chief seriously considered war against Eva’s tribe and
the only thing that could prevent this battle was Eva. He summoned her to his island to perform her dance for him.
Eva was understandably nervous but did as she was told
and danced for the Chief. The feeling returned and she engaged in several sexual acts with the Chief. War was now averted.
From the superconscious mind, I was able to identify Eva’s
parents as her current parents. Most notably, Sim is Allan and
Mar is an ex-boyfriend from high school who treated her poorly
and literally stalked her after she broke up with him.
The karmic carryover from the life of Eva was that sexual
promiscuity not only felt good, but prevented a war and the loss

B6chapter 6.pmd

82

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Nymphomaniacâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Past Life

83

of many lives. Two years following this regression, Fran married
Allan and established a relationship based on fidelity. She no
longer had to compulsively engage in sex with other men.

B6chapter 6.pmd

83

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

84

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 7

Hysterical Blindness and
a Past LIfe in the London Slums

Many people ask me what hypnosis can really do. If, according to recent statistics, modern medical technology is only
75 percent successful, can hypnosis make up that additional
25 percent?
There are many syndromes that modern medicine can’t
cure. Drugs can treat many symptoms temporarily, but such
diseases as ulcers, colitis, anxiety, and depression are not caused
by bacteria, viruses, or fungi. They can’t be cured with medication alone. They are psychosomatic in their origin, and the
subconscious mind has a great deal to do with the elimination
of these disturbances.
But even more obviously in the realm of treatment
through hypnosis is a category of illness referred to as “hysterical disorders.” Included in this category are hysterical paralysis, hysterical deafness, and hysterical blindness. These
disorders have absolutely no medical or organic cause. A complete physical examination by a specialist would reveal no
medical reason for the patient’s infirmity, yet the patient remains unable to function in one of these areas.
The case that I am about to describe illustrates this principle with sight loss. An attractive 25-year-old interior decorator was brought to my office early in January 1978 by her
boyfriend. Her name was Judy, and Angelo was her male

84

B7Chapter 7.pmd

84

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Hysterical Blindness and a Past Life...

85

companion. Angelo had called me earlier that day to make
this emergency appointment. It seemed that the week before,
Judy had lost her sight without any warning and with no apparent cause.
Judy had never had problems with her eyes before and, in
fact, didn’t even wear glasses. She had been to an ophthalmologist affiliated with Johns Hopkins University and all of the tests
turned out negative. In other words, there was no medical reason
for Judy’s blindness. I had personally spoken with her ophthalmologist and he verified these facts.
It wasn’t easy to take a history from Judy because she was
very upset and depressed. However, I finally found out that
Judy lost her sight shortly after discovering Angelo taking
amphetamine pills. She had been dating him for more than a
year, but he had not informed her of his habit. Within five
minutes after inadvertently seeing Angelo taking these pills,
Judy screamed and lost her sight.
I asked her if she screamed because of some pain. She said
that she just had an uncontrollable urge to scream but did not
feel any form of pain. Judy was naturally anxious about whether
or not I could help her. I explained to her and Angelo what I
knew about hysterical blindness. I made no promises or guarantees, but told her I would do my best.
Introducing a hypnotic trance requires only that the patient hear the hypnotherapist, and because Judy’s hearing was
unimpaired, this presented no problem. Even patients experiencing hysterical deafness can be cured. The subconscious (alpha) hears what the conscious mind (beta) cannot.
Judy entered into a good medium trance rather quickly,
which surprised me, considering her depression and recent
traumatic experience. I conditioned her for a simple age regression to be performed on her next visit. She left my office
feeling relieved and more relaxed.
The second session consisted of a simple age regression. I
instructed Judy’s subconscious to search through its memory
banks and relive a scene or scenes that were directly respon-

B7Chapter 7.pmd

85

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

86

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

sible for her current sight problems. She reviewed a number of
childhood scenes, but nothing directly related to her present
loss of sight.
During the next week, I saw Judy two more times and performed a number of simple age regressions. Again, nothing of
significance surfaced. Past life regression was the only avenue
we hadn’t explored, so we decided to try it.
Judy was very willing, but Angelo didn’t share her enthusiasm. I told them to discuss it and call me when they had
made their decision. The next day, Angelo called to schedule
a past life regression. Judy told me she considered it her only
real hope. If the ophthalmologist at Johns Hopkins couldn’t
find a medical cause, then the origin of her blindness must be
psychological. Because she had been sightless for nearly three
weeks, she was desperate. Angelo didn’t think much of hypnosis, but he was willing to try anything to help Judy.
I introduced Judy into a medium-level hypnotic trance
and gave her subconscious mind the suggestion to return to
the true origin of her present sight problems. For about five
minutes she sat motionless in my recliner with her eyes closed.
I could tell she was reviewing many scenes because her eyeballs were moving back and forth rapidly.
Judy finally began to answer my questions in a highpitched, childlike voice.
Dr. G.:

Can you tell me what you see now?

Judy:

Everything I like [giggling].

Dr. G.:

Where are you?

Judy:

I’m with my daddy.

Dr. G.

And where are you both right now?

Judy:

Daddy said I can have some candy. He said I can
have three pieces. The shop is full of candy and stuff.

Dr. G.:

What kind of stuff?

Judy:

Oh, you know. Food and stuff.

B7Chapter 7.pmd

86

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Hysterical Blindness and a Past Life...

87

Dr. G.:

How long have you been in the shop?

Judy:

We just got here. I can’t make up my mind what to
get [giggling].

Dr. G.

What is your name?

Judy:

Elsie. Do you want some candy too? [giggling]

Dr. G.:

No, thank you, Elsie. Where do you live?

Judy:

In London, of course. Aren’t you silly!

D. G.:

What is your father’s name?

Judy:

Daddy.

Dr. G.:

I mean, what do other people call your daddy?

Judy:

Mac.

Dr. G.:

Where is your mother?

Judy:

She went away. [Her voice became soft.]

Dr. G.:

Where did she go?

Judy:

I don’t know. [Patient began crying.]

Dr. G.:

All right, Elsie, calm down. On the count of five, all
negative feelings about your mother not being here
will disappear and you will feel happy again.
One...two...three...four...five. What kind of work does
your father do?

Judy:

He works in a place with machines, big machines.
[Patient began giggling again.]

Dr. G.:

How old are you, Elsie?

Judy:

I’m 6 years old. [She sounded very proud.]

Elsie responded well to my questions. She quickly
changed her emotional responses from that of crying to giggling when I gave her the appropriate instructions. Further
questioning revealed the following past life.
Elsie lived in a very run-down apartment on the south side
of London in 1887. Her father was a factory worker in a textile
mill. Her mother left her and Mac when Elsie was just 3 years

B7Chapter 7.pmd

87

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

88

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

old because of Mac’s drinking. This was not a pleasant life for
Elsie as she had no playmates and her father worked long hours.
Even when he did have time for her, he was usually drunk.
It was surprising how much Elsie loved Mac, considering he beat her often and spent very little time with her. The
only real pleasure he provided was an occasional trip to the
candy shop at the market. It was Elsie’s short memory that
allowed her to forget about Mac’s faults and deal only with a
present pleasurable experience.
I next progressed Elsie forward in time, asking her to remember the true cause, if any, of her present sight problem.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Elsie?

Judy:

I’m outside playing. [She sounded very sad.]

Dr. G.:

Is anything wrong?

Judy:

No.

Dr. G.:

Come on now, Elsie, you can tell me. What is bothering you?

Judy:

Well, I don’t have anyone to play with and everybody is in church.

Dr. G.:

Why aren’t you in church?

Judy:

Daddy doesn’t believe in going to church. He says
it’s a waste of time.

Dr. G.:

Is this Sunday?

Judy:

Yes. Can you play with me? [Patient began giggling
again.]

Dr. G.:

I can’t play with you, Elsie, but I would like to know
some things about your daddy. Would you mind telling me more about him?

Judy:

Oh, okay. [Patient sounded bored.]

Dr. G.:

Where is he now?

Judy:

He’s in the house, probably in his room. He always
spends Sundays in his room.

B7Chapter 7.pmd

88

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Hysterical Blindness and a Past Life...

89

Dr. G.:

How old are you now, Elsie?

Judy:

Eleven.

Dr. G.:

Does your daddy ever take you to the park or to the
city on Sunday?

Judy:

No, I can’t remember the last time he took me anywhere.

Dr. G.:

Do you love your daddy?

Judy:

Well, I, of course I do. [She hesitated a few seconds
before answering this question.]

I next progressed Elsie forward asking for the actual event
that would explain her present sight problem. She had gone
back into the apartment on this Sunday afternoon looking
for her father.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Elsie?

Judy:

I’m on the couch playing with my doll.

Dr. G.:

Where is your daddy?

Judy:

He’s in his room, I think.

Dr. G.:

What are you going to do now?

Judy:

I’m going to sneak up on my daddy and scare him.

Elsie went to her father’s room and quietly opened the
door.
Dr. G.:

Can you see your daddy, Elsie?

Judy:

Oh, God, what is my daddy doing? Daddy, Daddy,
please don’t do that! [Judy had a look of absolute
horror on her face.]

Dr. G.:

What is your daddy doing?

Judy:

He, he’s sticking himself in the arm and he has a rubber band on his arm. [Patient sounded very agitated.]

Mac had severely beaten Elsie for walking in on him
while he was in the process of injecting morphine into his
arm. Elsie had never seen her father inject himself before.
Apparently alcoholism wasn’t Mac’s only problem.
After he had beaten Elsie, Mac locked her in his closet
for the rest of that day. Elsie was in a state of shock. She
hadn’t eaten all day and hurt from the beating. It wasn’t
until early the next morning that she was released from the
closet.
It was necessary to give Judy (Elsie) many calming suggestions before bringing her out of the trance.
Dr. G.:

Judy, on the count of five, you will be back in the
present, January 1978, and you will remember everything that you experienced and reexperienced.
One...two...three...four...five, awaken.

Judy:

Wow, that was quite something! Dr. Goldberg, Dr.
Goldberg, I can see you! You’re very hazy but I can
see you. [Patient was elated.]

Dr. G.:

Focus on my voice, Judy. When I snap my fingers,
you will be able to see me clearly.

It took Judy about three minutes until she was able to see
me clearly. We went into my reception room to join Angelo and
explain to him what had happened.
When Judy saw Angelo take the amphetamine pill (an
additive drug) she associated this incident with watching Mac
inject morphine (also an addictive drug). Judy was severely
beaten by Mac for viewing something she wasn’t supposed to
see. Because Angelo hadn’t told her about his taking amphetamines, when Judy accidentally happened in on him, her
subconscious made the association of seeing something she
wasn’t supposed to see. Through the hypnotic regression,

B7Chapter 7.pmd

90

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Hysterical Blindness and a Past Life...

91

the cause of the blindness was removed and the symptom
(blindness) disappeared.
This experience brought Judy and Angelo much closer
together. They had not been getting along well, even before
this hysterical blindness incident occurred. As a result of
this regression, their feelings for each other grew stronger.
In addition to restoring Judy’s sight, this past life regression had other unexpected benefits for her. For one thing,
she reported that her claustrophobia had disappeared. It
seemed that being locked in the closet caused Elsie, and
later Judy, to become afraid of confined spaces. By reliving
this past life, the true cause of Judy’s claustrophobia was
elicited and removed.
Another interesting fact was brought to my attention. Judy
told me that she had quit her last job with a well-known interior decorating firm because she hadn’t liked her boss. She
hardly knew him and rarely saw him, but the few times she
did see him he was either drinking or smoking. One day he
came into the office drunk from a lunch date and she simply
quit. It worried her that she couldn’t explain why at the time,
but he had made her feel so uncomfortable that she had had
to leave. Clearly, Judy’s former boss reminded her of Mac.
The association that her subconscious mind made with his
drinking compelled her to quit. Judy now understood what
had motivated her behavior and was comfortable with her
decision.
This was a most interesting and rewarding case. The fact
that the cause of Judy’s blindness was psychological made
hypnotic regression the treatment of choice.

B7Chapter 7.pmd

91

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

92

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 8

Anorexia Nervosa:
Self-Punishment for Her Last Life

Anorexia nervosa is a very dangerous syndrome. It is characterized by a patient literally starving herself to death. The
patient considers herself to be very much overweight even
though, in reality, she is at her proper weight or slightly underweight. When she looks in the mirror, she fantasizes that she
sees an overweight figure. I have observed this neurosis in
women of all ages and socioeconomic backgrounds. Most
commonly, it affects young, single women of middle-class
backgrounds.
There was a case that was reported to me not long ago
about a 19-year-old girl who read an article in a leading magazine stating that one can never be too rich or too thin. Because this young woman was from a lower middle-class family
with little chance of becoming wealthy, she decided that her
only hope was to lose weight quickly by starving herself. This
sudden weight loss nearly killed her. After a number of hospitalizations and psychotherapy, she realized the futility and
danger of her actions and fortunately came to her senses.
I do not treat many cases of anorexia nervosa, but the number of patients calling me with this problem has definitely increased during the past five years. One warm spring afternoon,
I received a telephone call from a woman by the name of Gina.
Gina was a photographer and she sounded in need of help. It
seemed that for the past three months she had literally been

92

B8Chapter 8.pmd

92

2/5/2004, 9:28 AM

Anorexia Nervosa...

93

afraid to eat. Gina couldnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t explain why, but she wanted to
starve herself. Her appetite had all but disappeared, and it
took a great deal of effort to eat any kind of food. She was 5
feet, 6 inches tall and now weighed only 92 pounds. Her weight
had dropped from 120 pounds in just three months.
Gina arrived at my office the following day, immaculately
dressed and, except for a rather emaciated figure, very attractive. She spoke almost in a whisper.
Gina described her problem, beginning when she started
having a series of nightmares. At first, she couldnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t remember
anything about her dreams, but then memories began to surface. Most of the time she would see a very obese man in his
30s. The look on his face and his mere presence would frighten
her. Gina didnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t know what this meant, but she did know that
she was afraid of this man.
My work with past life regression was well-known to Gina,
because two of her girlfriends had been regression patients of
mine. She thought that these scenes could be indications of a
past life. I agreed with her premise and began to explain the
procedure involved in regressing to a past life.
I informed Gina that it might be difficult at first to go back
to this lifetime because she had many negative responses to the
scenes she saw in her dream state. Because we are in the alpha
state (natural hypnosis) when we dream, it is not uncommon for
people to have their own past life regressions while they sleep.
Unfortunately, most of the scenes that are relived during the
dream state are forgotten immediately upon awakening.
Gina was highly intelligent and, although she had little
prior knowledge of karma or hypnosis, followed my explanations with ease. Yet when I asked her, out of trance, about past
experiences with nightmares, she had a great deal of difficulty
remembering the last time bad dreams had bothered her. She
very rarely remembered her dreams, and when she did, they
were usually meaningless to her. Before the episode that brought
her to my office, she had occasional nightmares, but none of
them affected her the way these recent dreams did.

B8Chapter 8.pmd

93

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

94

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

During Gina’s second session, I used simple age regression to
take her through various parts of her childhood. She reported
scenes of little significance, but this was preparation for her past
life regression. Gina was becoming more and more confident of
her ability to relax with hypnosis and self-hypnosis. I always teach
self-hypnosis to my patients for this very reason.
The third and fourth sessions were spent taking Gina through
two past lives. The scenes and information that she reported to
me were of little value as far as her anorexia nervosa was concerned. In one past life, Gina was the wife of a Massachusetts
farmer in the 18th century. She lived a full life and had no significant weight problems. The second life we explored showed Gina
as a seamstress in Philadelphia during the 1850s. Again no weight
problems emerged. It seemed that her subconscious mind was
fighting me. I gave her some specific suggestions to allow her
subconscious mind to relax any inhibitions concerning exploring
past life scenes directly relating to her anorexia.
We were both surprised by what Gina reported during her
fifth session. I induced Gina into a medium-level trance and
directed her back into a past life that would explain the origin
of her anorexia.
Dr. G.:

Well, it’s high. [Gina’s voice had become very deep
and she spoke much slower than normal for her.]

Dr. G.:

What does the doctor tell you?

Gina:

He tells me I must lose 30 pounds.

Dr. G.:

How do you feel about that?

Gina:

I want to tell him what he can do with those 30
pounds. [Patient was very annoyed.]

B8Chapter 8.pmd

94

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

95

Anorexia Nervosa...
Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Gina:

Edward. Edward Laslow.

Dr. G.:

How old are you, Edward?

Gina:

Call me Eddie. [Patient very demanding.] I’m 16.

Dr. G.:

What year is this?

Gina:

1906.

Dr. G.:

Where do you live?

Gina:

Chicago.

When I asked about her weight, Gina (Edward) squirmed
in the recliner. It was as if seeing herself at that weight disgusted her. Further questioning revealed that Eddie had always been overweight, and his well-to-do parents had tried
everything they could think of to help him lose weight.
Eddie was rather spoiled and was used to getting what
he wanted. He was also quite cruel and got into many fights
at school. He seemed to enjoy bullying other children, especially younger ones. As Gina described his activities, she
would continue to squirm in my chair.
I next progressed Eddie ahead five years in time. The following information was uncovered over two 45-minute sessions.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Eddie?

Gina:

I’m working in one of my father’s restaurants.

Dr. G.:

What kind of work do you do?

Gina:

I’m assistant manager.

Dr. G.:

Do you like your job?

Gina:

It’s okay. But I’m going to like it better when I get to
be manager.

Dr. G.:

Is that going to take long?

Gina:

No. In fact, I’m going to see to it that I’m promoted
real soon. [Gina had a very sinister look on her face.]

Dr. G.:

How are you going to do that?

B8Chapter 8.pmd

95

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

96

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Gina:

One of the waitresses, Mary, is a very good friend of
mine. I am going to arrange for a little show for my
father’s benefit.

Dr. G.:

What kind of show?

Gina:

My father is a real prude. When he finds out that
Mary is having an affair with Stan [the manager], he
will most certainly fire Stan and I’ll be made manager.

Dr. G.:

Why are you so certain your father will fire Stan?

Gina:

Because Stan is a married man and, like I told you,
my father is a real prude.

Eddie was a very shrewd operator. He had a great deal of
influence on Mary because she owed him some money. It
was not difficult for Eddie to talk her into staging an affair
with Stan. One evening Mary was entertaining Stan at her
apartment when they received an unexpected visitor—Eddie’s
father. Eddie had one of the waiters inform his father about
the affair and the restaurateur went to question Mary about
this accusation.
Upon entering Mary’s apartment, Eddie’s father became
outraged at Stan and fired him immediately. The following day,
Eddie was appointed manager of the restaurant. This type of
underhanded dealing was to become a trademark for Eddie.
During the next 10 years, Eddie developed quite a reputation. With his father dead, Eddie was now owner of four
restaurants in Chicago. At one time, he had a partner, but
this partnership broke up after it became evident that Eddie
had cheated his partner out of $50,000. Each time Gina described one of these unethical or illegal dealings, she wore a
look of disgust.
I next progressed Eddie to the year 1926.
Dr. G.:

Eddie, where are you now?

Gina:

I’m in my office counting the day’s receipts. It’s been
a good day.

B8Chapter 8.pmd

96

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Anorexia Nervosa...

97

Dr. G.:

I trust the restaurant business has been good to you.

Gina:

It’s not just the restaurants. Ha, ha! [Patient was
laughing now.]

Dr. G.:

What do you mean?

Gina:

I run a separate business on the side.

Dr. G.:

What kind of business?

Gina:

A speakeasy, what else?

Dr. G.:

How long have you been involved with speakeasies?

Gina:

Oh, about five years now.

Dr. G.:

Who do you get your alcohol from?

Gina:

Frankie.

Dr. G.:

Who is Frankie?

Gina:

He has connections with the Capone mob. I like
Frankie. He’s my kind of guy.

Dr. G.:

What is that?

Gina:

Frankie kills people who get in his way. He is always
straight with me and I like the way he handles his
women.

Dr. G:

How does he handle his women?

Gina:

He beats them when they talk back to him. Now,
that’s the way to treat a dame.

Dr. G.:

Do you beat your women, Eddie?

Gina:

Of course I do. I only hit my wife occasionally. But I
beat my other women when they deserve it.

Eddie had many affairs and most of them ended violently. He had two different apartments in the city, which
were inhabited by his two mistresses. A couple of his former
girlfriends were killed by one of Frankie’s men. One of these
girls had tried to blackmail Eddie while the other had been
unfaithful to him. If there was one thing Eddie couldn’t tolerate, it was a woman going out on him.

B8Chapter 8.pmd

97

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

98

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

It seems, in addition, that Eddie always rewarded himself with food. He would gorge himself with food after sex,
and after completing business deals or anything else he found
pleasurable. He even bragged to me about a food orgy he
had in 1924 after successfully arranging the killing of a
federal agent who was investigating his speakeasies.
Interestingly, Eddie would not allow his picture to be
taken. He may have been afraid it would be used by the
police to identify him, though he had no criminal record.
My interpretation is that he didn’t like seeing his obese
figure. All of Eddie’s girlfriends were thin and beautiful.
His wife was also thin and very attractive. Eddie liked
surrounding himself with beautiful objects and beautiful
people.
I next progressed Eddie to the last day of his life.
Dr. G.:

Eddie, where are you now?

Gina:

I’m in my office putting money into my safe.

Dr. G.:

What year is it?

Gina:

It’s 1928. Where have you been? [Patient quite
nervous.]

Dr. G.:

Are you alone?

Gina:

Of course, I’m alone. Quiet, can you hear that?

Dr. G.:

No. What’s happening?

Gina:

It’s Frankie. He came in through my private entrance.

Dr. G.:

Why is he here?

Gina:

He’s accusing me of skimming.

Dr. G.:

Have you been skimming money from Frankie and
the mob?

Gina:

Yes. Wait a minute, he’s pulling a gun on me.

Dr. G.:

Where is Frankie now?

B8Chapter 8.pmd

98

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Anorexia Nervosa...

99

Gina:

He’s standing in front of my desk. He’s telling me that
he’ll never have to worry about me skimming again.
[Patient now very excited and begins to stutter.]

I progressed Gina forward after Eddie died to find out
exactly what happened. Frankie shot Eddie for cheating the
mob out of hundreds of thousands of dollars. Gina seemed to
be relieved when death finally came to Eddie. It was obviously an end to a most degrading life. I brought Gina back to
the present.
We discussed this life in detail. She was very satisfied
with her newfound knowledge. I am happy to report that during the next six weeks, she gained 25 pounds and maintained her weight at about 117 pounds. Her anorexia nervosa
disappeared almost immediately and, to the best of my knowledge, has not recurred.
There were many interesting principles that Gina’s life
as Eddie illustrated. First, viewing scenes of her past life as
Eddie in the dream state brought back the obesity and degeneracy of that incarnation. Gina couldn’t deal with this so
she decided to starve herself to prevent herself from becoming obese Eddie Laslow. It was not just Eddie’s obesity that
horrified Gina. Eddie’s complete lack of ethics or morality, his
infidelity to his wife, and his criminal involvements all disgusted Gina.
Secondly, Eddie never allowed his picture to be taken.
In this life Gina is a photographer and loves having her own
picture taken. In fact, she once worked as a model.
Thirdly, Gina had a fear of guns that she could never
explain. Being shot to death by Frankie in her past life left
Gina with this phobia, which disappeared shortly after this
regression.

B8Chapter 8.pmd

99

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

100

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Finally, Ginaâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s voice was naturally very soft, but when
she spoke as Eddie Laslow, it became deeper and slower. In
addition, she showed many facial changes, and at times,
developed an almost sinister appearance when she spoke as
Eddie.
Ginaâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s life was greatly affected by her reliving her existence as Eddie Laslow. It may literally have saved her life.

B8Chapter 8.pmd

100

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

101

Chapter 9

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

When I appear on radio, television, or in a newspaper interview, I am often asked to relate my most interesting case.
Although I find all of them gratifying, one especially stands
out in my memory, and it involves my favorite principle,
synchronicity. Synchronicity is meaningful occurrences without apparent cause.
It is not uncommon for the same people to occur in several of a patientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s past lives. Group karma works just that wayâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;
a husband and wife in one life may come back as a mother and
daughter or a brother and sister in another lifetime. An acquaintance in one life will often appear again in future lifetimes. This phenomenon is well accepted. What is unusual about
this particular case is the manner in which I investigated it.
Several years ago, I received a call from a man who identified himself as Arnold. Arnold worked as an appliance salesman in a Baltimore department store and was calling me for
hypnotherapy at his wifeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s suggestion. In further conversation,
it came out that Arnold was a very insecure man, and this was
negatively affecting his ability as a salesman.
Arnold proved to be an excellent hypnotic patient. After
six sessions, I gave Arnold many suggestions to improve his
self-image and assertiveness. The tape I recorded for him

101

B9chapter 9.pmd

101

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

102

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

contained those suggestions and helped him to believe in himself more. Regression was not used at this time because I like
to stabilize the emotional level first. Once a solid emotional
foundation is established, regression therapy is more efficiently
carried out. Arnold expressed no interest in exploring regression at this time. His self-confidence improved and his sales
record very much reflected his progress. However, he seemed
troubled about something else, but was unwilling at that time
to discuss it with me.
It is not my policy or purpose to pry, so I did not force the
issue. I simply told Arnold that it was obvious something else
was troubling him, and if he didnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t feel comfortable discussing
it with me, there was nothing else I could do for him. I instructed him to continue playing the cassette tape I recorded
for him. This case was far from complete, but because the patient closed all avenues of communication, I had no choice.
Arnold thanked me for my help and left my office for what I
thought would be his last session.
Two months passed before Arnold called me again. He
wanted to see me immediately. I cleared some time that
evening, and a very unusual journey began. Arnold seemed
embarrassed as he told me the following facts while out of
trance.
People had always dominated him. Everyone from his
mother, wife, boss, customers, children, and just about anyone
who had any contact with Arnold dominated him. It was not
clear to me what he found especially embarrassing about relating this situation, and when I questioned him, he said he
couldnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t explain it. It was simply that this fear of being dominated was so strong and made him feel so inferior that he had
a lot of trouble expressing it to anyone. In his 18 years of marriage, he had never even discussed this with his wife. Additional sessions were not very fruitful, so I suggested the use of
simple age regression. Arnold was willing to try it. I like to
obtain as thorough a history as possible out of trance. This
relaxes the patient and gives specific paths to explore during
actual hypnotic regressions.

B9chapter 9.pmd

102

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

103

When I worked with Arnold initially, he easily obtained a
good level of hypnosis. But now, simple age regression was
difficult for him and his level of trance was light. After some
further conditioning, he was finally able to achieve a good
medium trance level. We discovered that his childhood was
fairly unremarkable, and there were many scenes of his being
dominated and manipulated by people in his family as well as
by his friends. I was, however, unsuccessful in eliciting a cause
for this situation.
I suggested past life regressions to Arnold. He was excited
by the idea. The first few attempts resulted in very sketchy
scenes, and none of them related to his problem. It was as if he
was fighting me. One could deduce that, subconsciously,
Arnold was afraid that I would dominate him also. A series of
four past life regressions made Arnold much more comfortable with the technique and more trusting of me.
Finally, one afternoon in November, Arnold described a most
unusual past life. This was a very long session and much time had
been devoted to establishing the background of the scene.
Arnold’s name was Thayer, and he lived in a small village in
Bavaria in 1132. Bavaria was part of present-day Germany. He
seemed very frightened about something as I questioned him.
Dr. G.: Where are you?
Arnold: I’m under the table.
Dr. G.:

What are you doing under the table, Thayer?

Arnold: I’m eating my supper.
Dr. G.:

Why are you eating under the table instead of sitting down at the table and placing your food on top
of the table?

Arnold: The chains are too short and anyway I’m not allowed
to eat that way.
Dr. G.:

What chains?

Arnold: My hands and feet are chained to the table and the
chains are very short.

B9chapter 9.pmd

103

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

104
Dr. G.:

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
Who chained you to the table?

Arnold: Gustave.
Dr. G.:

Who is Gustave?

Arnold: He is my master. I am his apprentice.

Thayer was an apprentice for a master guildsman by the
name of Gustave. They worked with metal, mostly silver and
gold. Drinking cups, plates, ornaments, and various other
items for wealthy noblemen were produced by them. During
the Middle Ages, it was quite common to learn a particular
trade by being an apprentice for many years to a master
guildsman. What was becoming rather evident was that there
was more to this relationship than merely a guildsman and
his apprentice.
Dr. G.:

How long have you been chained to the table?

Arnold: Since we closed the shop.
Dr. G.:

Why are you chained this way?

Arnold: I am always chained after the shop is closed. Master
Gustave doesn’t want me to leave and this is the only
way he knows to make sure I don’t leave.
Dr. G.:

Why don’t you just leave when he unchains you
tomorrow?

Arnold: I can’t do that. I was apprenticed to him by my father
when I was 13.
Dr. G.:

How does Gustave treat you in general?

Arnold: He hates me. He beats me with a whip whenever I do
anything wrong. I am afraid of him.
Dr. G.:

Has he always treated you this way?

Arnold: Yes. Ever since I can remember, he has always beat
me and treated me like this.
Dr. G.:

B9chapter 9.pmd

What happens when customers enter the shop? Does
he mistreat you in front of other people?

104

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

105

Arnold: Oh, yes, all the time. There’s nothing I can do about it.
I think he gets great satisfaction out of humiliating me.
Dr. G.:

Is there anyone in particular that Gustave likes humiliating you in front of?

Arnold: Well, yes. There’s this girl by the name of Clotilde.
He likes to let her see me being treated this way.
Dr. G.:

Who is Clotilde?

Arnold: She is a very nice girl from a wealthy family and she
likes me. She has bought many things from Master
Gustave. He doesn’t like it when she asks about me.
Dr. G.:

What does Gustave do when Clotilde asks about you?

Arnold: He yells at me and tells me I’m worthless. He makes
fun of everything I do and say. Then after she leaves,
he chains me to the table and beats me.
Dr. G.:

What else does he do to you?

Arnold: Well, he does these unnatural things to me....

Arnold was very embarrassed about this particular
question. He started to stutter and after about 10 minutes,
he described a number of homosexual acts that Gustave subjected him to. Gustave had never married and he used Thayer
(Arnold) to satisfy his every desire. Thayer was blamed for
anything that went wrong. He was degraded by Gustave whenever the master felt like abusing him. The hatred Thayer and
Gustave felt for each other grew daily.
I progressed Thayer to a significant event in his life.
Dr. G.:

Can you tell me what is happening now, Thayer?

Arnold: I, I am scared.
Dr. G.:

Why are you afraid?

Arnold: Master Gustave, he is very angry with me.
Dr. G.:

Why is that unusual?

Arnold: It’s not just his usual temper. It’s more than that.

B9chapter 9.pmd

105

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

106
Dr. G.:

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
Why? What has happened since I last spoke with
you?

Arnold: Clotilde has shown a great interest in me. She has
asked Master Gustave to allow me to do some work
at her family’s house.
Dr. G.:

How did Gustave respond to that request?

Arnold: He almost lost his temper in front of Clotilde. Her
family has given Master Gustave much business over
the years, and this is the first time that he has acted
this way in front of her. I just know that he is going to
beat me tonight.
Dr. G.:

What did Gustave tell Clotilde?

Arnold: He said that I couldn’t go to their home because of
the tools that I would need, and he told Clotilde
that I couldn’t be trusted. Imagine telling Clotilde
that. I hate him so.
Dr. G.:

All right, Thayer. I want you to detach yourself from
this scene and move forward to a resolution of this
problem on the count of five. One... two... three...
four... five.

Arnold: I’m being chained to the table again.
Dr. G.:

Is it dinnertime now?

Arnold: Yes; somehow I feel strange. It’s as if I have some
extra energy. Master Gustave tells me that he is going to abuse me tonight. He often tells me that before I eat to taunt me.
Dr. G.:

Tell me what happens next, Thayer.

Arnold: I don’t let him chain me to the table. I’m arguing
with him and he’s laughing at me. Why does he laugh
at me?
Dr. G.:

What do you do about it?

Arnold: I attack him as he tries to chain my leg to the table.
The food gets thrown to the floor and Gustave is

B9chapter 9.pmd

106

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

107

yelling at me. I fight with him and all I can think of
is killing him. [Patient is very excited.]
Dr. G.:

Now calm down and slowly tell me what is happening.

Arnold: We are on the floor and I am reaching for his throat.
I want to strangle him. We knocked over some tools
and something is pressing against my left side.
Dr. G.:

What is it?

Arnold: It’s a very sharp tool. I reached down with my left
hand and brushed it aside but I shouldn’t have done
that.
Dr. G.:

Why not?

Arnold: Master Gustave, he pushed me off him and punched
me in the face. I don’t know what’s happening now.
Dr. G.:

Focus your mind on this scene, Thayer. It’s important.

Arnold: He threw me against the wall and cursed me. He said
I was not worth the trouble I was causing.
Dr. G.:

What does Gustave do next?

Arnold: He picked up a knife-like tool. I know that it’s very
sharp. Oh, my God, he’s stabbed me in my stomach.
[Patient is very excited.] I’m bleeding and the pain is
unbearable.
Dr. G.:

Relax, Thayer. Detach yourself from any pain or
emotion and tell me what happens next.

Arnold: He stabbed me many times. I dropped to the floor
and died. He killed me. That horrible fiend killed me.
Dr. G.:

How do you feel now?

Arnold: I feel as if I’m floating. I can see my body beneath me
but I can’t feel anything.

Because Arnold was very upset by this scene, I allowed
him to view his death and to experience the complete detachment from all discomfort that typically characterizes death

B9chapter 9.pmd

107

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

108

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

scenes. He stayed with this tranquil scene for about 10 minutes. I then brought him to the superconscious mind level
and asked him about Gustave and Clotilde. He reported to
me that Clotilde was his sister-in-law Margaret, with whom
he gets along very well today. Gustave was not yet involved
in his present life.
After this fateful session, Arnold felt much better about
himself. He finally realized why he was so afraid of people
dominating him and why he seemed to allow other people to
exert their influence on him. What is interesting to note is
that his sister-in-law Margaret was one of the few people
Arnold has known who has not tried to dominate him. Margaret, as Clotilde, was the only bright spot in Thayerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s life.
I saw Arnold a few more times to help him work out his
remaining doubts. He was not interested in finding out about
other lifetimes in which he might have known Gustave. Arnold
felt he had learned enough about his past.
During the next six months, Arnold kept in touch with
me. He had made great progress in strengthening his selfimage and no longer feared people or allowed them to dominate him. He received a promotion at the store and his
relationship with his wife and children had also improved
noticeably. I was gratified with the results.
A year and a half after my treatment of Arnold, I received a call from an attorney named Brian, who wanted to
work out some psychological problems using hypnosis. Brian
specialized in corporate law for a large law firm. He was a
very successful man in his late 30s, but he felt he had an
undesirable tendency to manipulate people. Out of trance,
he described himself as a self-made man who used people
time and time again. It is ironic that the ability to manipulate people, which some consider an asset to an attorney,
should be this patientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s chief complaint.
Brianâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s conscious was working overtime. He felt guilty
about his actions. Insomnia was a nightly occurrence, along

B9chapter 9.pmd

108

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

109

with a compulsive eating problem. I also learned that his
hobby was collecting antiques, mostly metal objects such as
silverware, drinking cups, jewelry, and so on. He didn’t care
much for antique furniture. I noted this in his chart for future reference.
Brian proved to be an excellent hypnotic patient. He attained a good trance level and was easy to work with. Some
progress was made with his compulsive eating habits and insomnia, but I was not satisfied with the results. I suggested age
regression, and after I had thoroughly explained the process to
him, Brian agreed to try this technique.
Simple age regression was helpful, but not to the extent
that I had hoped. Brian relived a number of scenes concerning compulsive eating from his childhood and adolescence,
though nothing of importance was discovered concerning his
manipulative tendencies. He did report scenes in his adolescence and college years in which he used people for selfish
purposes. Yet, I was not satisfied with this data because deeply
rooted causes were not surfacing.
Brian couldn’t understand my dissatisfaction. He felt he
was making progress. I explained to him at this time the use of
past life regression and asked him if he would consent to try it.
He was skeptical about the concept of past lives, but agreed
nonetheless.
In late March, I brought Brian back into a most interesting past life. He went into trance quickly and deeply. The
following dialog is an excerpt from this session:
Dr. G.: What do you see now?
Brian:

I’m working in my shop.

Dr. G.:

What kind of shop is this?

Brian:

I’m some sort of metalworker—yes, I’m a master
craftsmen and I’m damn good at my work.

Dr. G.:

What year is this?

Brian:

1130.

B9chapter 9.pmd

109

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

110

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Brian:

I’m called Gustave.

Dr. G.:

Can you describe your shop?

Brian:

Well, it’s not a very big shop. I have many fine tools
that I use in my work.

Dr. G.:

What especially do you make?

Brian:

I mostly work with gold and silver. Noblemen commission me to make ornaments, jewelry, eating utensils, goblets, decorative containers, and other such
objects.

Dr. G.:

Are you married?

Brian:

No. I don’t have any patience for women.

Dr. G.:

What country do you live in?

Brian:

My land is called Bavaria.

Dr. G.:

Who is the leader of your land?

Brian:

King Henry.

Dr. G.:

Do you enjoy your work?

Brian:

Yes. I am the best at what I do and I like my craft.

Dr. G.:

Do you speak with the noblemen often?

Brian:

Only when they come into my shop.

Dr. G.:

What do they talk about?

Brian:

Oh, some damn nonsense about the election of the
new Pope.

Dr. G.:

Can you tell me more about your situation?

Brian:

Well, not really. I don’t get involved with other
people’s problems. I have enough of my own.

Dr. G.:

What have you heard lately about the Pope?

Brian:

The Pope died recently and there is some sort of
fight going on as to who will be the next Pope.

Dr. G.:

What kind of fight?

B9chapter 9.pmd

110

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity
Brian:

111

There were two Popes chosen and nobody knows
who is going to remain as Pope. In all my years, I have
never heard of such dealings. I don’t like to think
about those things.

An interesting historical note: In the year 1130, Lothair
II was the Holy Roman Emperor, and his son-in-law, Henry
the Proud, was Duke of Bavaria. Pope Honorius II died in
1130 and two elections were held. A small body of cardinals
elected Innocent II while the majority of cardinals elected
Analectus II. The latter controlled the Vatican and the castle
of Saint Angelo. Innocent II was recognized by all of the
kings north of the Alps and in Rome as the true Pope. He
retired and went with Lothair to Germany until 1136 when
Lothair reinstated him as the one and only Pope.
Dr. G.:

Is there anything about your work that you don’t like?

Brian:

It’s my damn, incompetent apprentice.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about your apprentice.

Brian:

There’s not much to tell. I took this young lad into
my shop and tried to make a craftsman out of him.
But he doesn’t seem to be able to do the work.

Dr. G.:

What’s his name?

Brian:

Thayer.

At this point my skin began to crawl. However, my obligation was to my current patient, and it was important to
continue this regression as if nothing unusual had happened.
After all, Brian knew nothing of Arnold.
Dr. G.:

What exactly does Thayer do that bothers you?

Brian:

He exists. That bothers me. I don’t know what it is
about him but I don’t like him. I seem to want to hurt
him. He is an incompetent and will never be the master craftsman that I am.

It was significant that Brian lacked this oversize ego in his
present life. Although he was unquestionably independent

B9chapter 9.pmd

111

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

112

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

and successful, he was almost soft-spoken and never exhibited such self-importance. In his life as Gustave, he was
coarse, crude, cruel, and sadistic. His voice was deeper than
Brian’s, and he spoke much more rapidly.
Dr. G.:

How do you treat Thayer?

Brian:

Ha, ha! You ask a very interesting question. I am too
kind to the lad. I feed him, clothe him, and beat him.
I am a good provider.

Dr. G.:

You beat him?

Brian:

You are offended? Of course I beat him. He deserves no better.

Dr. G.:

Do you enjoy beating him?

Brian:

Yes. He does anything I ask, and I ask a lot. He doesn’t
like what I ask of him, but I own him.

Dr. G.:

Tell me more of your life.

Brian:

I work hard. I get up with the sun and work until the
sun goes down. My work is fine. I am a great craftsman. I am a master.

Gustave went on to describe the details of his life. He
was a very lonely and disturbed man. People bothered him.
It wasn’t just Thayer whom he didn’t like. He didn’t like anyone. Cruelty made him feel good. Thayer provided him with
companionship and someone on whom he could vent his
frustrations.
Chaining Thayer to the table—which Arnold had described
to me from Thayer’s point of view—was an example of Gustave’s
cruelty. The chain was purposely made short to make it uncomfortable for Thayer. Even the simple act of eating became
a humiliation. Thayer was used, manipulated, dominated, and
utterly degraded by Gustave, nor was Gustave shy about describing the homosexual acts he committed with Thayer.
I next progressed Gustave to the year 1135.
Dr. G.:

B9chapter 9.pmd

How is your business these days?

112

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

113

Brian:

Business is good thanks to my skill, but not thanks to
that good-for-nothing apprentice of mine. All he
seems to care about is that damn girl.

Dr. G.:

What girl is that?

Brian:

Clotilde.

Dr. G.:

Who is Clotilde?

Brian:

She is the daughter of a wealthy nobleman. Her
family has been doing business with me for a long
time. Imagine, that incompetent actually thinks
that a nobleman’s daughter could actually love a
commoner—and an incompetent one at that!

Dr. G.:

Why is that so impossible to imagine?

Brian:

Look, I am a master craftsman. If I can’t have a noblewoman such as Clotilde, I’ll be damned if I’m going
to let Thayer have her. I will see to it that she sees
him for what he is.

Dr. G.:

And what is that?

Brian:

A commoner. A possession of mine, and a rather
worthless one at that.

Dr. G.:

Wouldn’t you like to be involved with someone like
Clotilde?

Brian’s response to that question was a string of obscenities. I seemed to have struck a nerve with that question.
Apparently, Gustave’s misanthropy and his homosexual tendencies grew out of his frustration at not being able to socialize with the nobility. This was a feudal society with a strict
class system. Master guildsmen were not allowed to marry or
consort with noblewomen. To make matters worse, Gustave
was physically unattractive and crude. These frustrations,
among others, led to Gustave’s attitude toward Thayer and
Clotilde. He used Thayer as his scapegoat.
I progressed Brian to the resolution of the situation between Gustave and Thayer.

B9chapter 9.pmd

113

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

114

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What is happening now?

Brian:

I’m going to fix that Thayer once and for all.

Dr. G.:

What did he do now?

Brian:

It’s that Clotilde. She had the nerve to ask me to let
Thayer go to her house for some special work. Why
didn’t she ask me to go? I am the master, the best. He
is just an apprentice!

Dr. G.:

Is that all that’s bothering you?

Brian:

No! I came very close to hurting that girl. She got me
very mad.

Dr. G.:

Have you ever acted that way before with her?

Brian:

No. Of course not. It’s Thayer’s fault and I’m going
to fix him good.

Dr. G.:

What are you going to do to him?

Brian:

I’m going to feed him very well tonight. Then I’m
going to give him the beating of his life.

Dr. G.:

Don’t you think that Thayer will sense that something is wrong?

Brian:

I don’t care. I just want to beat him until he begs for
mercy.

Dr. G.:

On the count of five, move forward to the actual
confrontation with Thayer.
One...two...three...four...five. What do you see
now?

Brian:

I’m chaining Thayer to the table. He looks a little
strange after I tell him that this will be a night that
he will long remember.

Dr. G.:

What happens next?

Brian:

He talks back to me and keeps moving his legs so I
can’t chain him to the table. That crazy fool jumps at
me and tries to knock me down.

Dr. G.:

What do you do about it?

B9chapter 9.pmd

114

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

115

Brian:

I laugh at the fool for his futile attempt to hurt me.
Then I pick him up and throw him on the table. He
knocks over the nice meal I fixed for him. He will
regret this night.

Dr. G.:

Where are you now?

Brian:

I’m standing by the table slapping the idiot. He
reaches for my throat and tries to strangle me. Now
I’m really mad.

Dr. G.:

What happens next?

Brian:

I pick him up again and throw him against the wall.
My tools are there and I tease him with a very sharp
knife. He curses me and I lose my temper. I stab him
again and again. It feels good to rid myself of this
incompetent. He is not worth any more trouble. I
killed him and I am glad.

Dr. G.:

Where did you stab Thayer?

Brian:

First I stabbed him in his stomach and then I stabbed
him in the neck.

I brought Brian back to the present after a few minutes.
He seemed drained from the session, but he was very impressed by this experience. He didn’t want to pursue additional regressions. Apparently, he felt this one exposure was
sufficient.
Over the next few months, Brian made considerable
progress in controlling his manipulative and domineering
tendencies. He has since sent numerous referrals to me. I
never did tell him of the case of Arnold and his past life as
Thayer. My professional ethics prevent me from revealing
the details of another patient’s case history.
I have already discussed the concept of synchronicity. Suffice it to say, my exposure to these two regressions was no
coincidence. The odds must be millions to one against such a
situation occurring. The correspondences were nothing short
of startling. All the names, dates, and events matched. The

B9chapter 9.pmd

115

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

116

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

main difference occurs in the two accounts of the final fight
between Thayer (Arnold) and Gustave (Brian). According to
Thayer, he jumps Gustave, wrestles him to the floor, and is
stabbed in the stomach repeatedly after Gustave throws him
against the wall. In Gustave’s version, he picks up Thayer and
throws him against the wall and stabs him in the stomach repeatedly and then in the neck. The only discrepancy seems to
be who first accosts whom, because if the stomach wound kills
Thayer, he would never know he had been stabbed in the neck!
Of course, I considered the possibility of fraud. But it
seems clear to me that neither man had anything to gain from
collusion. And if this was some sort of practical joke, I fail to
see a motive. I had never discussed writing this book with either of them. In fact, it wasn’t until October of 1980 that I even
considered writing a book. And it was a year and a half between the two regressions. Finally, neither of them has ever
contacted me with respect to publishing their cases. I can only
think of this as an example of synchronicity.
Many people have asked me whether Arnold and Brian
have ever met in this lifetime. The answer is that they have not
met in this incarnation and I had no knowledge of their relationship prior to my regressing them. Furthermore, I have no
intention of introducing them, for many reasons. First, if they
were supposed to meet again to work out their karma, then
they would have come into contact with each other long before they met me. Second, I do not attempt to play God with
my patients. To introduce these two people, considering their
past life history, would affect both of their karmic cycles. If
this were meant to be, it would already be out of my control.
Third, I would be concerned about Arnold’s possible reaction
to Brian, and vice versa. Considering the details of the regressions, both could be hostile and violent.
My involvement as the middleman may very well have been
a test of my own karmic cycle. It was tempting to introduce
these patients to each other. However, this may have done
them both more harm than good, physically and psychologically. Perhaps my knowledge of both Brian and Arnold did

B9chapter 9.pmd

116

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The 800-Year-Old Synchronicity

117

help me understand the effects they had on each other during
the Middle Ages. I did not feel that they would have benefited at all from their meeting in this lifetime. Perhaps they
will meet in this life, but it wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t be through me. My role in
these two cases is complete. My task is to help the patient
understand the root causes of his or her problems through
the use of hypnotic regressions so that he or she is rid of
mysterious compulsions and can lead a better existence in
this lifetime.
Both Arnold and Brianâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s lives have, in fact, been significantly improved as a result of hypnotherapy and especially past life regression. Arnold is less afraid and more
self-confident; Brian informed me that he had successfully resisted two opportunities to manipulate a new lawyer in
his firm. In addition, Brianâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s insomnia disappeared entirely,
and he lost 25 pounds. Because neither of them showed any
interest in exploring additional past lives, I can only guess
that they did share additional lifetimes since the 12th century
and I hope they fulfilled their karmic obligations.

B9chapter 9.pmd

117

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

118

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 10

Subpersonalities as Past Life
Carryovers

There are many types of entities that assist us with our
spiritual growth. These perfect beings are referred to as spirit
guides or angels. In certain instances, these entities can protect us from physical harm, and can facilitate a major turnaround in our lives.
However, there are other types of entities that function to
drain us, and need to be both confronted and removed. I refer
to this syndrome as subpersonalities.
A subpersonality is an attached entity that negatively affects our behavior. It may be a remnant of our past-life history
and personality, or it may be the energy of another soul.
As a result of this subpersonality attaching itself to our aura
or soul itself, a Jekyll/Hyde-like personality change often is observed in the affected individual. One may, for example, suddenly act considerably out of character. His actions may even be
self-destructive. He may suddenly know things that he would
have no reason to know. Or he may begin referring to himself in
the third person, saying things like, â&#x20AC;&#x153;Let Jim figure this out.â&#x20AC;?

118

C1Chapter 10.pmd

118

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Subpersonalities as Past Life Carryovers

119

Other common characteristics associated with subpersonalities are:
1. Autism.
2. Anorexia nervosa.
3. Bulimia.
4. Emotional instability.
5. Insomnia.
6. Patterns of shifting psychosomatic complaints.
7. Memory lapses.
8. Drug abuse.
9. Migraine headaches.
10. Abusive relationships.
11. Depression.
Subpersonalities are rarely stable. Left untreated, people
who have subpersonalities may exhibit bizarre and unsettling
behavior. These entities can attach themselves to our very being at any time during our lives, but most commonly become
part of our awareness during traumatic episodes.
Psychiatrists would label these subpersonalities as Dissociative Identity Disorder (which was previously called Multiple Personality Disorder). As is often the case, conventional
therapists miss the point with these unusual cases.
There are four types. Here is a summary of these
subpersonalities:
1. Poltergeists. Ghosts or poltergeists comprise the
most common category of subpersonalities.
These entities are souls who lived as humans,
but crossed into spirit (died) and have refused
to enter the white light (their Higher Self),
which is critical for them to reincarnate. These
spirits usually do not desire to take over the body
of the host. They are merely dysfunctional souls
that attach themselves to our auras as a comfortable place to nest.

C1Chapter 10.pmd

119

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

120

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

2. Extraterrestrials (ETs). Occasionally ETs attach
themselves to our souls’ energy. This is done to
study our reactions, as they appear to be fascinated by our emotional responses to stress.
3. Past Life Personalities. In rare instances, one of
our past lives can remain as a subpersonality, and
attach itself to our auras in an attempt to take
over our bodies or just cancel our actions.
4. Demons. Demonic entities were never human. They
are fallen angels, and they have been around since
the universe was created. During possession, their
goal is the permanent takeover of an individual’s
body and soul. In order for a demonic to take control of a soul, it requires permission. Playing with
Ouija boards and attempting to contact spirits without the benefit of white light or other protective
techniques are examples of how this permission
may be granted. This is the least common type.

Examples of Subpersonality Attacks
A good example of a poltergeist attack occurred with a
patient I shall call Vanessa. Through hypnosis, I learned that
Vanessa had attended a funeral in 1993. The spirit of Ingrid, a
psychotic woman who committed suicide at that cemetery,
attached herself to Vanessa there. Superconscious mind taps
and integration quickly sent Ingrid’s personality to the white
light. Vanessa is free of her subpersonality, and happier than
she has ever been.
Fortunately, past life possession attempts are quite rare.
Claudine’s case is a good example of this phenomena. She was
murdered in a past life by a man named Sam. Sam had killed
her in a jealous rage, but he was never punished for the crime,
which took place more than 150 years ago.
Claudine came to me because she had been plagued by
alcoholism and depression. When I regressed her through

C1Chapter 10.pmd

120

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Subpersonalities as Past Life Carryovers

121

hypnosis, we discovered that Sam’s fragmented subpersonality
had attached itself to her. The disturbed, murdering aspect of
Sam’s soul was still jealous of her, and it wanted to wreck her
current marriage to Tom.
The treatment was surprisingly simple. In a single session
with both Tom and Claudine, I used hypnosis to connect
Claudine’s subconscious mind, or soul, with her Higher Self,
or superconscious mind. I asked her Higher Self what the origin of the problem was. Claudine’s voice suddenly became
very deep and low and Sam began speaking to me. Tom looked
on, shocked, with his jaw hanging open.
I then confronted Sam. I directed Sam to enter the white
light. By contacting its own Higher Self, a soul will, to a certain degree, raise the quality of its energy and better prepare
itself for a future life. Once the subpersonality enters the light,
it can never return to bother the host again.
Marsha’s case illustrates a rather dynamic attempt at past
life possession. She was a devout Christian professional woman
in her early 30s. The only difficult past relationship she reported that was difficult was with a man named Hal. Dan is
her fiancé, but is concerned about Marsha’s recent bizarre behavior: She is blasphemous toward the church, she acts like a
prostitute with strange men, and she is having nightmares
about being murdered on a tropical island.
During her past life in Martinique during the 1700s, she
was a young girl named Jacqueline, studying in a convent to
become a nun. One night, a drunken sailor raped her. She was
comforted by the priest, but decided to run away from the
convent. She ended up in a brothel working as a prostitute.
The owner of the brothel was obsessed with her, beat her, and
murdered her during a fit of jealous rage.
For two months, the past life fragment of Marsha’s soul (a
subpersonality) literally attempted to take over Marsha’s body.
This possession attempt accounted for Marsha’s behavior out
of her normal character.

C1Chapter 10.pmd

121

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

122

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dan is the reincarnation of the priest and Hal is the current life of the brothel owner. Past life regression and
superconscious mind taps were the techniques used to confront Jacqueline and permanently remove her presence from
Marshaâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s body. Marsha returned to her normal lifestyle and
never heard from Jacqueline again.
Following very simple hypnotic techniques, dysfunctional
behaviors stop immediately. My patients describe the effect as
having a burden lifted or a blockage removed. They return to
normal life, feeling stronger than ever. If you feel you have a
subpersonality, I highly recommend my psychic protection from
negativity and superconscious mind cassette tapes.

C1Chapter 10.pmd

122

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The “Light” People

123

Chapter 11

The “Light” People

In my work as a hypnotherapist specializing in time travel,
I once thought I had seen just about every type of case imaginable. Guiding thousands of patients into past and future lives,
accessing spirit guides and time travelers from our future (see
chapters 16 and 17), detailing abductees’ encounters with extraterrestrials and training them to slow down and reverse the
aging process and so on seemed to complete the spectrum.
What I didn’t discover was the true origin of our karmic
cycle and cases of patients’ first lifetime on Earth until I did a
“light” people regression. I have always been a proponent of
extraterrestrial (ET) origins of our species, along with reincarnation paradigms.
Although this is one of the most controversial theories in
parapsychology, the case history of one of my patients might
lend it some credence. The true origin of life on this planet
will surprise you. My research shows that certain “”light”
people,” originating from other solar systems, appear to be
responsible for not only our evolutionary advancement, but
for the karmic cycle itself. The “light” people posses no physical body, but are pure energy in the form of light.
Interestingly, most of the cases I have done with “light”
people regressions involve people who show no interest in
ETs or reincarnation. These cases simply surface by themselves

123

C2Chapter 11.pmd

123

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

124

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

and are most commonly preceded by the patient having strange
dreams about these light beings.
A “light” people regression is the most difficult type to
conduct. There seems to be a bubble-like energy field surrounding the patients that compromises their ability to communicate. The patient is censored by a group of “light” people
known as the “Planners,” which makes getting information
rather difficult.
The only reason I can elicit any information whatsoever is
because I have conducted numerous “light” people regressions, and I can relate to them on their level of awareness.
I have regressed more than 1,000 patients to past lives as
“light” people, and the reports I received showed consistent
characteristics, which will be detailed at the end of this chapter.
From my research, I learned that the “light” people are
sent to Earth from another galaxy to experience life in human
bodies. Their goal is to assist us in our evolutionary development. When light” people leave their human bodies, they return to an examination room (although this is not a physical
room as we know it). Their progress is evaluated by a group of
monitors or Planners. If they do well, their vibrational rate is
raised, but if they fail, it’s reduced. These Planners are directed by Master Planners who communicate with them from
the home planet many galaxies away.
When I sense a “light” people regression is about to transpire, I never prepare the patient for the experience. My reasoning is to eliminate imposing my belief system on them and
preventing any possibility of preconceptions on their part.
When Ed called my office, it was simply to utilize age
regression to retrieve a lost watch given to him by his grandfather, who had since passed away. That goal was accomplished
easily in a single session. He requested another hypnotherapy
session to explore his childhood and this is what surfaced:
Dr. G.:

Where are you at this time?

Ed:

I am in an examination chamber.

C2Chapter 11.pmd

124

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

125

The “Light” People
Dr. G.:

How old are you?

Ed:

I have no age. Why are you asking me these questions?

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Ed:

I am a Planner. Why can’t I see your essence?

By now I correctly deduced that this was a “light” people
regression, so my subsequent questioning took a far different
path, as compared to a regular regression to one’s childhood.
Dr. G.:

I am a Master Planner, far above you in vibrational
rate.

Ed:

Why have I not been told of your presence?

Dr. G.:

You function on a need-to-know basis. Now, no further questions. I will ask the questions and you will
answer.

At this time there was about a five-minute delay in Ed’s
next response. “Light” people are always restricted in what
they can say and a Planner is no different. Because he was
not prepared for a Master Planner, he became concerned
that he may be under investigation.
Dr. G.:

What is going on in the examination chamber at this
time?

Ed:

It’s XL-47. He has done well on this planet, and I am
in the process of raising his vibrational rate.

“Light” people came to our planet to facilitate our evolution, and they inhabited the bodies of primitive humans while
altering genetic coding and other biological processes to promote our development.
After a period of time within our bodies, these beings of
pure light were somehow extracted and taken to an evaluation
chamber in the form of a fifth dimensional “room” of sorts.
The room is more like an energy point. It consists of swirling lights, most of which are white, but other colors are present.
There are black voids in this room, which function as entry

C2Chapter 11.pmd

125

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

126

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

and exit points for Planners and other more advanced “light”
people.
Dr. G.:

What is XL-47’s status at this time?

Ed:

His essence is yellow and will be raised to green
shortly.

The “light” people have a hierarchy of colors to their
essence. White represents the top of this pyramid and is reserved for Master Planners and other highly evolved beings.
The lowest level is red and is followed in increasing quality
by orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. You may
recognize these as colors of the rainbow.
XL-47’s current frequency vibrational rate appears as a
yellow (third level) essence and will undergo some sort of
fifth-dimensional manipulation to be raised to a green (fourthlevel) color. I cannot detail the precise mechanism, as that
type of data is restricted and anything about this group of
ETs is hard to obtain.
Dr. G.:

Will XL-47 have to return to a physical body?

Ed:

Oh yes. He still has a long way to go, but he is progressing at a rapid rate.

Dr. G.:

Have you had any problems lately with any of your
group?

Ed:

Yes. MR-62 was examined not long ago and he failed
many tests.

At this time, I should explain that “light” people can enter
and leave the physical body just about any time they desire.
They must perform certain functions and assist the human
they are occupying in its intelligence and social functions.
Sometimes these “light” people get carried away with the
physicality of the body and violate moral and ethereal codes
(such as obsessions with sex, drugs, or murder), or merely
refuse to perform the functions for which they were trained.
When this happens, the Planners punish these “light” people.

C2Chapter 11.pmd

126

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The “Light” People

127

Dr. G.:

What tests did MR-62 fail?

Ed:

He spent too much time eating and enjoying other
physical pleasures (sex), and delayed his required
reporting to me.

Dr. G.:

What did you do?

Ed:

Because MR-62 failed basic assignments, he was
punished by being forced to remain in the physical
body. His actions resulted in certain physical ailments
(upset stomach), so he was not permitted to leave
his body.

Dr. G.:

What else did you do?

Ed:

I brought him to the examination chamber and lectured him about his responsibilities.

Dr. G.:

How did he respond?

Ed:

He tried to leave, so I immobilized him with my
thoughts and placed him in a state of suspended
animation for hours at a time.

Apparently, MR-62 was in deep trouble. He failed to
perform adequately and his vibrational rate was now in danger of being lowered. This technique of a Planner immobilizing a light being has been reported to me almost every time I
have conducted this type of past life regression. I continued
my questioning of Ed.
Dr. G.:

Have you had any more extreme examples of failure
with your group?

Ed:

Why all these concerns? Am I being threatened with
some form of discipline?

As a Planner, Ed was now becoming a bit paranoid. It
seems that “those who live by the sword die by the sword” was
applicable to the “light” people hierarchy.
Dr. G.:

C2Chapter 11.pmd

Remember, I am a Master Planner. I will ask the questions. Your role is to answer them and report to me.
Understood?

127

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

128

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Ed:

Yes. I apologize for my insubordination. In response
to your question regarding more extreme examples
of failure, I do have a report to make.

Dr. G.:

Go on.

Ed:

One of my agents, QZ-468, failed every test he was
assigned.

Dr. G.:

How did you handle him?

Ed:

His essence was reduced to red (the lowest level)
and he was given a final notice that if he failed again,
he would be abandoned.

Dr. G.:

What happened then?

Ed:

He failed again, and I had no choice but to banish
him by imprisoning him permanently in the physical
form and deleting all memories of his true origin.

The mechanism of the origin of our karmic cycle now
became clear. Advanced ETs from a distant galaxy in the
form of light energy experimented with humans to aid us in
our evolution. Many of these “light” people took advantage
(or were overwhelmed) by our physicality and ran afoul with
what the Master Planners had in store.
The Planners, as supervisors to the progress of these “light”
people, had the power to trap these light beings into our physical
bodies and remove their memories so they would not be psychologically compromised as they began life as a human.
If they learned karmic lessons as a human, their vibrational rate could still be raised. This sounds very similar to
the karmic cycle with reincarnation being the modality.
Although the transcript between Ed and me seems easy to
follow, this was not an easy past life regression. “Light” people
regressions are always difficult and time consuming. It’s as if
everything even a Planner says is being censored.
“Light” people regressions represent fewer than 5 percent of the 35,000 regressions I have conducted. They often

C2Chapter 11.pmd

128

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

129

The “Light” People

appear at significant moments in a person’s life. Usually, patients who have had a previous life as a light person want to
explore their first human incarnation on Earth. They show
little interest in extraterrestrial life.
Here are some other observations I have made concerning the “light” people:
They communicate entirely by telepathy.
They are unquestionably from another galaxy.
They are not time travelers and do not originate
from the future.
They function on a different dimension (fifth
dimension). The only things that can confine
them are magnetic fields and thought patterns controlled by the Planners. Planners can immobilize
“light” people merely by directing certain
thoughts at them.
There is a definite hierarchy, with Master Planners being above Planners.
The highest ranking “light” people are referred
to as the “source” or “All That Is.”
“Light” people describe themselves as pulsating lights with varying degrees of intensity. Their
essence may be white or any rainbow color. Rank
is determined by their frequency vibrational rate.
I have concluded that “light” people—trapped in human
bodies—represent the beginning of our karmic cycle. We are
fortunate that these aliens tampered with our evolution. Our
present level of technology might have been unattainable
without their aid.

C2Chapter 11.pmd

129

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

130

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 12

Seeing Into the Future

Age Progression
In the field of parapsychology, the term precognition is
used to describe the accurate descriptions by a test subject of
events in the future. I personally feel the term “age progression” is preferable to “precognition” in describing moving
forward in time with hypnosis. Many people consider precognition to be a unique mystical experience, and find the expression age progression easier for the average person to relate to.

How Progression Works
My experience with guiding patients into their future has
given me a certain vantage point of the universe that is enlightening and worth sharing. Basically there are six ways to
learn about the future. These are:
1. Clairaudience—Hearing sounds or voices that are
undetectable by our ears concerning the future.
2. Clairvoyance—Discerning objects or events that
are not present to the normal five senses.
3. Forecasting—Making predictions of the future
by use of mathematical projections or other
objectively obtained data, as in predicting the

130

C3Chapter 12.pmd

130

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

131

Seeing Into the Future
winner of an election with only a small percent
of the precincts reporting in.
4. Prophesying—Reading the future from subjective impressions or feeling in an altered state of
consciousness.
5. Age/Future Life Progression—Using hypnosis
to actually see into the future before it occurs.
6. Fifth Dimension Travel—This out-of-body experience is associated with increased sensory
awareness and a loss of a sense of time so that it
is impossible to differentiate the future from the
present. When the scene from the future actually becomes reality, you feel as if you have seen
this before.

Several theories of precognition have been advanced.
Most are abstruse, some ingenious, none adequate. Basically,
these theories fall into two categories. The first looks on the
future as an already existent reality, one that exists as fully and
objectively as the present does. The future is not a potentiality,
but an actuality. Fate corresponds approximately with our concept of what has been decreed, or our past action (karma). We
feel we are victims of fate, caught in its web, or net.
The second theory postulates a “plastic” or provisional future that exists now in somewhat the same way that a human
being exists the instant the sperm meets the ovum. A lot can
happen to a fetus between conception and birth, and possibly
the same sort of incident—abortion, miscarriage, premature
delivery—can occur to an event gestating in the “womb of
time.” The term destiny, which corresponds loosely with the
Indian notion of dharma, is flexible and our free will has a great
effect on its eventual manifestation.
A plastic future rejects the notion that the future already
exists. It says that tomorrow is real only in potentiality. The
future is capable of taking many possible final forms. Only when
it congeals into the present does it really exist as an actuality. In

C3Chapter 12.pmd

131

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

132

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

other words, we live in a framework of potentiality and it is our
actions that determine its final form. We can change our future.
We can test the validity of age progression by simply comparing the recorded data to events that actually transpire days,
weeks, or months in the future. There simply have been far too
many documented examples of specified prognostications that
came true to ignore this discipline.
A good example of a documented age progression is that
of the 18th century scientist and philosopher Emanuel
Swedenborg’s prediction of his own death. In early 1772, John
Wesley, founder of the Methodist church, requested a meeting
with Swedenborg for sometime in the summer. Swedenborg
informed him that he would die on March 29, 1772 so he would
not be able to keep this date. Swedenborg did, in fact, die on
March 29, 1772 of natural causes. We have this case documented
because it appeared in Wesley’s own personal journal.
Here are some other examples of age progressions:

Jules Verne
This 19th-century French stockbroker turned novelist
authored several novels about the future. In one of his lesserknown books called An Ideal City, Verne depicts music recitals being heard around the world as a result of being
transmitted down a wire from the artist to certain pianos. Does
this not sound like a primitive reference to MP3 music on the
Internet?
In 1865, he wrote his classic From the Earth to the Moon, in
which he described intimate details that paralleled those of
America’s first flight to the moon by Apollo 11 in July of 1969.
For example:
The initial breakaway velocity of Jules Verne’s
craft was 36,000 feet per second while Apollo 11’s
third stage velocity was 35,533 feet per second.
The huge cannon that fired Verne’s capsule into
space was called the Columbiad, while the

C3Chapter 12.pmd

132

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

133

Seeing Into the Future
Apollo 11 mission was carried out by the Columbia. Both capsules orbited the moon several
times, occasionally at the same altitude. Both
teams took photographs, and the Verne capsule crew even charted the Sea of Tranquility,
where the Apollo 11 crew landed.
The launch sites were almost identical. Verne
chose a spot in Florida about 140 miles due west
of Cape Kennedy. In Verne’s story, Texas fought
for the honor. Today Mission Control is in Houston, Texas.
Both capsules splashed down in the Pacific and
both crews were picked up by American Navy ships.

The Sinking of the Titanic
Morgan Robertson wrote a novel in 1898 titled Futility, in
which a supposedly unsinkable ocean liner struck an iceberg
on its maiden voyage and sank, carrying the elite society of
two continents to their deaths.
Fourteen years later, in 1912, a similar “unsinkable” liner
sailed from England with 3,000 passengers aboard. Like
Robertson’s craft, it was 800 feet long and weighed 70,000
tons, but with far too few lifeboats. The real boat, like
Robertson’s, struck an iceberg and sank with the loss of more
than 1,000 lives. Robertson had named his boat, the Titan.
The real ship was the Titanic.

Edward Bellamy
Looking Backward, written in 1888 by Edward Bellamy,
was one of the most influential American books on social reform prior to the 20th century. He wrote this masterpiece from
the perspective of the year 2000, and it was an attempt to
detail an ideal path of social development from 1888 to the
beginning of the 21st century.

C3Chapter 12.pmd

133

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

134

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Bellamy described a music room in the home that contained
three or four skillfully placed audio amplifiers concealed in the
walls. Adjacent to one are several knobs, which, when turned,
will bring in any one of four different musical programs at the
volume desired. A listing of the programs available at each hour
is delivered daily to every home that subscribes to this service.
All programs are supplied throughout the 24-hour day and are
sent also into the bedrooms where a smaller speaker or even
headphones are provided. This may seem commonplace today,
but we must remember it was written in 1888!
The houses in Bellamyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s description had electricity and a
central heating system. Public laundries, equivalent to modern day Laundromats, were delineated, as were the common
usage of restaurants. Restaurants were a relative rarity in his
day. Electric alarm clocks and credit cards that are accepted
throughout the world were also components of Bellamyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s depiction of the year 2000.

My own age progression while driving
My own trip into the future occurred while driving to
Ft. Lauderdale, Florida from the University of Maryland
School of Dentistry, where I was a student in the early 1970s.
Because Christmas vacation represented the only significant
break until the summer, I looked forward to these trips.
My method of maximizing this vacation time consisted of
driving straight to Florida from Baltimore, stopping only four
times for gas on the 1,000 mile trip. This particular trip was significant because, while driving in the very early hours of the morning, I nearly dozed off on the highway. Occasionally, a jolting
sensation sharpened my conscious awareness.
The next thing I was aware of was arriving in Florida, renting a room in a private residence, and being frustrated at not
being able to fall asleep due to my now-alert mind. I noticed
an unusual design to the wallpaper in the room as I lay on the
bed trying to provide my fatigued body with its needed rest. I
did eventually fall asleep.

C3Chapter 12.pmd

134

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Seeing Into the Future

135

Back on the highway, I was jolted back into a hyper-alert
consciousness and completed my trip to Florida. My first
thought was, “Did I dream that scene or did I really go into
the future?”
Upon arrival in Ft. Lauderdale, every detail of my
“dream” manifested into reality. When I purchased a paper, I haphazardly called the telephone number from an ad
showing a room to rent in a private home. After arriving at
this house, I dragged my fatigued body to the bed and found
it difficult to sleep, because my mind was still in a hyperalert state. Lastly, I noticed the wallpaper of the bedroom
bearing the exact unusual design I had “seen” on the highway
in Georgia several hours before! I had never been to this
house before. These events convinced me that I definitely
viewed my future.

An age progression saves a life
Consider the case of a patient who worked with me several years ago. Tami had just graduated from college in June
of 1996. She lived in New York and came to my Los Angeles
office to learn how to see into the future. I completed her
training by the second week in June, and she returned to New
York.
One issue Tami had was what to do during the summer, as
she was entering graduate school that September. After a few
days of contemplation, Tami decided to travel to Europe and
spend the last half of the summer there.
She practiced the technique we worked on during her stay
in Los Angeles, and became a fairly experienced hypnotic subject by the end of June. At that time, she decided to fly to Paris
first, as some of her friends were there and wanted her to join
them on their European trip.
One thing that shocked Tami was that she saw her plane
take off from JFK airport in New York, and quickly crash,
killing everyone aboard. At first, this bothered Tami. She
became excited about going to Europe, but her previous use

C3Chapter 12.pmd

135

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

136

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

of my age progression methods had already demonstrated their
accuracy, during which she was able to see into the future and
affect minor changes in her life.
Her solution was to not leave for Europe until the end of
July. Tami’s original plans called for her leaving New York on
July 17th on TWA Flight 800. I’m sure this flight will be familiar
to you. It crashed, killing all 230 passengers and crew. Had Tami
ignored the information she obtained from her hypnotic age
progression, she would be dead now.
Tami was very thankful to me when she called my office to
inform me of these events. I didn’t hear from her until late
September, and tried to reiterate the fact that it was her abilities and spiritual growth that saved her life, not me. I merely
trained her.

The Space-Time Continuum
Many dreams seem to contain fragments of futuristic material, just as they contain fragments from the past. In sleep, the
mind appears to wander freely back and forth over the “equator,” an imaginary line between the present and the future. At
the deepest level of consciousness, there is no sense of the flow
of time, only an “eternal now” in which all events coexist.
Modern day physicists use the term space-time continuum
(coined by Albert Einstein) to illustrate the fact that there is no
such thing as the past, present, or future as we know it. All of
our lives are being lived at the same moment but at different
frequencies. Thus, your past lives are occurring right now on a
different frequency along with your present and future lives.
They are all affecting each other. You are thus able to change
the past and future by changing the present (see Figure 2).
Suppose, for example, that you are in a helicopter above a
major highway. You look down and see that traffic is stopped
because of an accident. At this time, you could radio someone
in a car five miles behind the scene of the accident and inform
the driver of the upcoming traffic problem. Because you are

C3Chapter 12.pmd

136

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Seeing Into the Future

137

in a helicopter above the traffic flow, you are actually detached
from the scene itself. The driver that you are warning is immersed within the flow of traffic. In a sense, you are reading the
future of this car. If the driver of that car keeps driving on that
highway, he will encounter the congested traffic that you are
now observing. The helicopter represents another dimensional
plane, and on a different plane, there is no time as we here on
Earth (or on the highway, in this analogy) know it.
To extend the analogy further, note that from the vantage point of the helicopter, you could also see what the traffic flow is like behind the car to whose driver you are talking.
This would represent the past. The traffic ahead of the driver
represents the future, and the traffic that the driver is experiencing now represents the present. You are, in effect, reading
the past, present, and future from the helicopter. By leaving
the Earth plane, or entering into hypnotic trance, you can
read the past or future without the restrictions that occur in
the waking state.
The confusing aspect of progression (perceiving oneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s future) is that the effect appears to precede the cause, violating
causality laws of conventional physics. Because space and
time do not exist independently, but as a continuum known
as space-time, this fourth dimensional paradigm allows an effect to come before a cause. Our brain is constructed to deal
with only three dimensions (length, width, and depth). This
fourth dimension known as time (in reality, the fourth dimension of the space-time continuum) often confuses our
three-dimensionally oriented brain.

Past

Present

Future

Figure 2. The Space-Time Continuum.

C3Chapter 12.pmd

137

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

138

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

We can show how the brain can do this futuristic viewing
by applying a theory developed by Professor John Taylor of
King’s College, London. He hypothesizes that our brain emits
tachyons, impulses traveling faster than light, thereby reaching into the future and then being reflected back to the brain,
giving foreknowledge.
If some form of energy is transmitted from the human
body capable of traveling faster than light, it might not emanate from the brain itself. It could originate from the Akashic
records (see page 258) stored on the fifth dimension. Not having traveled faster than light, and so into the future, would
the impressions and messages necessarily be received directly
by the brain, but by the subconscious mind. The brain might
pick up the impulses after the outgoing energy waves had been
reflected back, radar fashion, to the bodily source of transmission. Quantum physics clearly demonstrates that any tachyon
would move in reverse time sequences.

Forbidden Knowledge
The concept of “forbidden knowledge” is often mentioned by my patients. People ask me, “Isn’t knowledge of
future events prohibited by the universe?” The answer is
simple. If you are supposed to know something, such as your
future, your Higher Self will see to it that you receive that data.
If, however, you are not supposed to be aware of certain future
events, then no person, place, or thing will give you that information (unless and until you are ready to receive it). Even with
my highly sophisticated techniques and extraordinary success
rates, I cannot arrange for you to receive information that you
are not supposed to have. When the student is ready, the teacher
will be there.

A Future Life Progression
Age regression is simply viewing the future of one’s current life. When you perceive a life in some distant century in a

C3Chapter 12.pmd

138

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Seeing Into the Future

139

new physical body, the term future life progression is applied. I
discovered this discipline back in 1977 when I asked a patient to
go to the origin of a difficulty and she went forward to the 23rd
century! The future life illustrates a karmic lesson or pattern,
which is usually manifested in their current life. This often includes the same people, and provides a way to learn from the
future to correct the present, thereby affecting the future.
The interesting aspect of future life progression hypnotherapy is not merely the technological advances one observes,
but the growth in the soul’s way of dealing with and hopefully
resolving issues from its many prior lifetimes.
Traditionally, most of my patients are fascinated by their
past lives. They usually are not interested in exploring future
lifetimes. Much of this has to do with fear. When they resolve
this fear, they are more open to the experience.
Mark’s case is interesting in many ways because he illustrates growth from his present incarnation. His background is a
rather conservative one. He is a CPA from Florida and was
divorced, having two very unsuccessful marriages. His three children couldn’t relate to him and he rarely spent time with them.
You could accurately describe Mark as a loner and very
depressed. He expressed no interest in exploring previous lives
and just desired to see if a future life would be happier than
his present one.
Mark described his present life as rather boring. He was
quite competent as an accountant, but lacked passion for his
work. Everyone he knew considered his profession as lacking
in excitement and this added to his feelings of isolation. He
informed me that in college, he was rejected from two fraternities and all he could recall was how much he studied while
most of the people he knew were partying.
Mark’s trip to my Los Angeles office in 2000 seemed to be
a very special highlight in his otherwise routine and dull life.
After preparing him for a future life progression, I began my
questioning.
Dr. G.:

C3Chapter 12.pmd

Where do you find yourself?

139

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

140

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Mark:

Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;m in an underwater city.

Dr. G.:

How old are you?

Mark:

15.

Dr. G.:

Where are your parents?

Mark:

I have none.

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Mark:

Elam.

Dr. G.:

What year is it Elam?

Mark:

2837.

Elam lives in what we call Greenland today in an underwater city. Greenland is a member of the Atlantic Federation
and this democratic government replaced the League of One
during the 28th century about 100 years earlier.
The reason why Elam says he has no parents is because
he is a test tube baby who was developed in an artificial host
and never knew who the donors were. A type of foster-home
approach exists here to raise these children.
Dr. G.: Do you know why you were selected to be a test
tube baby?
Mark:

It had something to do with assuring I would have
special skills and potential for a productive career.

As I progressed Mark forward I found out that he was
just average, and that the test tube baby experiment apparently failed in his case. By the age of 18, he was sent above
ground to be trained as a pilot.
Dr. G.:

Elam, tell me about your new home.

Mark:

I like living above ground. The monorails are fun, as
well as efficient in getting around town.

Dr. G.:

How else do you travel?

Mark:

Well for short local trips, I use the teleportation station in my den. We have large ships (planes) for
longer trips and I hope to fly them someday.

C3Chapter 12.pmd

140

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

141

Seeing Into the Future
Dr. G.:

Do you have any cars?

Mark:

Yes, we have vehicles that don’t contain wheels. They
are antigravity cars that travel a few feet to several
hundred feet above ground.

I next progressed Mark to the completion of his training
as a pilot and his future job.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your work, Elam.

Mark:

I am very upset. I couldn’t qualify for the pilot position for the large ships I discussed.

Dr. G.:

So what kind of work do you do now?

Mark:

I am a copilot on a charter transport service.

Dr. G.:

Where do you travel to?

Mark:

We take people from the Earth to recreational areas and resorts on the moon.

Dr. G.:

That sounds interesting.

Mark:

It really isn’t. The crafts mostly fly themselves by way
of the computers and it’s really a boring trip.

Dr. G.:

Is there anything about your job you like?

Mark:

Well yes. After we arrive on the moon, there is a
layover of several days and I mostly party with the
other guys and some of the guests.

Mark was describing the equivalent of a fraternity party
on the moon while waiting to return to Earth with tourists
whose vacations had ended. Perhaps this made up for Mark’s
lack of a fraternity party life in college. Even with this fringe
benefit, Elam was still unfulfilled.
Dr. G.:

Do you have a girlfriend, Elam?

Mark:

Yes. Her name is Zia and she is beautiful.

As I continued questioning Mark about Zia, I discovered that they got along quite well. The only problem was
that Zia wanted to get married and disliked Elam’s job. He
was away so much and she also knew about the partying.

C3Chapter 12.pmd

141

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

142

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

How are you getting along with Zia now?

Mark:

It’s terrible. She keeps trying to get me to quit my job
and use my talents on Earth.

Dr. G.:

What talent is that?

Mark:

Oh, didn’t I tell you? I am an inventor.

Dr. G.:

Is that why you were a test tube baby? Was the purpose to have you become an inventor?

Mark:

Yes, but it never quite worked out.

I could see a past life carryover developing in Mark’s future life as Elam. In both lives, he feels as if he is a failure, and
appears to be trying to make up for lack of social experience
in his current life as Mark and in his future life as Elam.
I then progressed Elam forward to a significant event in
his relationship with Zia.
Dr. G.:

What has happened since I last spoke with you?

Mark:

It’s terrible! I had a big fight with Zia over marriage and
told her that I simply am not cut out for it.

Dr. G.:

What did she do?

Mark:

She broke up with me.

Mark’s two unsuccessful marriages may have carried over
into his future life as Elam as fear of commitment and of the
institution itself.
Following his breakup with Zia, Elam had a nervous
breakdown. I progressed him to the resolution of this issue.
Dr. G.:

What did you do to treat this mental collapse?

Mark:

I went to TASK.

Dr. G.:

What is TASK?

Mark:

It stands for Terrestrial Alliance for Scientific
Knowledge and functions as both a research and
treatment clinic.

Dr. G.:

What did your therapy consist of?

C3Chapter 12.pmd

142

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

143

Seeing Into the Future
Mark:

They used a combination of color programming and
music to realign my brain and balance my energy centers to reestablish normal functioning.

TASK sounded interesting. This research center was
apparently quite large and well known. It stored massive
amounts of data dealing with all forms of medicine and
alternative disciplines of healing, as well as other scientific
disciplines.
Dr. G.: Are you back to normal now?
Mark:

Oh yes.

Dr. G.:

What will you do now?

Mark:

I decided to devote myself to my inventing.

Dr. G.:

How will you earn a living until you actually market
one of your inventions?

Mark:

TASK solved that problem.

Dr. G.:

How so?

Mark:

I told you they do a lot of research. During my therapy,
they analyzed my brain waves and determined that I
had natural talents for inventing. Then they offered
me a job.

TASKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s offer was well-timed and attractive. In addition to
a good salary and fringe benefits, Elam would receive a royalty on each product he invented that was sold worldwide.
Dr. G.:

How is it going with TASK?

Mark:

Great! I have completed several small inventions and
now I regularly receive royalty checks as a bonus.

Dr. G.:

Are you dating anyone at this time?

Mark:

Yes. After giving our relationship a great deal of
thought I contacted Zia and told her I wanted to
marry her.

Dr. G.:

Is that true?

C3Chapter 12.pmd

143

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

144

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Mark:

Yes. Maybe it was my therapy at TASK, but I now
have no fear of marriage and want to be with Zia.

Dr. G.:

How did Zia respond to the proposal?

Mark:

She was excited. We began dating again and are now
planning our wedding.

As I moved Elam forward in time, he was now in his early
30s. He and Zia did get married and appeared to be quite
happy. In addition, Elam received several promotions and
honors at TASK for his work. During the next five years, Zia
gave birth to a son and daughter and this further added to
their marital bliss.
Dr. G.:

Elam, can you tell me about an invention of yours
that you are most proud of?

Mark:

That’s easy. It’s my tele-immersion unit. I received
national recognition and became quite wealthy as a
result of this device.

Dr. G.:

What does a tele-immersion unit do?

Mark:

This device enables the user to share precisely the
visual experience another is having, regardless of how
far the other person is in distance.

Dr. G.:

In other words, are you saying you are seeing the
world through their eyes?

Mark:

Exactly.

Dr. G.:

Does this work on the moon and other planets?

Mark:

So far TASK’s initial testing shows that it does without any significant distortion in the signal.

One could see both the military and industrial applications of the tele-immersion unit. So it looks as if Elam, the
test tube baby, finally lived up to his potential both personally and professionally.
One last invention Elam shared with me is something he
calls the Cyborg connector. This device consists of a computer connection implanted in a person’s head so that data

C3Chapter 12.pmd

144

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Seeing Into the Future

145

can be downloaded from a small hand-held computer directly into their brain. This gives new meaning to the term
â&#x20AC;&#x153;artificial intelligence.â&#x20AC;?
So the circle is complete, and Mark left my office with
the knowledge that he will resolve his issues as Elam. About
a year later, he reported to me feeling as if he had a new
lease on life. This case represents one of the many advantages of doing future life progressions.

C3Chapter 12.pmd

145

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

146

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 13

The Future Lives of
a TV Personality

Early in January 1981, Harry Martin called me expressing interest in progressing into the future through the use of
hypnosis. He had done so well with past life regression that
he wanted to see if it could work “in reverse.” After seeing
himself as a self-made warehouse owner in the 18th century, a
19th-century blind piano player, and an RAF radio operator
during World War II, Harry was ready for an entirely different
experience. I explained the theory concerning the space-time
continuum and he seemed very enthusiastic about attempting
a journey into the future.
Harry was the cohost of a local talk show called “Hello
Baltimore” on WBAL-TV. At our first session, I wanted to
establish the validity of this technique. I decided to progress
Harry just one week into the future to the WBAL newsroom
assignment board to see if he could read news items about
events that hadn’t occurred yet. This seemed to be a fair test of
hypnotic progression and Harry agreed to it wholeheartedly.
My next step would be to progress Harry into a future life. All
of these sessions were tape recorded and I gave Harry a copy
of these tapes.
On February 2, 1981, Harry began his first trip into the
future. I progressed him one week forward, to February 9, 1981,
which was a Monday. The technique simply consisted of Harry’s
reading either from the newsroom assignment board one hour

146

C4Chapter 13.pmd

146

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

147

before air-time of his broadcast or his reading from the actual
script of that day’s newscast. (The first 15 minutes of “Hello
Baltimore” consisted of a news update.)
Dr. G.:

Tell me exactly what you see on the assignment board.

Harry:

Plane, and the number 406.

When I asked Harry to read the news script about this
item, this is what he reported.
Harry:

State aviation officials are investigating the crash of
a small plane this morning near Route 406.

This item never made it on the air, but on February 9, a
small plane did crash in Bowie, Maryland. This crash was
investigated by state aviation officials.
Dr. G.:

What is the next item on the assignment board?

Harry:

It’s the name of a place, I think, but I can’t make it out.

Dr. G.

Can you spell it?

Harry:

It’s a long name. It’s a very weird combination of
consonants. It’s the name of a man.

Dr. G.:

What letters can you make out?

Harry:

ST W KI...it’s a long Russian-type name.

On February 9, Stanislaw Kania, Poland’s labor leader,
was told that he might soon be fired unless he instructed his
workers to return to work.
Dr. G.:

Move down to the next item that you will be reading
on the air. Tell me what the script says.

Harry:

This is an accident. It’s on 695 [the Baltimore
Beltway] between the Pikesville and Security Boulevard exits, but I don’t know where.

Dr. G.:

What vehicles are involved in the accident?

Harry:

One large vehicle and one small one. There were no
deaths.

C4Chapter 13.pmd

147

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

148

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

On February 9 a school bus on its way to Randallstown
(between Pikesville and Security Boulevard) hit a car at 200
Embleton Road in Owings Mills (just north of Pikesville).
No deaths were reported.
Dr. G.:

What is the next news item, Harry?

Harry:

It has to do with Governor Hughes and the budget.

Dr. G.:

What about the budget?

Harry:

Governor Hughes says he’s holding the line this year
on the budget. The legislature is going against him
for some reason, saying that they don’t have to hold
the budget on some raise proposal.

On February 12, Governor Hughes vetoed a $40- to $60million raise for state employers. The Maryland Classified
Employees Association (MCEA) had obtained the support of
the State Legislature in voting for a salary raise.
Dr. G.:

What is the next news item?

Harry:

It’s something about Jerry Falwell.

Dr. G.:

What about Jerry Falwell?

Harry:

It has something to do with Falwell’s interview that
appeared in Penthouse.

On February 4, Jerry Falwell withdrew his lawsuit against
Penthouse magazine. (Remember, this session was taking
place on February 2.)
Harry’s next progression session was the following Monday, February 9. There was much excitement and enthusiasm
in his voice when he discussed last week’s “hits.” I was also
stimulated and elated with the results of the last session.
Anyone can do what Harry accomplished. The hypnotic
state allows the psychic component of the brain to be
tapped. We all have this progression ability. Naturally, I do
not use this technique to predict stock values or lottery
numbers. First, I consider this an unethical use of our natural
psychic abilities. Second, the dates are not always accurate.

C4Chapter 13.pmd

148

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

149

A progression of one week in the future may, in actuality, be
three days or 10 days hence. What the patient perceives as
one week in advance can actually take place a few days on
either side of that precise date.
I then progressed Harry to February 16 and again had him
read the news items on the script that would be used on the air.
Dr. G.:

What news item appears next on the script?

Harry:

A fire in the city.

Dr. G.:

What kind of building was involved?

Harry:

A house fire; a row house.

Dr. G.:

Do you see the name of the person who owned the
house?

Harry:

I want to say Johnson. They don’t own it; I think they
just live there.

Dr. G.:

Anything else?

Harry:

There are two little girls involved.

Dr. G.:

Are they hurt?

Harry:

No, they escaped safely, but somebody was hurt. I
don’t know who, though.

Dr. G.:

Can you see anything else?

Harry:

I see two little girls being dangled from the secondstory window of this row house. They’re being rescued
by someone. They had ribbons in their hair.

On February 13, a child named Kenneth Blanda died in
a second-story fire on 540 Pulaski Street in the western part
of Baltimore City. A space heater had caused the fire. Patricia
Johnson, a neighbor, was interviewed about the fire. This fire
did occur in a row house.
What is especially interesting is that in four of the six
hits, the dates matched perfectly. With one of the misses, the
date was five days before, and with the other, it was three
days before the predicted date. I consulted with a professor

C4Chapter 13.pmd

149

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

150

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

of mathematics at a local university and he stated that the
odds were hundreds of thousands to one against this type of
thing happening by mere chance. These hits don’t prove progression but, in my opinion, they lend significant credence
to the theory.
On March 9, Harry came to my office for a progression
into a future lifetime. He was excited about this adventure. I
induced him into a medium trance and began questioning
him. During this entire session, Harry spoke in a slow, almost monotonous voice, expressing no emotion whatsoever.
Dr. G.:

What do you see before you?

Harry:

A pyramid.

Dr. G.:

Is this pyramid isolated or are there other structures
around it?

Harry:

It’s isolated.

Dr. G.:

Where is this pyramid?

Harry:

It’s in the desert.

Dr. G.:

What is the purpose of this pyramid?

Harry:

It has something to do with energy. It’s getting energy from the sun.

Dr. G.:

Are there any other structures by the pyramid that
are related to its energy functions.

Harry:

There are pipes on the bottom of it.

Dr. G.:

Why are you there?

Harry:

I’m just observing. It’s like a tour.

Dr. G.:

How long have you been there?

Harry:

I’ve just arrived.

Dr. G.:

How long are you going to be there?

Harry:

Another hour and then we’re going to leave.

I next progressed Harry to the tour itself.
Dr. G.:

C4Chapter 13.pmd

What do you see now?

150

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

151

Harry:

The pyramid is made of glass.

Dr. G.:

Are you inside the pyramid now?

Harry:

Yes. There are living quarters in the far corners with
plants and all sorts of supplies.

Can you see any personal effects in this pyramid that
would indicate that people are currently living here?

Harry:

Yes. There are plants in various quarters.

Dr. G.:

What form of communication exists in the pyramid?

Harry:

We don’t speak. We think and our thoughts are transmitted as images. That is the purpose of this scientific team—to explore silent communication.

Dr. G.:

Can you see what the people on the tour are wearing?

Harry:

We all wear a one-piece coverall suit of a certain
color.

C4Chapter 13.pmd

151

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

152

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What kind of footwear do you have on?

Harry:

Rubber ankle-high boots that are the same color as
the suit.

Dr. G.:

Does the color of the suit have any meaning?

Harry:

Yes. Each color signifies your function and rank on
this project.

Dr. G.:

What is your color?

Harry:

Beige.

Dr. G.:

What colors are the other people on the tour wearing?

Harry:

We are all wearing beige. Red is the lowest color. Next
is beige, orange, yellow, green, and violet. As we progress
in our duties, we move on to the higher colors.

Dr. G.:

What do the scientists in the pyramids do as you
observe them?

Harry:

They just seem to be walking back and forth.

Dr. G.:

Do they make any sounds?

Harry:

No.

Dr. G.:

What year is this?

Harry:

2153.

Dr. G.:

How do you communicate any problems with your
supervisors?

Harry:

You think about it and they will know it.

Dr. G.:

Are you the only inspector?

Harry:

Yes.

This was Harryâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s first job in this future lifetime. He had
very little formal training for this inspector position. I next
progressed Harry forward in time by 10 years.
Dr. G.:

Where do you find yourself now?

Harry:

Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;m inspecting the irrigation system.

Dr. G.:

Has anything changed since I last spoke with you?

C4Chapter 13.pmd

152

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

153

Harry:

Yes. The pyramid is now being used for farming
purposes.

Dr. G.:

Could you elaborate?

Harry:

All of the plants are grown in water, not soil. The
water has all the necessary nutrients in it.

Dr. G.:

What exactly do you do now?

Harry:

I help monitor the ratio of various nutrients in the
water so that the correct proportions are present.

Dr. G.:

Do you do this yourself?

Harry:

No, the computer does this. I just double-check the
computer.

Dr. G.:

What do you do if the computer is malfunctioning?

Harry:

I repair it.

Dr. G.:

What color is your suit?

Harry:

Yellow.

Apparently, Harry had been promoted to a much more
sophisticated position in the pyramid. I now progressed Harry
to the last day of his future life.
Dr. G.:

Where are you?

Harry:

Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;m reporting to the termination room.

Dr. G.:

Are you still in the pyramid?

Harry:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

Why are you in the termination room?

Harry:

Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s my turn to change units.

Dr. G.:

Can you describe this procedure?

Harry:

I lie down on a table and they put something on my
fingers and I just go to sleep.

Dr. G.:

What does this do to you?

Harry:

It takes all of your energy out of you.

Dr. G.:

Why is this done?

C4Chapter 13.pmd

153

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

154

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Harry:

You can now be placed in a more appropriate
unit. You don’t grow old or grow up. You are
just transferred.

Dr. G.:

Is this then a mechanical body?

Harry:

No. It’s a totally biological unit.

Dr. G.:

What happens in between going from one unit to
another?

Harry:

You are stored on tape.

Dr. G.:

Do you have a choice as to whether or not you will
enter a certain unit?

Harry:

No.

Harry’s voice and delivery in answering my questions
were particularly interesting to me. They were vastly different as compared to his normal speech patterns. I was also
fascinated with Harry’s report of the experiments in mental
telepathy and the use of solar energy as the only energy
source. The isolation of this future life was similar to Harry’s
past life as Hap, the blind piano player. Even though he was
born blind, Hap exhibited no remorse. As a 22nd-century
irrigation inspector, Harry easily accepted this “termination.”
The 18th-century life as a warehouse owner and director of
an import-export business required that he be an inspector .
It was also lonely at work. This karmic lesson still needed to
be learned 400 years later.
When Harry received his promotion to irrigation supervisor, this reminded me of his start in newscasting as a radio
personality. He was then promoted to television reporting.
Today, Harry is a well-organized television newscaster. He
acquired this discipline from at least three previous lifetimes.
As an RAF radio operator, he was well trained in scientific
discipline.
Assertiveness is a trait Harry Martin possesses today. It
is a necessary quality for a television personality. Yet during

C4Chapter 13.pmd

154

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

155

the 19th, 20th (as the RAF radio operator), and 22nd centuries, this characteristic was lacking. The karmic lesson was
learned and didn’t have to be repeated.
Harry’s second future lifetime was revealed two weeks
later. He came to my office on this spring afternoon feeling
quite relaxed. I induced him into a medium trance and proceeded with the questioning.
Dr. G.:

What do you see?

Harry:

I see white curtains that look like lace in front of a
window.

Dr. G.:

What else do you see?

Harry:

I’m inside this room and I’m looking at my work.

Dr. G.:

What kind of work is that?

Harry:

Silver plates. There are these silver plates on the wall.

Harry’s answers were again almost mechanical without
any expression of emotion. His speech pattern was very slow
and his voice very deep. This was to continue throughout the
session.
Dr. G.:

What is characteristic about these plates?

Harry:

They have emblems on them, but no writing.

Dr. G.:

Can you describe the furniture?

Harry:

The design on the couch and chairs is cubical.

Dr. G.:

What is this place?

Harry:

It’s my home.

Dr. G.:

What is special about this particular day?

Harry:

This is a rest day.

Dr. G.:

What kind of work do you do?

Harry:

I’m a sort of craftsperson.

Dr. G.:

What do you construct?

Harry:

Those plates. Those silver plates on the wall.

C4Chapter 13.pmd

155

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

156

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Who do you do these for?

Harry:

People. People request my services.

Dr. G.:

Are there many craftsmen like you?

Harry:

No. There are only a few of us who do this kind of work.

Dr. G.:

What do people call you?

Harry:

Amygdala.

Dr. G.:

Is that your complete name?

Harry:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

What year is this?

Harry:

2271.

I next progressed Amygdala forward in time by two years.
Dr. G.:

Can you tell me more about your work?

Harry:

These plates are made of silver. They are a means of
currency.

Dr. G.:

Are there other forms of currency?

Harry:

Yes. You see, these silver plates are a way of holding massive amounts of wealth.

Dr. G.:

The fact that you have some of these silver plates on
your wall, does that mean that you are wealthy?

Harry:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

Why do people come to you for your work? Why
donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t they just store their own silver?

Harry:

What happens is my making these plates increases
the value of the metal.

Dr. G.:

What kind of work do some of your clients do?

Harry:

Law and some of my people are in manufacturing
and transportation.

Dr. G.:

What kind of transportation are you referring to?

Harry:

Molecular reassembly. This type of transportation is
new, but is being used more and more.

C4Chapter 13.pmd

156

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

157

Dr. G.:

Are there any other uses for molecular reassembly?

Harry:

Sustenance. We have small units that help nourish
us while we sleep.

Dr. G.:

Could you describe your own molecular reassembly
unit?

Harry:

It’s a platform, a round platform. There is a coordinate tracking system to set it.

Dr. G.:

Do you need someone else to activate it?

Harry:

No.

Dr. G.:

When you do use it, how do you get reassembled?

Harry:

It’s programmed into the unit by the tracking system.

Dr. G.:

Can you describe the last time you used the molecular reassembly unit for transporting yourself?

Harry:

I recently went into the city for a meeting.

Dr. G.:

Was anyone else present?

Harry:

There were two other people. One is a man dressed
in a gray suit made of very shiny material. [Patient
paused.]

Dr. G.:

And the woman, how was she dressed?

Harry:

Oh, I’m really confused. [Patient exhibited emotions
for the first time since the session began.]

Dr. G.:

Why are you confused?

Harry:

How did you know it was a woman?

Dr. G.:

You said one of these two people was a male, so I
assumed that the other was female. How was she
dressed?

Harry:

This other person in the room is not really a woman.

Dr. G.:

Is she human?

Harry:

Partially. She is part human and part machine.

Dr. G.:

Can you describe her?

C4Chapter 13.pmd

157

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

158
Harry:

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
The top half of her body is of human form but the
way she gets around is by machine. Her head is
shaved. Her eyes are slanted and her skin is very pale.

It seemed the lower part of this being consisted of a
mechanized apparatus similar to a wheelchair.
Dr. G.:

Is there anyone else in the room?

Harry:

No, just the computer.

Dr. G.:

What is the purpose of this meeting?

Harry:

It has something to do with insurance.

Dr. G.:

Personal insurance or work-related insurance?

Harry:

Work-related.

Dr. G.:

Can you read the policy right now?

Harry:

There’s no writing. You plug it in. [Patient sounded
bored.]

I next progressed Amygdala to the time when he would
return home and review his policy.
Dr. G.:

What are you doing now?

Harry:

I’m plugging the policy into the wall. The screen asks
for my ID number so that only I can review it.

Dr. G.:

What specifically does it state?

Harry:

Amygdala...insured against defects in workmanship.
Mars 1522.

Amygdala didn’t know what Mars 1522 referred to. I returned Harry to the present.
In this life, Harry (Amygdala) showed more of his creative potential as the silver craftsmen. This society seemed
to value silver more than any other metal, and crime was
almost unknown. In his present life, Harry is also quite creative. He is currently writing a novel, plays the drums, and is
much involved with the production aspect of a news
miniseries. As the 19th-century piano player Hap, Harry was
also showing his creativity. The RAF radio operator died

C4Chapter 13.pmd

158

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

The Future Lives of a TV Personality

159

before he could leave his mark on society. Harry’s career as
a television personality is his way of contributing to the world.
This 23rd-century life was the culmination of at least 400
years of creative talent. The great wealth that Amygdala accumulated, in addition to the recognition he was shown, were
karmic paybacks for centuries of hard work and dedication.
In the current 20th century, Harry is well on his way to
“doing his thing.” From his past and future lives, he has
learned the value of creativity and recognition. Now, as a
media personality, he can put these lessons to use. Of the
many benefits he received from hypnotherapy, Harry states
that focusing his concentration, acquiring more discipline
and energy, and the realization that maybe he should start
loving life (taking time to smell the roses, and so on) were
most significant. Developing a more open attitude toward
hypnotherapy and a better understanding of himself must be
added to these advantages. Perhaps the knowledge that there
will still be a world in 300 years is enough to give us all an
optimistic view of the future.
My reaction to Harry’s progressions and regressions was
one of satisfaction. Harry has previously stated positive
changes in his behavior and attitude toward life. These positive results make me feel proud to be a hypnotherapist.
Most patients don’t want to know about the future. That
is unfortunate because of the tremendous therapeutic potential progression represents. Whether you believe in progression, regression, or hypnosis doesn’t really matter.
Anyone can obtain the benefits Harry Martin received
through hypnotherapy.

C4Chapter 13.pmd

159

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

160

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 14

A Contaminated Future

A compulsion is defined as a repetitive and seemingly
purposeful behavior that is performed according to certain
rules or in a stereotyped fashion. The behavior is not an end in
itself, but is designed to produce or prevent some future event
or situation. The activity is quite excessive and is not connected
in a realistic way with what it is designed to produce or prevent. The individual generally recognizes the senselessness of
the behavior and does not derive pleasure from carrying out
the activity, although it provides a release of tension.
With this background, you can now appreciate Pete’s predicament. Pete called me in August of 1984. He was a clinical
psychologist and had a hand-washing compulsion. He knew
the definition of a compulsion very well, but could not help
himself. Pete had spent years in therapy with no results. He
would constantly wash his hands, day and night. He changed
his clothes two to three times a day to “remove the dirt.”
Pete was a truly pleasant man. I could see him relating
rather well to his patients. He was always neatly dressed, wellgroomed, and soft-spoken. Under no circumstances could he
treat a patient with a compulsion. It was just too close to home
and he would refer them out. There were many interruptions
in his practice because he would wash his hands at least once
during a session, usually after shaking hands with the patient.

160

C5Chapter 14.pmd

160

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Contaminated Future

161

Pete’s biggest fear was the possibility of being contaminated. There was absolutely no logic to his concern. He felt
that if he didn’t go through his daily rituals, he would somehow be contaminated and wouldn’t be able to function. Another unusual aspect of his psychological profile was the
number eight. This number haunted him. He was born in August (the eighth month). Every time he obtained a telephone
number or a new address, the number eight was always well
represented. His grandmother died in August, and there were
many other deaths in his family during the eighth month of
the year.
As a result, Pete always exhibited a form of anxiety and
depression every August. His first call to my office to set up his
initial session occurred at the end of August. Another strange
occurrence was the name Teresa. This is not a particularly
common name, but one that Pete associated with negativity.
A girl he dated in graduate school rather cruelly ended their
relationship just prior to his oral exam for his doctorate. Her
name was Teresa. Throughout his growing up years, the name
Teresa would send chills down Pete’s spine. He could not explain why.
Pete recovered from the Teresa who had ended their relationship, but the name still haunted him. He had one car accident in his life and the woman involved was hospitalized with
numerous injuries. Her first name was Teresa, and there were
two eights on her license plate. In addition, this automobile
accident took place late one August evening.
By the time Pete actually entered my office in September
of 1984, he was desperate. He just had to rid himself of this
compulsion once and for all. It was causing him to lose sleep,
and additionally, it was certainly not helping his therapy practice. Many people are given a poor impression by a psychologist who washes his hand immediately after greeting you.
Pete proved to be an average hypnotic patient. By that I
mean, his trance depth fit into the light to medium range. The
majority of the population can easily attain this level. As I

C5Chapter 14.pmd

161

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

162

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

have mentioned before, one does not need to reach a deep
level of hypnosis to regress into past lives or progress into a
future lifetime. In Pete’s case, this was more than sufficient
for his explorations.
Pete’s first past life helped explain a lot about his current symptoms. The year was 1888 (note the presence of the
number eight) and the city was Paris. Pete was a female singer
named Marie Duvall. Marie was very successful on the stage,
but her morals left something to be desired. She was a prostitute for years before she became known for her musical and
acting talents.
Even after achieving a name on the stage, Marie still used
her body to get what she wanted. She was very ambitious and
aggressive (a complete opposite of Pete today). Pete cringed
at the thought of what Marie did and represented. She was
vain, selfish, cruel, and ruthless. She slept with men indiscriminately just to get what she wanted from them. She was never
satisfied; she always had to have more.
Pete would comment to me during these sessions about
how “dirty” Marie was. She would have sex with one man and
without washing herself, sleep with another during her prostitute days. One of the events that truly saddened Marie was
the death of a lover. She became infatuated with a man who
worked for the government. He was powerful and Marie
couldn’t get enough of him. She loved power. One day he was
killed by a German agent.
The French government knew about their affair and convinced Marie to work for them. She readily agreed because
revenge was a part of her personality. She acted occasionally
as a spy for the French government and only wanted assignments against Germany. One night she was sleeping with a
German agent and her assignment was complete. She obtained
the needed information, but decided to kill him herself. In a
series of violent thrusts Marie stabbed the German agent to
death. Her naked body was covered with his blood. She stood
and laughed about this. It was at least an hour before she

C5Chapter 14.pmd

162

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Contaminated Future

163

washed herself off. During this scene, Pete was cringing in
his chair. He couldn’t stand the sight of Marie standing there
drenched in blood laughing about a murder she had just
committed.
Shortly thereafter, Marie informed the French government she could no longer work for them. She continued with
her life, satisfied that her lover’s death was avenged. As the
years went by, she began to have nightmares about that murder. Feelings of guilt flooded her mind. She didn’t know
what to do.
Although she was not a religious woman, Marie felt a trip
to a convent outside the city would be the solution. She wanted
to confess her sins, especially the murder. When she arrived at
the convent, the sister in charge spent a great deal of time
listening to her story. At the end of this she told Marie that
they could not absolve her of her sins. The date was August 8
and the nun was named Sister Teresa.
When Pete came out of that trance, he was made aware of
a number of facts. First, the number eight had played a rather
prominent role in Marie’s life. Second, a person with the name
of Teresa had finally emerged as a possible source of his anxiety. Last but not least, a source of his hand-washing compulsion reared its head. (You will note that I say a source and not
the source. Pete’s case was far too complicated to be explained
by one past life regression.) One interesting aside on this life
was Marie’s failure to find peace with Sister Teresa. Perhaps
that was the main reason Pete chose psychology as a profession: Now he could help people when he himself couldn’t
obtain that needed aid 100 years ago.
The rest of Marie’s life was inconsequential to Pete’s condition, so we left her alone and explored another life. In an
African life, Pete was a female and a mother. Her husband was
killed in a war and she was left to raise her baby daughter. Loneliness was a definite problem, but even more significant, a plague
annihilated her baby daughter and most of her village. She survived a good many years, but lived in constant fear for her life

C5Chapter 14.pmd

163

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

164

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

and always blamed herself for the death of her daughter, even
though there was nothing she could have done to prevent it.
Eventually, this woman died. The key point in this life was the
plague and the blame she projected onto herself. Here we have
another cause-effect relationship with the current compulsion.
For Pete’s third trip back in time he described a life in England during the 15th century. This time Pete was a male named
James. James was a nobleman and spent most of his time in the
king’s court. He had an older brother, Robert, who was also at the
king’s side. Later, the king became sexually involved with James
and his brother. Pete again began to cringe when he described
this homosexual relationship. He called it “sick” and “dirty.”
As time passed, a power struggle developed between James
and his brother. Because both were lovers of the king, they
received special treatment and favors. Robert was older and
was thus given more power and authority. This angered James
and a battle of wits ensued between the brothers for power
and position.
James (Pete) lost this battle and was banished from England. He grew depressed and, in France, planed his next move.
He returned with some men and murdered Robert. The king
was furious and had James beheaded.
Pete cringed in my recliner as he perceived his death. He
described the blade as being “filthy with the blood of its previous victims.” Here again we can see cause-effect relationships
to explain Pete’s current compulsion. Do not ignore the guilt
he felt from violence (killing his brother) and his homosexual
relationship with the king. Sex, violence, guilt, and a dirty blade
were the karmic carryovers from this English life.
The stage was set for the most significant life relating to
Pete’s present-day compulsion. As I stated elsewhere in this
book, because all time is simultaneous, the cause of a presentday problem could very well rest in a future lifetime. Although
all of the lives we explored were causative, they were not the
only or most significant factors. In Pete’s case, the most significant life turned out to be a future life.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

164

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

165

A Contaminated Future

By this stage in our hypnotherapy, Pete was beginning to
show marked progress in sleeping better and in the lessening
of the frequency and intensity of his compulsive symptoms.
He was eager to continue his therapy and most probably expected to regress to another past life during the next session.
Such was not the case. Pete traveled forward instead to the
latter part of the 21st century.
Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Pete:

Ben. Ben Kingsley.

Dr. G.:

Where do you find yourself?

Pete:

I am in school and I like what Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;m studying.

Dr. G.:

What is it that you are studying?

Pete:

Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s a science course and I like the work.

Ben was in a high school physics course. He had a natural
talent for science and loved putting things together, taking them
apart, and calculating the probability of various experiments.
Dr. G.:

Where do you live, Ben?

Pete:

Tulsa. Tulsa, Oklahoma.

Dr. G.:

What year is this?

Pete:

2074.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about your family.

Pete:

What do you want to know?

Dr. G.:

What does your father do?

Pete:

He is a psychiatrist.

Dr. G.:

And your mother?

Pete:

She works as an architect.

Dr. G.:

Any brothers or sisters?

Pete:

I have one brother, Roger, and one sister, Tenina.

Dr. G.:

Are they older than you?

Pete:

No, they are both younger.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

165

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

166

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What do you want to do with your life?

Pete:

I want to go to college and do something in the scientific field. I don’t know exactly which field yet.

As I continued questioning Ben, I found out that he
was a very conscientious young adult. He didn’t seem to
have any bad habits. He was a good student and got along
well with his family. Ben exhibited a great deal of respect
for his father and mother. He admired their dedication to
their respective careers but, at the same time, did not feel
neglected. Ben was kind and helpful to his younger brother
and sister.
Ben was progressed beyond his high school years to any
relevant advanced education or occupation. He described
going to college and majoring in physics.
Dr. G.:

How do you like school?

Pete:

I love it.

Dr. .G.: What is your major?
Pete:

Now I’m concentrating in nuclear physics.

Dr. G.:

With what goal?

Pete:

When I graduate, I want to work as a technician in a
nuclear power plant.

Dr. G.:

With your skills, why not become a nuclear physicist?

Pete:

I couldn’t do that.

Dr. G.:

Why not?

Pete:

Because I’m not cut out for that kind of responsibility.

Dr. G.:

Don’t you think you could handle the training?

Pete:

I’m sure I could but, you see, I get a little nervous
sometimes when things don’t go well.

Dr. G.:

What do you mean by a little nervous?

Pete:

Well, every once in a while, when I get nervous and
frustrated, I develop a panicky feeling.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

166

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Contaminated Future

167

Dr. G.:

What do you do?

Pete:

I lose my temper sometimes and don’t think too
clearly for a few minutes.

Dr. G.:

This sounds like a real problem. Have you told your
father about this?

Pete:

Yes, he knows about it.

Dr. G.:

Has he done anything about it?

Pete:

I am seeing one of his colleagues, a Dr. Margolis.

Dr. G.:

What does Dr. Margolis tell you about your condition?

Pete:

He tells me it’s not very serious, but that I should
keep my stress levels down and avoid repeated
confrontations.

Dr. G.:

Doesn’t that preclude a career as a nuclear plant
technician?

Pete:

It would if it was found out, but that won’t be a
problem.

Dr. G.:

How so?

Pete:

Dr. Margolis is a very good friend of my father. He
owes Dad a big favor. Also, he is well aware of my
academic record.

Dr. G.:

By that you mean he will keep your therapy off the
record.

Pete:

That’s correct.

Dr. G.:

Is there anything else about yourself that might surface as a problem in your chosen profession?

Pete:

Nothing that I can think of.

I was looking for some carryover of Pete’s compulsion,
but found none. Ben was only occasionally out of control
with these temper episodes and nobody seemed to be concerned. No one except me, that is.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

167

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

168

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

None of Pete’s characteristics seemed to have expressed
themselves in Ben. If anything, he was quite the opposite of
Pete’s present-day personality. I next progressed Ben to a
significant event in his college career.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now Ben?

Pete:

I’m meeting Gail.

Dr. G.:

Who is Gail?

Pete:

She is my fiancée.

Dr. G.:

Does she know about your temper episodes?

Pete:

No. I don’t know why you keep stressing those rare
behaviors. When Gail is around, I am calm and in
complete control.

Ben was quite right. When he was with Gail, he was a
different person. He was calm, confident, and sensitive to
her needs. Even if things weren’t going well for Ben, Gail’s
presence made it easier to take. She was obviously the best
thing that had ever happened to him.
Dr. G.:

How are things going with Dr. Margolis’s treatment?

Pete:

Okay, I guess.

Dr. G.:

What does he do when you see him?

Pete:

He uses a form of biofeedback with me.

Dr. G.

Does he put you on any medication?

Pete:

Only occasionally. He only prescribes drugs when I
report a series of episodes.

Dr. G.:

Have you done that recently?

Pete:

No. I have been doing fine lately.

Ben was correct: He had been feeling better. Gail had
moved in with him and Ben felt on top of the world. Dr. Margolis
was pleased, and monitored Ben once a month. Gail had no
idea that Ben was seeing Dr. Margolis. She had her own career
as a computer programmer and kept quite busy.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

168

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

169

A Contaminated Future

Gail never saw Ben at his worst. He studied in the library, and when he got frustrated in the lab, it was usually
when he was alone. Ben’s father was proud of his son and felt
everything was progressing nicely.
Ben was a very happy man. He graduated from college
and married Gail. His family was proud of him and he was
well on his way to achieving his lifelong goals. I next progressed Ben to his working environment.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your work.

Pete:

I absolutely love it. I work as a technician in the
nuclear plant outside of Tulsa.

Dr. G.:

So you have remained in Tulsa.

Pete:

Yes. I am a junior technician and I am supervised by
Ralph.

Dr. G.:

How do you get along with Ralph?

Pete:

We have a good working relationship. He is an excellent teacher and we have become good friends.

Dr. G.:

Do you ever get upset at work?

Pete:

Sometimes I feel a little frustrated at the vast complexities of the plant, but I don’t really get upset.

Dr. G.:

How about at home?

Pete:

No, Gail and I love each other.

Dr. G.:

Do you still see Dr. Margolis?

Pete:

Just three or four times a year. He says I am doing fine.

Dr. G.:

Then, why does he keep seeing you at all?

Pete:

My father wants to make sure that I am really all
right. Because Dr. Margolis’s therapy is strictly off
the record, Dad feels responsible for my psychological well-being.

As I progressed Ben forward in time, he reported a true
love for his life. Although his family life was important, he
was truly dedicated to his job. I perceived a little too much

C5Chapter 14.pmd

169

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

170

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

dedication. Ben had an obsessive-compulsive personality,
but that is not uncommon among scientifically trained people.
What I was concerned with was the excessive workaholic
traits he was exhibiting, coupled with a high-strung nature
that was potentially explosive and dangerous.
None of my concerns manifested themselves during my
questioning of Ben. I then progressed him forward five years.
Dr. G.:

What has happened since we last spoke?

Pete:

I really do enjoy my work. I have received three promotions and am the second in command in my unit.

Dr. G.:

Who do you work under?

Pete:

Ralph is still my supervisor.

Dr. G.:

Do you still get along with him?

Pete:

Yes. We are very good friends and our families spend
a fair amount of time together.

Dr. G.:

You said families. Does that mean you have any
children?

Pete:

Gail and I are the proud parents of two sons, Aaron
and Ronald.

Dr. G.:

Does it bother you that you are not in charge of your
unit?

Pete:

No. You see, I have been assigned to a new research
unit and am being trained to head my particular
section.

Things had very much worked out for Ben. He was only
with Ralph about one half of the week. The rest of his time
was spent in a brand-new nuclear research facility located
about 20 miles from the plant. This facility was studying various techniques to harness and control nuclear power safely.
This was a very special unit and it was quite an honor to be
chosen to work in it. Benâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s ambition and skills had allowed
him to rise up the promotion ladder quickly, which quite
pleased him.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

170

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

171

A Contaminated Future
Dr. G.:

How does Gail feel about your two jobs?

Pete:

Oh, she is all for it. She is always supportive of my
career and I love her for it.

Dr. G.:

What about the long hours?

Pete:

I don’t mind them at all.

Dr. G.:

Doesn’t Gail object to your absence from your home?

Pete:

Gail has her own career and taking care of the boys
keeps her busy. We really don’t have any problems.

Dr. G.:

What about your temper episodes? Is that still a
problem?

Pete:

Not at all. I haven’t had any episode in more than
three years.

Dr. G.:

Are you still seeing Dr. Margolis?

Pete:

No.

Dr. G.:

Does your father approve of your termination of
therapy with Dr. Margolis?

Pete:

He hasn’t said anything about it for a long time. Dr.
Margolis consulted with Dad before ending the
therapy, so I guess I’m okay.

Dr. G.:

Has anyone in either of the two facilities you work in
found out about your past psychological problems?

Pete:

Not a chance. If any knowledge of my treatment
were known, I would be removed from my positions.

Dr. G.:

Even though Dr. Margolis feels you are “cured”?

Pete:

It doesn’t matter what Dr. Margolis thinks. The history of psychological problems would be totally destructive to me professionally.

Dr. G.:

How does Ralph respond to your research position?
Is he jealous of you?

Pete:

He really is proud of me. After all, he trained me. In
answer to your question, I don’t feel Ralph is the

C5Chapter 14.pmd

171

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

172

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
least bit jealous of me. Ralph is much more of a family
man and he would never work the kind of hours I do.

As we discussed this part of Ben’s life, I could tell he was
really happy. His workaholic tendencies didn’t seem to bother
Gail, his friends, or his other family members. Ben’s father
was very proud of him, as were Ben’s peers. I, however, was
still not convinced that Ben was as psychologically stable as
Dr. Margolis had assumed.
Ben had a complete life. He loved his work and enjoyed
his family life and his friends when he wasn’t working. His
ambitions were being fulfilled, and Ben was unquestionably
in control of his life.
As I progressed Ben forward to a significant challenge or
difficulty in his life, some interesting patterns were beginning to emerge.
Dr. G.:

What has happened since we last spoke?

Pete:

I don’t know what I’m going to do about Aaron.

Dr. G.:

Aaron, your oldest son?

Pete:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

What about him?

Pete:

He is not doing well at all. He is so bright. There’s
just no excuse for it.

Dr. G.:

What do his teachers say?

Pete:

They say he is just not trying. He is preoccupied with
other things.

Dr. G.:

How do you handle this situation?

Pete:

I tried talking to the boy. He seems to understand me,
but he just doesn’t do anything about it.

Dr. G.:

Have you thought of taking him to a psychologist?

Pete:

I don’t want even to discuss that option.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

172

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

173

A Contaminated Future

As I inquired further into this situation, I seemed to have
struck a nerve. Aaron was named after Ben’s father. Ben wanted
Aaron to excel at everything he did and subconsciously exerted performance pressure on him, which resulted in Aaron’s
rebelling. By not performing well, Aaron could only go up in
his performance. This did not sit well with Ben.
Gail allowed Ben to handle the educational guidance of
the boys. The thought of Aaron needing counseling brought
back the memories of Ben’s treatment with Dr. Margolis. Ben
became somewhat frustrated and angry. He came close to
losing his temper.
Dr. G.:

How did this situation resolve itself?

Pete:

Aaron and I had some long talks. I began to treat
him differently, letting up on some of the standards
I set for him.

Dr. G.:

Did it work?

Pete:

Yes. He began to improve in school and things went
back to normal.

Dr. G.:

Did this cause a strain in your relationship with Gail?

Pete:

At first it did, but later we worked things out.

Dr. G.:

Did this affect your working relationships?

Pete:

Well, I guess it did. It is hard working the hours I do.
Maybe I was a little too sensitive.

Dr. G.:

Could you give me an example?

Pete:

Ralph had to correct some of my calculations and
reports at the plant. I argued with him about it, thinking that he was picking on me.

Dr. G.:

Why would he do that?

Pete:

I thought he was jealous of my position at the research facility. That was dumb. Ralph is my best
friend and only wants the best for me.

Dr. G.:

Did you ever have a temper episode with him?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

173

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

174

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Pete:

No, but I felt close to one at certain times.

Dr. G.:

Have you thought about going back to Dr. Margolis?

Pete:

Not a chance. I can handle myself now. I do not need
therapy.

Ben was still quite sensitive about any mention of therapy.
Even the thought of therapy for Aaron made Ben quite upset. The problem with Aaron did resolve itself nicely without
the involvement of a therapist. It is interesting to note that in
this life Pete is a psychologist, but was very averse toward
therapy in his next lifetime.
Ralph didn’t seem to be concerned with Ben. The incident was a minor one and Ralph was used to the egos of
some of his crew. Nobody suspected Ben was having any
significant problems.
I progressed Ben forward again to a significant event in
dealing with his emotions and his temper.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Ben?

Pete:

I am at home and arguing with Gail.

Dr. G.:

What is this all about?

Pete:

She got into a car accident. It was so stupid. She just
ran out of the house after we had words and didn’t
think clearly about the other vehicles.

Dr. G.:

Was she hurt?

Pete:

No, thank goodness.

Dr. G.:

Did you have a temper episode?

Pete:

Yes, and Gail was shocked. She didn’t really think it
was a serious matter. She just wrote it off to the accident itself.

Dr. G.:

Have you now thought of seeing Dr. Margolis?

Pete:

No, and I don’t want to talk about me going back
into therapy. Is that understood?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

174

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

175

A Contaminated Future

Ben was getting very emotional about his psychological
state. He even threatened me. I was concerned about his explosive nature and after years of calm, the storm began to
rise on the horizon.
I can understand Ben’s concern about his career. However, he was acting irresponsibly in not going back to Dr.
Margolis. His therapy could still be kept confidential, but
Ben wouldn’t hear of it.
For the next year or so, things quieted down. Ben felt
better and he naturally assumed that there would be no further problems. I didn’t assume that at all.
I next progressed Ben to another significant event in his life.
Dr. G.:

What is going on with you, Ben?

Pete:

[Crying] I don’t want to talk about it.

Dr. G.:

What happened?

Pete:

It was such a waste. How could these things happen?

Dr. G.:

What has happened?

Pete:

My father was killed in a plane crash. He was returning from a medical convention.

Dr. G.:

When did you find out about his death?

Pete:

Just a week ago. His funeral was very difficult for me
to attend.

Dr. G.:

And your mother?

Pete:

She is taking it a lot better than me. I don’t know
how she does it.

The death of his father was very difficult for Ben. He took
some time off work and spent some time with his family. This
was a very emotional time for him. Interestingly enough, Ben
did not exhibit temper problems during his grief. He felt emotionally numb, but functional.
After several weeks, he returned to work. It was business
as usual. He worked his long hours, did his job well, and

C5Chapter 14.pmd

175

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

176

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

dealt with life. On the surface, all seemed to be in order.
However, it was clear to me that Ben was repressing his feelings. He was ignoring his inner needs and playing a role.
This was not natural and, considering his past psychological
history, potentially very dangerous.
To the outside world, Ben was fine. His relationship with
Gail improved. He was the old Ben, so it seemed. A year later,
Ben received a very significant promotion.
Dr. G.:

What is your career like now?

Pete:

I have been promoted to chief technician at the research facility.

Dr. G.:

How does that affect your other job?

Pete:

I now spend all of my time at the research facility.
Although I am on call at the power plant, very little
of my time is spent there.

Dr. G.:

Are you now working fewer hours?

Pete:

Somewhat fewer, but I do spend a lot of time at the
research lab.

Dr. G.:

Do you see much of Ralph?

Pete:

Yes, we still socialize. He is quite interested in my work,
and our families do see each other now and then.

Dr. G.:

Ben, tell me about the research facility.

Pete:

What do you want to know?

Dr. G.:

Is this work classified?

Pete:

No. We just research safe and more effective uses of
nuclear power.

Dr. G.:

Is this funded by the government?

Pete:

Yes. We have a tremendous budget and we are the
most highly regarded research facility in the country.

Dr. G.:

Do you worry about being laid off?

Pete:

Absolutely not. It is a very secure position. My only
concerns are related to doing my work to the best of

C5Chapter 14.pmd

176

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

177

A Contaminated Future

my ability. After all, I am the chief technician in my
unit and a lot depends on my capabilities.
Dr. G.:

What does the facility look like?

Pete:

We have a rather large building subdivided into various corridors. Each corridor represents a different
division and all divisions are color-coded.

Dr. G.:

Do these divisions have names?

Pete:

Yes, of course. There is Norad-Alpha and NoradBeta, Gani-Alpha and Gani-Beta, and my unit is
Teres-Alpha.

Dr. G.:

Is there a Teres-Beta?

Pete:

Yes. Didn’t I mention that? I apologize for the
oversight.

Dr. G.:

Do you occasionally make small oversights at work?

Pete:

Now don’t you start that again [getting angry]! I am
competent to do my work and I don’t need to see Dr.
Margolis.

Dr. G.:

I didn’t say anything about Dr. Margolis.

Pete:

I know, but you were going to, weren’t you?

Dr. G.:

Ben, have you had any difficulties at all at work?

Pete:

Sometimes I miss a calculation and my men correct me.

Dr. G.:

Does that get you angry?

Pete:

Not enough that it shows, but, yes, I do get down on
myself.

Dr. G.:

Are you a perfectionist?

Pete:

I don’t think so. I just want everything to be done
correctly.

Dr. G.:

What is the difference?

Pee:

I guess none. I will admit to being a perfectionist.
Does that make me mentally unfit?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

177

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

178

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

It could if it makes you angry enough to let your
emotions rule your behavior unchecked.

Pete:

Well, that doesn’t happen, so I guess I’m okay.

Ben went on to tell me more about his position. He
was in charge of the Teres-Alpha division, which dealt
with researching how to contain nuclear power and more
effectively eliminating nuclear waste products. Ben was indeed a good supervisor. He was young, aggressive, knowledgeable, and totally dedicated. If you could ignore his
emotional problems, he was absolutely perfect for the job. I
couldn’t ignore his psychological profile and my concern was
growing by the minute.
As I progressed Ben forward, he described being in many
different types of activities at the facility. He sat in on board
meetings, participated in planning major projects, correlated
the data from his division, and handled public relations,
among other things. In other words, Ben had a lot of responsibilities. In my opinion he was “biting off more than he could
chew,” considering his emotional state.
I progressed him forward to the most significant event in
this life.
Dr. G.:

What year is this, Ben?

Pete:

2088.

Dr. G.:

What is going on in your life at this time?

Pete:

I’m really excited about my project.

Dr. G.:

What is it exactly?

Pete:

I am working on a way to compartmentalize and quantify the flow of nuclear material from one reactor
site to another.

Dr. G.:

That sounds complicated and dangerous.

Pete:

It is. But it is also exciting.

Dr. G.:

Are all of your men working on this project?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

178

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

179

A Contaminated Future
Pete:

No, just me and Chet. I do most of the calculations.

Dr. G.:

Are you putting in a lot of overtime on this?

Pete:

Yes.

Dr. G.:

Have there been any problems?

Pete:

Just the usual frustrations—nothing major.

Dr. G.:

Does Chet work overtime with you?

Pete:

No, he goes home on time. I stay late by myself.

Dr. G.:

So you work better when you are alone?

Pete:

You know, I never thought about it, but I do. I really
do like it better at night when only a skeleton crew is
around.

Dr. G.:

You mean there aren’t people working there at
night?

Pete:

No, not really. We have the usual security people on
board in the evening, but very few researchers or technicians are around at night.

I then progressed Ben forward to an actual event that
would be meaningful to him. He reported being at the facility late one evening in 2088. He was alone and there were
some problems.
Dr. G.:

What is it, Ben?

Pete:

Something is very wrong here.

Dr. G.:

Exactly what is it that is wrong?

Pete:

The level of nuclear wastes has risen and the diffraction chamber I developed isn’t working.

Dr. G.:

What do you mean, isn’t working?

Pete:

Apparently, my calculations were off and there is an
overflow of the backup of these waste products.

Dr. G.:

Can you handle this emergency?

Pete:

I am sure I can. Wait—it isn’t working. What am I
going to do?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

179

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

180

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Move forward, calmly, to your actions.

Pete:

The dials are going crazy. The danger signal is about
to be reached.

Dr. G.:

Can you call for help?

Pete:

I can handle this. I can do this myself. After all, I am
the chief technician.

Dr. G.:

Go on.

Pete:

It’s no use; the system is backing up.

Dr. G.:

What does that mean?

Pete:

A meltdown could occur. Everything will be contaminated. I can’t let that happen.

Dr. G.:

What do you do?

Pete:

The signal is sounded. The security men will be here
shortly. I can’t let them see what I have done.

Dr. G.:

What will you do?

Pete:

I will isolate myself from them.

Dr. G.:

Is there anybody with you now?

There was silence for a very long two minutes. When
Ben finally responded he described a bizarre set of circumstances. There was a security guard making his rounds in
the Teres-Alpha unit. Ben knocked him unconscious with a
hard metal object. He then went completely out of control.
The frustration of his personal failure got to him. Ben
couldn’t handle the situation. It was his fault that this meltdown and contamination was occurring. He alone had handled
the calculations that resulted in misprogramming the computer. When he calmed down, I continued the questioning.
Dr. G.:

What is happening now, Ben?

Pete:

I am totally isolated. I have sealed off this unit and it
will take hours for them to get in here.

Dr. G.:

What will that solve?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

180

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

181

A Contaminated Future
Pete:

Nothing, but I must be alone.

Dr. G.:

What have you done to correct this situation?

Pete:

I turned all of the power and diffraction switches on
high.

Dr. G.:

Won’t that add to the overload?

Pete:

It sure will. This baby will blow and I’m going with it.

Dr. G.:

Don’t you want this to end a different way?

Pete:

No. Nobody is going to fire me. Nobody is going to
tell me I was wrong.

Dr. G.:

What about the guard and the others?

Pete:

I don’t care. I don’t care.

Ben had a nervous breakdown. He would not listen to reason. Pete, sitting in my recliner, was in no danger. It was Ben
who couldn’t be reasoned with by logic. As a result of Ben’s
actions, there was a complete meltdown of the research facility.
The skeleton crew and Ben were killed. The nuclear contamination from Ben’s miscalculations affected the entire Tulsa area.
The water supply was contaminated. Concomitantly, the food
supplies were then contaminated. Everything was contaminated.
From the superconscious mind level, I spoke to Ben.
Dr. G.:

Ben, what did you learn from this?

Pete:

I learned how to contaminate a major city by my stupidity. I learned nothing but how to hurt innocent
people.

Ben didn’t quite understand another connection from this
future life. He died in August of the year 2088. The eighth
month and the year 2088 were very significant associations
of the number eight. In addition, he worked in the TeresAlpha unit. This spells out as Teresa, the name that haunted
Pete most of his life.
Pete was brought out of trance feeling drained and unsure of what this all meant. I explained to him that this future

C5Chapter 14.pmd

181

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

182

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

life was the real cause of his present contamination compulsion
and the origin of his difficulties with the number eight and the
name Teresa. He understood the connection and complimented
me on my ability to perceive his true underlying psychological
problems when everyone else had been fooled.
However, I wasn’t looking for compliments. I pointed out
that Ben should have continued to see Dr. Margolis, but even
that may not have prevented the blowup. Ben was a powder
keg just waiting to explode. Finally, he did.
Pete was confused. How could this future life help him
now? It was a terrible thing to look forward to. He sure didn’t
want to experience this in 100 years. I agreed with him. Although I did effect some cleansing from the superconscious
mind level, that wouldn’t solve his problem. The answer lay
in the application of the principles of quantum physics.
You will recall that in all of the other future life progressions documented in this book, the results were positive. In
other words, the resulting life represented a culmination of
the patient’s achievements. The patient was programmed for
this frequency and that became their reality.
But that was just one probability of at least five major
probabilities. In Pete’s case, he perceived a negative frequency or probability though he had at least four others from
which to choose. The solution to Pete’s problem was really
quite simple. All I had to do was to have him perceive the
other four choices and then, after he selected the ideal frequency, program this frequency to be his reality. By doing
this I would, in a way, help Pete to switch frequencies so his
future would be quite different than if we did nothing.
I realize that this sounds confusing. You may say, how
can I do this? How can I change the future? What you must
consider is that every time you make a choice you are, in
effect, changing the future. In Pete’s case, progressing him
forward to the other parallel existences, he would have at the
end of the 21st century would accomplish that very goal.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

182

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Contaminated Future

183

Pete progressed nicely to four other lifetimes in that same
time frame. After each life was reviewed, he carefully considered the one he felt was ideal and then I progressed him
to that frequency. Remember, Pete was the one who chose
the ideal frequency. I will never make that choice. The various environmental factors can be quite similar in these parallel
frequencies, as was the case here. However, there will always
be major differences, and each action by Pete in a certain frequency will have a certain effect on the total outcome of his life.
Thus, there is no predestination. The soul always has
free will. What will be somewhat predestined is the basic
framework of the frequency. The specifics can be changed
by varying the choices along the way, but the basic framework can’t be altered. You cannot just choose the best aspects of all five frequencies. You can only choose one
frequency and accept the good with the bad. That is one
reason why I always have the patient make this choice.
The typical pattern of the five frequencies is as follows:
one is very bad, one is below average, one is rather neutral,
one is above average, and one is excellent (not perfect). It is
not difficult for patients to classify their frequencies into the
above categories. It is pretty cut-and-dry.
I won’t bore you with the details of Pete’s other frequencies—
just the one he chose. Remember, the basic environmental
details were similar. His name, family members, and parents’ occupations were identical. It’s Ben himself in this ideal
frequency who exhibited some noticeable differences.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Ben?

Pete:

I’m a senior in college.

Dr. G.:

What is your major?

Pete:

Nuclear physics.

Dr. G.:

With what goal?

Pete:

I want to go to graduate school and become a nuclear
physicist.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

183

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

184

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Do you ever get upset and lose control of your temper?

Pete:

No. What a silly thing that is to ask.

In this frequency, Ben didn’t settle for just being a technician. He went for the brass ring and became a nuclear physicist. In addition, he didn’t exhibit any of the signs of emotional
instability that he did in the previous frequency. Thus, there
were no visits to Dr. Margolis and no temper episodes.
Gail still entered Ben’s life and they got married when
Ben finished graduate school. They were very much in love
and Ben’s parents approved of this relationship. I next progressed Ben to the year 2084.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your work?

Pete:

Well, I am a nuclear physicist at our new research
facility outside of Tulsa.

Dr. G.:

How are things going?

Pete:

Quite well. I have an excellent staff and couldn’t be
happier.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about your staff.

Pete:

My chief technician is someone I have known for a
few years. He is also my best friend.

Dr. G.:

Who is that?

Pete:

Ralph. Ralph Straeger.

So you see, the pattern changed somewhat. Now Ralph
had the position that Ben had occupied in the previous frequency. Ben was a highly competent and emotionally stable
nuclear physicist who was also Ralph’s boss. Ben and Ralph
were still the best of friends. Their families socialized often
and Ben was a very happy man.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your father.

Pete:

Dad is a psychiatrist. We get along real well.

Dr. G.:

Did he ever want you to follow his footsteps and go
to medical school?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

184

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

185

A Contaminated Future
Pete:

He let me decide what I wanted to do with my life.
He was totally supportive.

I next progressed Ben to the year 2088.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your family.

Pete:

You mean my wife and children?

Dr. G.:

Yes.

Pete:

Well, my wife, Gail, is a dream come true. We have two
sons. I don’t know what else you want to know.

Dr. G.:

Do you ever get into big arguments with Gail?

Pete:

Not really. We have minor disagreements like all
couples do, but we never get mad at each other. We
are very much in love.

Dr. G.:

How are your children doing in school?

Pete:

Just fine. Especially the oldest, Aaron. He is so bright,
even I have a difficult time keeping up with him.

Dr. G.:

Does your father spend much time with them?

Pete:

What an odd question to ask. My mother and father
visit us occasionally. You must realize that my dad is
a very busy man. He attends many medical meetings.

This frequency was indeed ideal and different. By August of 2088, things were very different. Ben had no emotional problems. His son Aaron was an excellent student.
His father was alive and well. Ben’s relationship with Ralph
was excellent, and all of the previous frequency’s problems
seem to have been avoided.
I next progressed Ben to the end of 2088.
Dr. G.

Tell me about your work.

Pete:

I have been working on a technique to help divert
nuclear waste safely and to more effectively contain
nuclear waste.

Dr. G.:

How is it going?

C5Chapter 14.pmd

185

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

186

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Pete:

Quite well. Thanks to an excellent staff and my
good friend Ralph, we have successfully tested the
techniques.

Dr. G.:

So, it is a success?

Ralph:

A great success.

Dr. G.:

What is the name of your unit?

Ralph:

Why, it is called Teres-Alpha.

So the pattern was complete. Pete passed the magical
year of 2088 without causing the disaster he had in the previous frequency. He, as Ben, still worked in Teres-Alpha,
but that name didn’t act as a jinx. In fact, you might say it
was a good-luck charm.
This frequency had many other positive aspects to it, but
they are not relevant to Pete’s problem. I ended the trance
and programmed him to this ideal frequency.
Pete made rapid progress after this session. He no longer
feared the number eight or the name Teresa. He understood
what it really meant and why the contamination compulsion
was so deeply ingrained within his psyche.
Pete’s past lives were causative factors. I cannot ignore
them. However, I must put a greater weight on his future
lifetime as Ben Kingsley as the cause of his former problems.
Being the sole cause of the irreversible contamination of an
entire city is far more significant than murdering one man or
living an immoral life.
Also, Pete made much more progress after experiencing
his future life than in perceiving his past lives. There is no
doubt in my mind that the future lifetime of Ben was the
main cause of Pete’s problem.
Pete today is totally recovered. He did this himself with a
little assistance from regression and progression therapy. I
like this case because it illustrates the principle that the future is now. We can change the future, but we must perceive
it first.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

186

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Contaminated Future

187

The new age of Aquarius that we are in gives us the potential for tremendous opportunities. It is a 2160-year astrological era of spiritual harmony that began on February 4,
1962. If you ignore these opportunities, then your life wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t
change much. You will stay on your average or below-average
frequencies. However, if you follow the laws of karma, you
will switch to a much more desirable frequency, which will
not only assure you of a better life in this incarnation, but it
will result in more positive future lifetimes. The choice, as
always, is yours.

C5Chapter 14.pmd

187

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

188

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 15

Past Life Therapy in
the 22nd Century

Kim’s case is one of my favorites because it illustrates so
many of the principles of karma and the space-time continuum.
It is not that unusual for a patient to express interest in exploring a future life. What is fascinating, more often than not,
are the results.
In 1982, a somewhat overweight saleswoman named Kim
called my office with a request to explore her future life. She
hadn’t read the first edition of Past Lives—Future Lives, but
she had heard of it. If there was such a thing as future lives, she
wanted to experience it.
My explanations of the theory behind future life progression, the space-time continuum, and hypnotherapy were met
with enthusiastic interest. Kim didn’t have any background in
this field whatsoever. She had just heard about me and my work.
Kim had never read books on reincarnation or parapsychology,
so she began therapy without a lot of preconceptions.
In late July of 1982, Kim began her trip to a future lifetime. She proved to be an excellent hypnotic patient, exhibiting REM throughout her trance.

188

C6Chapter 15.pmd

188

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

189

Dr. G.:

What do you perceive?

Kim:

I see a young female with dark, shoulder-length hair,
dark eyes, small frame, and approximately 18 years old.

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Kim:

Barbara. Barbara Parkhurst.

Dr. G.:

What are you wearing?

Kim:

Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;m wearing a white jumpsuit with a white shoe-boot.
The clothes are very lightweight. The boot has a special water bubble-like sole for maximum arch support and protection.

Dr. G.:

Are these your daily clothes?

Kim:

These are my work clothes.

Dr. G.:

What kind of work do you do?

Kim:

I work in an underground research facility.

Dr. G.:

What year is it?

Kim:

2119.

Dr. G.:

You stated that you are underground. Is there some
specific reason for this?

Kim:

Yes. We require isolation. We have no contact with
the outside world.

Dr. G.:

What do you do exactly?

Kim:

We are a think tank. Our purpose is to research and
develop new concepts, which are highly technical, for
the ultimate betterment of all humankind.

Dr. G.:

Do you work for the government?

Kim:

No. We have no political or government affiliation. We are an independently funded research
organization.

Dr. G.:

Tell me more about your underground location.

Kim:

Our complexes are all underground and completely
indestructible. Should the entire world see holocaust,

We have no families. We are the result of genetic
engineering. Only genius-level banks are used and
properly matched. We are all dedicated to science.

Dr. G.:

What do you feel your purpose is?

Kim:

Humans, in their natural state, are destroying their
own species gradually. Weâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re working to help humankind alleviate primal emotion. It is humankindâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
only hope of survival. The thrust of our work involves positive emotional responses. We are aware
of human behavioral patterns and select the positive
response enhancement for our research.

Dr. G.:

How many of you are there?

Kim:

There are many researchers in many areas. We are
all specialists. It is quite rare for someone outside of
our group to appear on the screen.

The screen referred to a monitor for communication from
one area to another. On very rare occasions a scientist from
the surface might communicate with this group.
Dr. G.:

What is your specialty, Barbara?

Kim:

My work is with light refraction. I specifically work
with ionization of molecular structure.

Dr. G.:

For what purpose?

Kim:

By altering the molecular structure of certain components of the brain, we hope to permanently remove destructive human qualities.

I next progressed Barbara to the age of 22. She further
described the underground complex as a series of tunnels
(like a maze) ending in laboratories. There were living quarters for the researchers and viewing screens were set up at
strategic locations in the complex. Transportation within the

C6Chapter 15.pmd

190

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

191

complex was provided by small vehicles powered by air cushions. These vehicles did not touch the ground and were nearly
noiseless. One could detect a faint “whooshing” sound when
one of these cars came by. This apparatus had also been developed by one of the research groups in the complex.
Dr. G.:

How do you learn from the others in your group?

Kin:

Learning and analysis are done by programming discs.
There is no “personal” teaching. All of our work is placed
on discs and we have free access to any disc we choose.

Dr. G.:

What about your personal life?

Kim:

There are no male-female relationships as exist
aboveground. We do have feelings of deep-rooted
respect and admiration for one another.

Dr. G.:

Is there someone you respect and admire more than
the others?

Kim:

Howard Pennington. There is a special, almost indescribable, feeling on my part for Howard Pennington.
It is not physical attraction, but one of intense professional worship. I wish to sit at his feet and learn—
a master-disciple relationship in its pure form—this
is a pure love uncluttered by physical attraction. I
wish to spend every free second in his presence.

Dr. G.:

What does Howard work on?

Kim:

Howard Pennington is so advanced that it is very
difficult for us to comprehend his work. He formerly developed a vibrational response technique to
simulate aboveground “family emotional responses.”
He was able to place these on discs for our experiments. He feels my ionization concept may be able to
produce similar effects. I am honored that he would
be so familiar with my work.

Dr. G.:

What else did he work on?

Kim:

Howard has been working on a time biotelemetry
concept.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

191

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

192

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What is that?

Kim:

He is attempting to condense a thousand years of
time into a few hours. This way a subject can benefit from one entire spectrum of human emotions in
a very brief period of time.

Dr. G.:

Do you want to be his assistant?

Kim:

More than anything in the world.

Dr. G.:

Why doesn’t Howard have an assistant now?

Kim:

Because of our response modes.

Dr. G.:

What do you mean?

Kim:

We are all in awe of Howard Pennington and his
work. This affects our response modes. Most of our
response modes fall into a negative range, usually in
the inferiority complex division.

Dr. G.:

Are you qualified to work with Howard?

Kim:

It’s not that simple. My response modes are quite
consistent. My only problem is in the frustration
mode. However, my consistency rates are superior to
all others in the complex. If any of us will be chosen
to work with Howard, it will be me.

During further conversations with Barbara I found out
that she was able to use her own ionization of molecular structure technique on herself to qualify as Howard’s assistant.
She began working with Howard and with her assistance, his
work advanced rapidly.
Dr. G.:

How are things going?

Kim:

Quite well. We have modified some of our initial
approaches to make the outcome more feasible.

Dr. G.:

What do you mean?

Kim:

Howard preferred discs to allowing a subject to actually experience different lifetimes for every emotion known. The time it takes to do this is just a few
hours.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

192

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

193

Dr. G.:

But isn’t the subject confused?

Kim:

Not really. It is not necessary for the subject to remember or even understand the lives. We are only interested in the emotional cleansing and reprogramming.

Well, it looked as if past life regression therapy was alive
and well in the 22nd century. The principles I practice today
are utilized by Howard, with some condensing of time commitments. Barbara and Howard worked very well together.
They perfected this technique and had many successful responses from their subjects.
Dr. G.:

What will happen now?

Kim:

The results are being sent to the surface and will be
used at special treatment centers.

Yes. Howard has consented to utilize his technique
on me. I can’t believe it. Imagine, shortly I will be
made to reexperience my past lives and benefit by
the resulting emotional cleansing.

Dr. G.:

But won’t it be difficult for you to remember them
being that this is a condensation approach?

Kim:

Normally, yes. Because I have been such a help to
Howard, he has made several arrangements to slow
the procedure down so I can remember these lives.

Thus began the past life explanation of a future life researcher
named Barbara Parkhurst. I will attempt to describe the regressions as facilitated by Howard’s discs. This most unusual approach proved very informative and therapeutic to Kim.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

193

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

194

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Barbara regressed back to the early 18th century in
France. She was a teenage servant girl to a French nobleman
named Charles. Her name was Antoinette and the chief servants were Sofie and Josef.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about your life, Antoinette. What do you
enjoy about it?

Kim:

I like being a servant. Charles is kind to all of us. I
also like eating the leftover pastries.

Kim had a sweet tooth and the origin of it was not difficult to elicit. Antoinette was very fond of Charles because he
treated her and the other servants so well.
Dr. G.:

Does Charles ask you to do anything of a special
nature?

Kim:

If you mean does he take me to bed, the answer is yes.
It’s part of my duties. I do not mind. Charles is a kind
man and I am honored that he allows me to please him.

Apparently, Charles treated Antoinette especially well.
She was his favorite and Antoinette fell in love with him. I
progressed Antoinette forward to a significant event.
Dr. G.:

Antoinette, has anything important occurred since
I last spoke to you?

Kim:

Yes [crying].

Dr. G.:

What is it?

Kim:

I’m going to have Charles’s baby. I’m so happy.

Dr. G.:

What about Charles’s wife?

Kim:

No one must know that I’m pregnant. Charles’s wife is
quite frail and all of their attempts at children resulted
in stillborn babies. She must not know of the child.

Dr. G.:

How will you hide this pregnancy?

Kim:

Charles is taking me to his summer house. His wife
never goes there. Tom, the head of the stable, will
look after me. Charles will tell his wife that I was
dismissed.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

194

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

195

So Antoinette moved into the summer house. Tom took
care of her and Charles visited Antoinette about every 10 days.
Dr. G.:

Wasn’t this a bit unusual?

Kim:

Charles took care of everything. It was very lonely,
but Charles arranged for Tom to marry me so the
child wouldn’t be a bastard. Only Sofie, Josef, and
Tom knew about the baby.

Dr. G.:

What else did Charles do?

Kim:

He gave Tom a beautiful horse as well as the servants’ quarters for him to live in. I stayed in the big
house. Charles told Tom never to touch me and he
never did even though I was his wife. Charles could
never marry me. He married for land.

Dr. G.:

How did Charles treat you at the summer house?

Kim:

He treated me as though I were a lady instead of a
servant. He brought me fine clothes, sweets, and exotic foods. He never gave me a wig. He didn’t like
them on ladies. Charles liked real hair.

I progressed Antoinette forward to the birth of the baby.
Dr. G.:

Tell me what has happened.

Kim:

The baby was a boy and we named him David. Charles
brought me a ring with a ruby in it. I felt like I was his
wife. The women who helped me deliver David were
sent away by Tom so that no one would see Charles.
He stayed with me for two days. He never did that
before and I never wanted him to leave us. He always
came to see us when he went hunting, but he always
returned the same day.

Dr. G.:

What about other visitors coming to the summer
house?

Kim:

Charles didn’t bring anyone to the summer house
anymore. He told these friends that his wife was too
sick and all of his socializing was done at the estate.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

195

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

196

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

When David was two years old, Charles’s wife died in
childbirth and their baby died also. Charles decided to remarry to acquire more land.
Dr. G.:

Whom did Charles marry?

Kim:

Charles married a foreigner. She was beautiful and
wealthy. She was also quite ruthless and Charles
seemed a little afraid of her.

Dr. G.:

Didn’t that worry Charles?

Kim:

No. Because she was a woman, she had no real power
as long as Charles was lord.

Dr. G.:

What about you?

Kim:

Charles didn’t really like her. This was strictly a business deal. I was unhappy because I felt jealous, afraid
she might have a son and Charles would leave us and
forget all above David and me.

Dr. G.:

What else did you feel?

Kim:

I felt sorry for his other wife. She was so sickly. I felt
better than her because I’d given Charles a son. I never
feared his first wife. The new woman made me fear
losing Charles. She suspected Charles was seeing another woman, but she expected it to be a lady—not me.

Dr. G.:

What did Charles do about her suspicions?

Kim:

He rejected her because she confronted him and
fought with him. She hurt his pride. A French lord
should never be questioned by a woman.

Dr. G.:

What happened as a result of this?

Kim:

He came to us more often and he loved David more
and more. He brought us more gifts. We never asked
him for anything. Charles kept telling me how much
his wife was frustrating him. I started to feel safe
again. He told us that he would always take care of
us and that his wife would never be able to hurt us.

Dr. G.:

Were you always faithful to Charles?

C6Chapter 15.pmd

196

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

197

Kim:

Yes. I never had any man but Charles and I never
asked for any gift except my little goat, Julia. When
Charles first brought me to the summer house, he
said I could have a gift and because I knew I’d be
lonely, I asked for Julia. I used to play with her at the
estate. She was company for me.

Dr. G.:

Did he bring Julia to you?

Kim:

Yes, he did. I told him Sofie knew which goat was
Julia. He had Tom bring her to me over his horse.
Besides the goat, I never asked for anything. I did
love and appreciate everything Charles brought us.
He couldn’t stay with us much, but he thought he’d
done everything to make us happy and he did all he
could.

Dr. G.:

Didn’t Charles have other lovers?

Kim:

He had a lot of women for bedding. He wasn’t faithful to anyone, but I think he truly loved us. The rich
ones all had a lot of women. Charles wasn’t bad, but I
still wished he could be faithful to me as I was to him.

As time went on, Antoinette became more and more attracted to Charles. She was very much in love with him, even
though she was quite aware of his faults and his lifestyle. I
next progressed Antoinette to the most significant event that
was to occur in her life.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now?

Kim:

Oh, my God! I don’t know what to do. Please help me.

Dr. G.:

What happened?

Kim:

Charles is dead. He had a heart attack and died in
my arms.

After calming her down I tried to follow the next chain of
events carefully. Tom helped Antoinette dispose of Charles’s
body. It could not be found in the house. Tom buried Charles
in the woods.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

197

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

198

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

What is going on?

Kim:

We had to get all of our personal effects out of the
house quickly. I packed everything and ran to the
servants’ house with Tom. I changed into my old
clothes and put all of my fancy clothes and gifts from
Charles in bags. Tom buried these bags in the woods.

Dr. G.:

Please tell me what is happening.

Kim:

Charles’s wife was sending four men to look for
Charles’s kept woman and Tom was afraid they would
kill us.

Dr. G.:

But didn’t you tell me that all wealthy French lords
had many women? Why should she care about you?

Kim:

They had many women, but a kept woman is something else. I represented more of a threat to her. In
addition, she heard rumors about a son by this kept
woman and this made me especially dangerous to her.

Dr. G.:

Does she know about Charles’s death?

Kim:

No, that would be impossible. He just died a few
hours ago.

Dr. G.:

What did Tom do next?

Kim:

He told me that these men were searching all of
Charles’s houses with orders to kill the girl and the
child. Tom made us stay in the servants’ house. He
covered my hands with dirt and messed up my hair.
He dressed little David in old clothes and made him
look dirty, too. He told me I wasn’t to cry for Charles
or show any emotions when the soldiers came.

I next progressed Antoinette to the arrival of the soldiers.
Dr. G.:

What did the soldiers do?

Kim:

The soldiers burst into the big house and searched
it. Then they came to the servants’ house and questioned Tom. David and I were working in the garden
and we could hear Tom telling the soldiers that we

C6Chapter 15.pmd

198

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

199

were his wife and son. He told them a lady came to
the big house to see Charles a long time ago, but
hadn’t come for a long time. He said Charles had
never allowed him to see her and he didn’t know
who she was.
Dr. G.:

What happened next?

Kim:

The soldiers believed Tom and left. They never came
back. We were still afraid and never returned to the
big house. We stayed in Tom’s house and wore ugly
clothes and ate awful food.

Dr. G.:

Did Tom get close to you?

Kim:

Oh, no. He stayed in the stable. He was honorable to
Charles’s wishes. Tom acted like our servant.

Later Charles’s wife took over the estate. She was quite
cruel and ruthless. The soldiers reported their conversation
with Tom to her. She thought Tom was purposely hiding the
true identity of Charles’s kept woman from her. She sent Tom
away on a long journey for special materials for her clothes.
Antoinette never saw Tom again.
Dr. G.:

What did you do?

Kim:

I sold the ruby ring Charles gave me to buy food. We
were cold and had no place to go. David later died.

Dr. G.:

Then what?

Kim:

I buried him next to Charles. I then sat in a corner of
the servants’ house and cried. I never ate again.

Antoinette died of starvation pining away for Charles and
David. In the superconscious level, I was able to find out
that Charles was Kim’s ex-husband. She divorced him because he cheated on her once too often. He was a very materialistic and manipulative man. David came back as Kim’s
son, Jeremy. They are very close.
The important point in this life was Antoinette’s early attraction to sweets. For a servant girl, sweets were a welcome

C6Chapter 15.pmd

199

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

200

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

change to the dull food normally eaten. As Charles’s kept
woman, they represented a special reward and reminded her
of him. The starvation end to that life carried over in Kim’s
constant and losing battle with dieting.
Barbara Parkhurst was very much affected by this life.
Howard Pennington was most pleased with this experience
and the following day he “disced” Barbara back into another one of her past lives.
This lifetime took place in Rome in the early part of the
16th century. Barbara was Paolo, a 19-year-old guard to the
pope. His life seemed without purpose. He did his job well,
but didn’t seem to have any friends; he just seemed to be
existing.
Dr. G.:

Paolo, tell me about your family.

Kim:

I didn’t really know my family. I was raised by the
Church. My mother was a prostitute in Florence and
my father was a nobleman.

Dr. G.:

Does that make you a bastard?

Kim:

Yes. I’m the bastard son of a nobleman and a prostitute. Some combination, huh?

Dr. G.:

Did you ever go back to visit your mother?

Kim:

No. The Church forbade me to ever go back to
Florence.

Dr. G.:

Does that bother you?

Kim:

No. I don’t miss not having real parents; I just do my
job.

I then progressed Paolo forward to a significant time in
his life. He reported being sent on some assignment with a
number of other soldiers. They were sent by the army to kill
the inhabitants of a small village.
Dr. G.:

Why are you sent here?

Kim:

I do not question my orders.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

200

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

201

Dr. G.:

Do you really want to kill these defenseless people?

Kim:

No, I don’t, but if I disobey my orders, I will be killed.

Paolo was the youngest soldier sent to exterminate this
village. He had never killed anyone before and didn’t want
to begin now.
Dr. G.:

Tell me what you did.

Kim:

Well, there weren’t that many people in the village
to begin with. The other soldiers rounded them up
and killed them. I was supposed to kill this woman
and her child.

Dr. G.:

Did you?

Kim:

No.

Dr. G.:

How did you manage that?

Kim:

I put my sword into the body of a man lying dead on
the street. Then I told the woman and the boy to
hide and wait for us to go. I also told her to move to
another village the following day and never to return to this place again.

Dr. G.:

And your sword?

Kim:

The blood on my sword from the dead man’s body
was used to convince my fellow soldiers that I had
carried out my orders.

This plan apparently worked quite well. Paolo returned
to Rome and remained a guard in the Vatican.
Dr. G.:

What has happened since I last spoke to you?

Kim:

I met a beautiful girl named Julianna. We were married and I am very happy.

Dr. G.:

Do you have any children?

Kim:

Yes, we have one son, Antonio.

As the years went by, Paolo finally had a purpose. He
loved Julianna and Antonio. The problem was his attitude

C6Chapter 15.pmd

201

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

202

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

toward his employers. When Antonio expressed interest in
becoming a guard like his father, Paolo told him to find another occupation.
Dr. G.:

Why do you discourage Antonio from following in
your footsteps?

Kim:

These men I guard, they are not holy.

Dr. G.:

Are you referring to the pope?

Kim:

No. The Church noblemen I guard now seem to be
more like politicians. I do not trust them. I do not
think they are real God-fearing men. I do not respect them and I don’t care if they live or die.

Dr. G.:

Isn’t that a big problem, being that you guard them?

Kim:

I do my job, but I don’t like it. The only thing I care
about is Julianna and Antonio. Antonio and I sometimes go to the market. He carries bread and fruit in
a bag. I love him and feel very proud of him. Nothing
else in my life has any meaning.

Later on, Antonio became an apprentice craftsman. Paolo
was proud of his son. He was still a guard and quite frustrated in
his job. I next progressed Paolo to a significant time in his life.
Dr. G.:

What has happened since we last spoke?

Kim:

I am very sad.

Dr. G.:

Why?

Kim:

My wife and son are gone. They both died of a fever.
Here I am, 35 years old, and now life is completely
meaningless.

I asked Paolo about whether he contemplated suicide
and he said no. He did report that he didn’t like working
with the foreign guards in the Vatican. I then progressed Paolo
forward to the end of his life.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Paolo?

Kim:

I’m on guard duty.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

202

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

203

Dr. G.:

Tell me what happens next.

Kim:

I was making my rounds one night and all of a sudden someone jumped me by the edge of the building. He put his sword through me above the stomach
and between my ribs. I started to fall when he pulled
it out, but then I started drifting up and there was no
pain. I felt free and glad to be free. I knew instantly
that I was dead and was pleased to be rid of that life.

It is interesting to observe the complete lack of emotion
exhibited by Paolo. He was, indeed, most happy to be rid of
the life of a burned-out guard in 16th-century Rome.
From the superconscious mind level, Kim (Barbara) reported that Antonio was her current son, Jeremy. She did not
identify Julianna or the village woman and her son whom
she had saved. An interesting sidenote to this is that Kim
attended a Christian seminary and earned a degree in theology. Although she never used this background professionally, she had a strange attraction to formal study of the Bible.
To this day, she keeps away from all forms of formal religion.
I did some checking myself on the events in Rome during the early parts of the 16th century and ascertained some
interesting facts. In 1527, Charles V of France ordered the
sack of Rome. He took Pope Clement prisoner. Swiss guards
along with local guards protected the pope. The Encyclopedia Americana stated that the Swiss guards suffered heavy
losses in 1527. Paolo mentioned being separated from the
foreign guards, but on that fateful day, he was with them.
Another fact of interest in validating the accuracy of this
life was the description of the Vatican by Paolo. Paolo did not
remember a statue of Saint Paul atop the column of Marcus
Aurelius. As it turns out, one of the Popes had the statue of
Marcus Aurelius removed and replaced it with Saint Paul’s
statue in 1589, about 62 years after Paolo’s death. Thus,
Paolo correctly would not have seen Saint Paul’s statue during his lifetime.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

203

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

204

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Barbara Parkhurst returned to the 22nd century a little
confused and a little drained. She and Howard discussed
these two lives in great detail. She was quite anxious to continue with her past life exploration, so the following day was
set aside for her third trip back in time.
Barbara’s next past life took her back more than 1,000
years. She was a Chinese girl named Soon Lin. Soon Lin was
about 14 years old and worked in rice paddies doing some
sort of farming. She was dressed in rough-looking dark clothes
that resembled pajamas. She wore no shoes and she spent
most of the day standing in water.
Soon Lin described her family as large and close. They
were very poor, but proud people. I progressed her to an
important day in her life.
Dr. G.: Where are you now?
Kim:

I’m working in the fields. What’s that?

Dr. G.:

What’s what?

Kim:

Those warriors are coming this way.

Dr. G.:

What warriors?

Kim:

I noticed them before. It is not uncommon to see
warriors ride by the fields. They rarely stop, but today is different.

Dr. G.:

Where are they now?

Kim:

They stopped by the edge of the fields. They are
staring at me and the other girls. I am afraid.

Dr. G.:

What happens next?

Kim:

One of the warriors charges into the water and nearly
tramples one of my sisters. He’s heading toward me.
I am afraid.

The warrior grabbed Soon Lin and pulled her onto his
horse. He brought her out of the fields and stopped his horse
in front of her parents.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

204

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

205

Dr. G.:

What did he do next?

Kim:

He tossed a small pouch at my father and nodded
his head toward me. I guess that meant that he was
paying for me with those coins.

Dr. G.:

What did your father do?

Kim:

He just nodded in agreement and the warrior rode
off with me.

So without a word being said this Chinese warrior bought
Soon Lin. He took her with him and joined his fellow warriors and rode away. Some hours later they stopped to set up
camp. The warrior took Soon Lin’s clothes off and stared at
her body. Apparently, this was to see if she was a virgin. She
passed the test.
Soon Lin was taken to some kind of village. There she
was resold by the warrior to an elderly, obese, and quite ugly
Chinese man. Soon Lin fainted when she realized that she
had been sold to this grotesque man. The next thing she
remembered was waking up in a tent, lying on a bunch of
satin pillows.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Soon Lin?

Kim:

I...I don’t know. I guess it must be this man’s home.
His name is Chu.

Dr. G.:

Where is Chu now?

Kim:

He is in this tent with two other women. They are
older than me and very pretty. Oh—his nails are
disgusting.

Dr. G.:

What do you mean?

Kim:

He has fingernails that go all the way to the ground.
It looks disgusting.

Dr. G.:

What happens next?

Kim:

Chu comes toward me and hits me across the face.
Then he rips my clothes off and rapes me right in

C6Chapter 15.pmd

205

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

206

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
front of the other two women. They laugh as he
physically abuses me and totally ignore my screams.

Dr. G.:

How long does this continue?

Kim:

I don’t know. I fainted again, and when I awoke, I
had bruises and scratches all over my body.

This went on for more than a week. One night Soon Lin
couldn’t take it any longer and ran away.
Dr. G.:

Where did you go?

Kim:

I ran away to a neighboring village and found a kindly
old man who lived with his son. He agreed to let me
stay there and hide away for a while.

Dr. G.:

Did the old man keep his word?

Kim:

Yes, for a few days anyway.

Dr. G.:

Then what?

Kim:

Some soldiers came later and the boy told me to run
away fast. His father had accepted some money from
the soldiers and told them where I was hiding.

Dr. G.:

Did you escape?

Kim:

No, I didn’t have a chance. The soldiers caught me,
hit me, and took me back to Chu.

Dr. G.:

What happened to the old man?

Kim:

They killed his son for trying to help me. Then they
took the money they gave him back. He was brokenhearted, but still alive.

Apparently, Soon Lin was considered Chu’s property. She
was bought and now his. He could do whatever he pleased to
her. When she returned to Chu’s tent, her right leg was broken. She healed very slowly and walked with a decisive limp.
This was done so she couldn’t run away again.
Dr. G.:

What did you do then?

Kim:

I stayed and took care of Chu’s women. I was some
sort of a servant, but still his toy. He physically abused

C6Chapter 15.pmd

206

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

207

me whenever he felt like it. He made fun of my leg
and beat me for sport. I hate him.

This went on for about a year. Soon Lin tried to run away
again. This time she didnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t get very far. She was caught and
her right leg was cut off in front of the other women. She
slowly bled to death.
From the superconscious level, she identified Chu as
her ex-husband and the boy who had tried to save her when
the old man had sold her out to the warrior, as her son, Jeremy. The lesson she was supposed to learn was humility and
submission. She did learn the former, but not the latter.
An interesting aside on this life is that Kim later reported
to me that she hated long fingernails. She had a favorite aunt
who would wear them and she would feel very uncomfortable
until her aunt took them off.
Barbara Parkhurst was getting quite a lot out of these
past lives. She and Howard discussed them in detail after
every session. Howard was beginning to see the benefit of
these slower regressions as compared to the instant regressions he had initially programmed into the discs.
The stage was set for another regression. Howard prepared Barbara for her fourth trip back in time.
This time Barbara had also chosen ancient China. She
was a male named Yun Chang. He was in training to be an
advisor to the emperor. Yun Chang was at some sort of a
monastery, surrounded by beautiful statues, Oriental rugs,
and other fine things.
Dr. G.:

What is it that you study?

Kim:

I study everything. The fine arts, history, philosophy,
meditation. All knowledge is at my disposal.

Dr. G.:

You sound like a man of peace.

Kim:

I am.

Dr. G.:

But is the emperor also a man of peace?

C6Chapter 15.pmd

207

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

208

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Kim:

I do not know much about him. It does not matter. I
will advise him according to my training.

Dr. G.:

Do you train with others?

Kim:

Yes, there are three others. We will all advise the
emperor.

Dr. G.:

Is your training identical to that of the other three
students?

Kim:

No, not quite. We all have our specialties, but we
also have a common goal.

Dr. G.:

And what is that?

Kim:

We will advise our leader so that he may best serve
the common good.

As the years passed, Yun Chang and his three colleagues
graduated and advised the emperor. However, Wu Dee was
not an emperor of peace. He liked war and made it clear to
his advisers that he would not take kindly to being advised
to keep peace when war was a viable option.
Dr. G.:

If Wu Dee wants to declare war all the time, then
why does he need advisors?

Kim:

He doesn’t look for war all the time. There are many
matters of state that require our expertise and we
are consulted.

Dr. G.:

But haven’t you sold out to the system?

Kim:

We have compromised to serve the common good.

So all of Yun Chang’s idealism went down the drain. He
sold out to the system. His advice was governed by fear—
fear for his own life.
I next moved Yun Chang forward to the most crucial time
in his life.
Dr. G.:

What is occurring now?

Kim:

Wu Dee has called us together to sanction a rather
large war.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

208

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

209

Dr. G.:

Does Wu Dee need your sanction?

Kim:

No, but if we do not agree, he will execute us.

Dr. G.:

How did you decide?

Kim:

We took a vote. Two said no and two said yes, including me. I allowed intellect to cloud my judgment and
convinced them that we must all say yes to war.

Dr. G.:

Did they all agree?

Kim:

Yes, and I was honored for my judgment.

Wu Dee accepted their sanctions and declared war. He
was very successful and honored his advisors. Yun Chang
was made chief advisor.
Dr. G.:

What else happened?

Kim:

I was given a special house to live in with servants. I
falsely convinced myself that we were wise to sanction war.

This went on for years. Every time they agreed with Wu
Dee, they were honored and given additional privileges. From
the superconscious level, Yun Chang realized he failed to
accomplish or display any wisdom. Wisdom is not mere intellect, but a combination of intellect, understanding, and
compassion.
Yun Chang’s intellectual judgment was neither wise nor
deserving of honor. He misused his influence over others to
allow a unanimous sanctioning of war. Arrogant pride and
fear perpetuated this rubber stamping of Wu Dee’s ruthless
endeavors.
It is most interesting to note that the Yun Chang life preceded the life of Soon Lin. Perhaps the life of Soon Lin was
both karmic retribution as well as a true lesson in the unlearned humility corridor of Kim’s karmic cycle.
Meanwhile, back in the 22nd century, Barbara Parkhurst
and Howard Pennington began comparing notes of the former’s
past lives. They worked together but nothing romantic

C6Chapter 15.pmd

209

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

210

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

developed. This was a different type of society. Barbara had
reached her pinnacle of success by working with Howard
Pennington.
Howard also benefited by this arrangement. He was able
to see his research as it applied to a distinguished colleague,
not just a subject sent down from the surface. After a period
of further testing, Howard modified his discs to slow down
the process of regressing. It wasn’t as slow as it is today, but
it also wasn’t as condensed as the “90-mile-an-hour” method
he originally conceived.
Barbara learned a lot from Howard. They worked together
for many years in their isolated facility underground. The
past life regressions taught her many lessons. She learned
about her past, her deficiencies, and her challenges. As Barbara, Kim learned what it would be like to work with a man
she held in high esteem, with a higher love.
In spite of Howard’s superior mind, Barbara did not shy
away from the challenge or allow herself to fall into the negative response mode characterized by an inferiority complex.
She rose above this. As a result of the trust and reverence in
which she viewed Howard, Howard only reinforced her commitment to dedicate her life to bettering humankind.
But who was Howard in Barbara’s past? He did not show
up in any of her four past life regressions. Did he suddenly
just materialize in the 22nd century? The answer was no.
Kim informed me from the superconscious mind level of
Howard’s real identity. Many years ago, Kim dated a man
named George. George was a truly kind and beautiful man.
They had been engaged.
But fate would not allow this union. George contracted a
rare form of leukemia and was hospitalized. Kim visited him
every day with tears in her eyes. She prayed every night for
his speedy recovery. Perhaps it was a flashback to Antoinette’s
desire for Charles or Paolo’s yearning for Julianna, but George
just wasted away and slowly died.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

210

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Past Life Therapy in the 22nd Century

211

Kim could not hold back the tears as she described this
to me. “So close and yet so far,” was all she could say. She
never really got over George. Her ex-husband never knew
about her previous lover and fiancé. It was for the best that
she kept George a secret.
The relationship between Kim and her son, Jeremy, was
quite close. Kim could see him as David and the son of the
old Chinese man. This was the only saving grace from her
marriage.
The result of this future life progression was amazing.
Kim lost weight. She dressed better and developed a positive self-image. She made much progress in her career as a
saleswoman, giving up her tendencies to procrastinate.
She described her views as follows: “Love is the key to
everything. This really makes me feel like I’m on the right
track. One aspect of love that I felt for Howard during the
progression was complemented by the love I have for God.”
Kim improved because now she has a true purpose. It
will take 130 years, but she will be with George again. George
will be Howard Pennington. They will complete their mission
together.

C6Chapter 15.pmd

211

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

212

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 16

Time Travelers from Our Future

Is it possible that some day we will eventually master time
travel? My research has uncovered the fact that time travelers
do exist and originate from 1,000 to 3,000 years in our future.
I refer to these futuristic time travelers as chrononauts.
Many have abducted us throughout history and even traced
us back to our past lives. These very same chrononauts have
actually abducted us in several of our previous lifetimes. The
main purpose of these chrononauts is to assist us in our own
spiritual growth. They are us in the future.
Here is a summary of the four different types of time travelers my patients have related to me in hypnosis:
1. The grays. This is the classic “insect” alien with
large black eyes. They stand around 3 to 5 feet
tall with grayish skin, no ear lobes, four fingers
and toes on each hand and foot, and are the
most commonly observed time travelers. Some
of these chrononauts appear as “little whites”
or “little blues.” Neither type has body hair. Some
of these aliens are female.
Other grays have been observed of various heights, some
rather tall and slender. These are usually in charge of the

212

C7Chapter 16.pmd

212

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

213

smaller aliens and often perform examinations on human
abductees. They all wear one-piece uniforms with insignias
that often are triangular in shape.
2. Hybrid time travelers. These are a genetic mixture between humans and beings from other
planets. Their skin ranges from whitish hues to
bronze, and they range from 5 to 6 feet tall. Some
hybrid chrononauts look quite human from a
distance, but resemble aliens upon closer inspection. Many have large faceted eyes and oddlooking foreheads. My patients report seeing
female hybrids.
3. Pure humans. About one quarter of the time,
travelers from our future are entirely human by
genetic makeup. They look like us in every respect. These chrononauts have interbred with
our species throughout time, and this may explain some of our genius protégés in various
fields.
A common trait to these pure human time travelers is
their height. They appear to be between 6 and 7 feet tall,
compared to the 3 to 5 feet of the insect aliens types and 5
to 6 feet hybrids. They are blond, blue-eyed, tanned, clean
shaven and always appear to be dressed in white robes. The
many references in almost all ancient books concerning the
presence of “Giants” lend support to these reports.
There are reports from my patients of these pure humans
working along with aliens and/or hybrids. Whenever this occurred, the pure human time travelers always appear in charge
of their activities.
4. Reptilian time travelers. These beings have vertical pupils and lizard-like skin. The little data I
have about them suggests they are not out for
our best interests. These beings are 100 percent
extraterrestrial, and have nothing to lose by our
lack of spiritual growth. They are never part of a

C7Chapter 16.pmd

213

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

214

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

time traveler team and are commonly fugitives
escaping from certain imprisonment.
They are infrequently reported by abductees as originating from other less-friendly planets in our present century. I
do not argue this point, but they also exist in our future and
travel back in time. These time travelers are most definitely to
be avoided, as they eat humans.
I have no data on time travelers before the 31st century or
beyond the 51st century on our planet. The explanation for
that is an educated guess that we wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t master time travel for
another 1,000 years, and after 3,000 years we will all probably
ascend, so there will be no one left on Earth to travel back in
time. Another possibility is that we simply lose interest in time
travel after the year 5000 A.D.
The time travelers from about 1,000 years in our future
conduct many experiments on us, and have been engaged in
this activity for many thousands of years. Most of their experiments have failed. All of our ancient and advanced civilizations were time traveler experiments. We are their most recent
project.
The chrononauts from 2,000 to 3,000 years in our future
make fewer mistakes. They are poorly represented, and still in
need of spiritual fine tuning. Although much more evolved
than we, they are helping us grow spiritually so their eventual
ascension will be faster.
You might assume that these chrononauts travel back in
time in flying saucers, but only the ones from about 1,000 to
1,500 years in our future do. The others have mastered
teleportation and can â&#x20AC;&#x153;beamâ&#x20AC;? themselves anywhere they want
to instantly.
Those of you who like conspiracy theories will be happy to
know that each group of time travelers is in communication
with our government and exchange scientific data. These
chrononauts are responsible for the quantum leaps in our
technology throughout this century.

C7Chapter 16.pmd

214

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

215

Here is a summary of my patients’ regressions depicting
the actions and motives of time travelers:
These time travelers (chrononauts) function as
our “guardian angels” by placing attackers in
suspended animation states to allow our escape. They can manipulate our physical laws to
assist us in times of need.
These chrononauts follow us from lifetime to
lifetime. They trace our soul back to our previous lives and monitor our spiritual
enfoldment.
The origin of these chrononauts is Earth from
1,000 to 3,000 years in the future.
The past 500 years has seen a significant increase in the quantity of their monitoring and
abductions.
Fertility problems are quite common in these
futuristic grays.
A state of suspended animation can be induced
instantly on anyone they choose.
They have mastered hyperspace travel between
dimensions, and can move through walls and
solid objects.
By existing in the fifth dimension, they can observe us and remain invisible.
They can levitate themselves or us at will. Genetic manipulation of our chromosomes is a routine procedure for them. They have greatly sped
up our rate of evolution.
The less advanced groups make many errors with
experiments, but the more advanced ones manipulate time and space with proficiency.
The ultimate purpose of these time travelers is
to facilitate the perfection of the human soul to

C7Chapter 16.pmd

215

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

216

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
allow for ascension and the end of the karmic
cycle. As we grow spiritually, so do they. They
are us in the future.

The three-dimensional world we normally observe consists of length, width, and depth. Time is added as the fourth
dimension to this paradigm. In reality, time is the fourth
dimension of the space-time continuum. To our concept of
existence, we must now add a fifth dimension of anything
beyond time, such as parallel universes, as well as hyperspace
in general.
The very idea that our species in the future can travel
back in time physically to interact with us seems preposterous to many. This paradigm is based on solid mathematical
models.
The idea that time travel does not violate causality has
been demonstrated by Kip Thorne, the well known Caltech
Astrophysicist.1 The Cambridge University professor and author Stephen Hawking2 also agrees with this hypothesis and
he is considered one of the greatest minds of the last half of
the 20th century.
Kip Thorneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s research theorizes a form of hyperspace
travel through hyperuniverses by these futuristic humans, thus
avoiding the need of time machines per se.
We already defined hyperspace as everything that is beyond our four-dimensional space-time universe. We can
equate hyperspace with the term fifth dimension. Time travelers use some form of hyperspace engineering and enter an
enlarged wormhole to transport themselves back in time
through some type of hyperuniverse to our century. Mathematical models for this paradigm are well established, so let
us discuss this in detail using the subatomic model.
Consider a black hole with a singularity at its center.
Singularities are those areas of space-time where large distortions and possible tears in the fabric of space-time appear.
The very same mechanism that creates black holes produces

C7Chapter 16.pmd

216

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

217

white holes. One difference between the two is that the time
sequence is reversed—black holes send you into the past; white
holes send you into the future.
A wormhole is a connection between white holes and black
holes that is constantly materializing and dematerializing. It
connects every black hole with its white hole counterpart. These
wormholes are time machines that do not violate causality.
We travel in time to the past and the future, when there is a
jump through a singularity in the interior of a rotating black
hole—where all universe layers meet.
When we journey from the present to the future and back
to the present, we are experiencing a time-loop. This could
also be exhibited by traveling from the present to the past and
back to the present, as in the case of chrononauts.
This very same mechanism is used by chrononauts on a
macro universe scale to physically travel back in time to study
us. They use this principle to go forward in time too, as some
of these time travelers from 1,000 years in our future have
indeed communicated with chrononauts from 2,000 and 3,000
years in the future!

Taatos, the First Time Traveler
Time travel will be discovered in approximately the year
3050 by a man named Taatos. He is the Hermes of ancient Egypt,
and the very first chrononaut (time traveler).
Taatos was a brilliant scientist, artist, writer, and archeologist and had many other talents. Prior to his actually
traveling back in time, holographic images were sent into
the past. This is why the ancient Egyptians, Greeks, Romans, and so on, described “visions” by their oracles, soothsayers, and psychics.
Objects were transported back in time after the technology was perfected. Finally, humans made trips to centuries
past by way of saucer-shaped crafts through the black holewormhole-white hole paradigm I discussed earlier.

C7Chapter 16.pmd

217

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

218

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Taatos was the first human time traveler. Following his
success, four other chrononauts were selected to function
as a team on this craft. Their names were Geb, Isis, Osiris,
and Horus. You may recognize these names from Egyptian
theology.
Although scholars are aware of the names Taatos and
Hermes (the Greek name for Taatos or Thoth), they consider
him a legend only. Taatos did function as pharaoh in Egypt
several times from about 9000 B.C. to 5500 B.C.
During one of Taatosâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; many trips back to ancient Egypt,
he appeared as Imhotep, the Grand Vizier and High Priest
to pharaoh Zoser. Imhotep (Taatos) was a renowned architect who designed and built the funeral complex and Step
Pyramid at Saqqara. He was also a talented physician and
later the Greeks called him Aesclepius, the god of Medicine.
After advising George Washington to visit West Point in
1780, Taatos was directly responsible for the future first President of the United States discovering that General Benedict
Arnold was about to turn over West Point to the British. This
could have cost the colonists the American Revolution. Taatos
guided Washington through his eight years as President and
then ascended.
Whenever time travelers reach their level of perfection,
they most often choose to ascend. Such was the case with
Osiris and Geb at about 6000 B.C. Horus ascended before the
First Dynasty. Isis stayed around until about 400 A.D., then
also ascended.
What is interesting to note about time travelers is that
they are not only influential in our technological development, but they are responsible for naming all of our cities,
countries, and continents. I quite realize that what I am reporting is extreme, but consider what it means.
Our traditional paradigm of the past preceding the
present, which comes before the future, is incorrect. The future, especially with the advent of time travel, can influence
the past and present so that we never really know when

C7Chapter 16.pmd

218

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

219

something originated. This does suggest a violation of causality, but Kip Thorne’s research and mathematical models demonstrate clearly that it does not.

Traksa, a Teleporting Time Traveler
By utilizing my own self-hypnosis tapes, I was able to
communicate with several time travelers. The first time traveler I met in hyperspace (the fifth dimension) was a pure
human calling himself Traksa. He lives in the 36th century
on Earth when time travel is manifested by way of
teleportation. This means that Traksa can beam his physical
body back to our century without requiring a spacecraft. He
is pictured on my Website.
Most of the initial contacts we make with a futuristic
time traveler take place during our dream (REM) cycle. At
that time, we actually leave our physical bodies and enter
hyperspace gaining the ability to communicate with fifthdimensional people, including chrononauts.
Traksa works with several people in our present time, myself included. For more than 20 years, he has guided me during my dream levels to get the message out regarding time
travel and spiritual growth.
Many chrononauts used cryptograms of their names
representing their current mission. This name will often
change as the mission changes. For example, one of Traksa’s
assignments consisted of introducing me to Art Bell. Art
was the original host of Premier Radio Networks Shows
Coast to Coast AM and a Sunday evening talk show known
as Dreamland. The listeners exceeded 20 million and the
topics covered dealt with metaphysics, especially UFOs, and
conspiracy topics. If you spell Traksa’s name backwards it
reads “ASK ART!”
The mechanism of time travel by teleportation is apparently rather complex. What I have discovered from
Traksa and other teleporters is that they use a type of fifth

C7Chapter 16.pmd

219

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

220

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

dimensional computer chip to determine precisely where to
travel back or forward to in time. They carry a small cameralike device that connects them to a rather advanced master
computer. This is roughly similar to our computer-controlled
jet airliners today.

Time Traveling Case Histories
I would like to comment on time travelers’ interactions
with us that result in abductions. This is not like the brutal
anal probing you hear about involving present-day grays. Time
traveler abductions aboard a craft or military installation (yes,
our government works with chrononauts) mostly involves
sperm and egg samples for infertile futuristic grays to create
hybrids, and spiritual growth enhancement of the abductee.
Always remember that time travelers have a self interest in our
growth. They are us in the future and their world is greatly
affected by what we do today.
One last point to bring out is that Traksa and other time
travelers have informed both my patients and me that they are
around today, but spend most of their time in the fifth dimension so we cannot see them. They do not make their true identity known to us, but do work with many of the governments
around the world.
Here are two incidences of time traveler contacts that my
readers were kind enough to share with me:

I too have been visited by a “Time Traveler.” It occurred
about 13 years ago. At precisely 3 a.m., I was alone in the
house and awakened by an electrical feeling, a zap on the
nape of my neck. There in the bedroom doorway was a figure
dressed in a white robe standing more than 6 1/2 feet tall.
His hands and face were covered with his apparel. I tried to
communicate telepathically, but I was too scared to be receptive. I then said, “What do you want?” To that, he shook
his head as if to say nothing and sparkled into nothingness—
as if he were beamed up. I stayed awake the remainder of

C7Chapter 16.pmd

220

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

221

the night to know I was dreaming. Yes, this experience inspired me to evolve spiritually.
and
Your story of time travelers struck a cord with me and I
would like to share my experience with my fellow time travelers. I am not a very successful out-of-body traveler, but I
recalled a very profound event that started as a dream.
I came upon a mountain that was conical in shape and
varying shades of grey. There were trails that switched back
on this mountain and people traveling them on their way to
the top. The trails were very muddy and these people slogged
through them with great difficulty. Their clothes were dripping with mud and they were very weary and troubled.
At the side of the mountain, I saw a trail and as I approached,
I saw that it went straight up to the top of the mountain. As I
got closer, the trail turned golden and began to glow as I
stepped upon it. I turned and looked up the mountain and
saw two beautifully robed people with golden hair. One was a
man who sat on an ornate chair and peered over the landscape holding a staff. I knew that he was a very tall man and
if he were to stand he would have been 7 or 8 feet tall. Next
to him stood a beautiful woman dressed in white robes motioning me to come up the path to them.
As I took a few steps, I began to float and literally flew up
the trail. As I approached them, she pointed toward the sky,
indicating I was to continue past them upwards. When I did,
I popped into another dimension. It was as real as the one I
am in now. I floated over a landscape and a beautiful colored
horizon of salmon and turquoise colors. I could feel the wind
on my skin and hear it in my ears.
I was so delighted that I began to think how I wanted to
share this with my husband. As soon as the thought started
to form in my mind, I heard and felt a great sucking sensation and was pulled out of this reality, back to that dream

C7Chapter 16.pmd

221

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

222

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

state, down the mountain and into what appeared a waiting
room with large windows and hard wooden pew like benches
against the walls. I could see out to what looked like a loading
dock at a train station and the mountain beyond. I just thought
I’d share this with you and do hope someday I will encounter
those two tall, beautiful beings again. The first time is an experience I’ll never forget.

A Teleporting Time Traveler Saves Two Lives
Two nine-year-old classmates were walking home from
school in Texas when suddenly an older teenager around 18
ran up to them and pushed both of them aside. This teenager
was wearing a light blue tennis outfit and just as she pushed
both of these girls (Brenda and Amy) aside, a car driven by a
drunken teenager jumped the curb and would have killed
these girls by hitting them head on. As Brenda and Amy turned
to thank this teenage girl, the older girl disappeared.
Ten years later, I worked with Amy who related this story.
What brought this to her attention was that she remained
friends with Brenda and they recently decided to play tennis.
Amy picked up Brenda at her parent’s home and saw Brenda
in the exact same blue tennis outfit worn by the teenager who
saved both of their lives 10 years earlier. Brenda told Amy that
she blacked out for a short time earlier that day and had a
dream that she saved the lives of two younger girls.
Amy now realized that it was the 19-year-old Brenda that
saved them. Brenda had entered into a tear in the fabric of
space-time and traveled back in time 10 years to save herself
and Amy from the drunken teenager in the car.

A Conversation with a Time Traveler
Nineteen-year-old Sherry reported several missing time
episodes in her life. The most significant one I explored
through hypnotic age regression took place just three weeks
prior to her session with me.

C7Chapter 16.pmd

222

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

223

Sherry described being abducted from her bedroom by
two grey extraterrestrials who simply appeared from nowhere.
These dimensional travelers took her to a spaceship and placed
her in a type of conference room.
A 7-foot-tall, blond-haired, blue-eyed man dressed in a
white robe began showing Sherry holograms depicting several
of her past lives in which she was again abducted by this same
team of time travelers.
All communication was by telepathy and the tall blond
man informed Sherry that he and his team originated from
the 32nd century. The purpose of this abduction, as well as the
ones in her prior lives, was to stimulate her spiritual growth.
Following that abduction, Sherry stopped smoking, achieved
better grades in school, and made improvements in most aspects of her life.

A Time Traveler Meets Her Younger Self
In 1996, a 72-year-old woman came to my Los Angeles
office for past life regression hypnotherapy and reported a
most unusual incident that took place a few months earlier.
This patient, whom I shall refer to as Eva, always wears a yellow scarf and has since her teenage years.
Eva is a slender woman now, but had a weight problem until
she was about 50. A few months ago, she went to a local mall in
her home town to do some clothes shopping and wore her customary yellow scarf. Eva has always lived in the same city. She
went to her favorite department store and saw a woman who
looked exactly as she would have 30 years ago!
This young woman in her 40s was overweight and wore a dark
brown miniskirt, along with a yellow scarf and light green blouse.
There was a blue ink stain on the back of this skirt. Eva recalled
that she had such a skirt and it was her favorite. The only problem
with it was that it had a blue ink stain on the back of it!
Eva approached this woman and stood right in front of
her. She got a good look at her and clearly identified this
person as herself as she looked 30 years ago. As she was about

C7Chapter 16.pmd

223

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

224

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

to speak to this individual, the younger Eva appeared to fade
away and disappear. This was witnessed by another woman
who immediately ran out of the store.
Eva hadn’t thought of that brown miniskirt in many years.
She doesn’t have any pictures of herself at that age, but her
family does. After researching family photo albums, Eva finally found a picture of herself in her early 40s wearing a yellow scarf, the brown miniskirt, and the exact same light green
blouse she saw on her younger self in the mall.
My explanation of this event is that Eva somehow teleported
herself at age 42 from 1966 to 1996. I suspect they could have
talked to each other, but the universe had other plans. The young
Eva teleported back to 1966 in the same way she arrived.
I asked Eva if she ever recalled such an incident 30 years
ago. She stated that one afternoon she did “black out” for an
hour or so, but all medical tests were negative. There never
was another similar occurrence.
For an hour in 1966, Eva became a time traveler who traveled ahead 30 years and returned to her point of origin. Perhaps she entered a tear in the fabric of space-time.

The Time Traveler Exchange Program
Has a family member, neighbor, friend, or colleague been
acting strange lately? They may very well be a time traveler
from the future who has changed places with the person you
have known for years.
Many time travelers from the years 3050 to 5000 A.D. have
come back in time to interact with us. Through a discipline
known as Quantum Medicine, these time travelers can regenerate lost limbs and resuscitate the dead (if they are treated
within 24 hours of physical death) by tapping into what we call
intergalactic lines—energy fields in our universe that originate from the God-energy complex.
These intergalactic lines represent creative energy and
allow a chrononaut to shape shift or morph their physical

C7Chapter 16.pmd

224

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Time Travelers From Our Future

225

appearance to duplicate that of a 21st-century individual. This
also includes the current century individual’s fingerprints,
DNA, and complete memory.
You would not be able to prove that this time traveler is
anyone but the person he or she says they are. The only thing
these futuristic people cannot perfectly duplicate is behavior
and mannerisms unique to that person. This is why someone
you know may be acting “odd.”
All chrononauts adhere to what are known as Timeliner
International Security Codes (TISC), which forbid
chrononauts from revealing either their true identity or advanced technology to the residents of the century in which
they currently are visiting.

C7Chapter 16.pmd

225

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

226

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Chapter 17

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

Before I begin to describe a future life of one of my patients as a time traveler, a comment on the government’s attitude toward UFOs and ETs is in order. We are all too familiar
with various governments’ dismissive comments and denials
regarding UFOs and the existence of ETs.
One surprising law that was passed in the United States
and adopted on July 16, 1969 concerned contact with ETs.
Title 14, Section 1211 of the Code of Federal Regulations
states that any U.S. citizens making contact with ETs or their
vehicles is guilty of a crime. Such a person automatically becomes a wanted criminal to be jailed for one year and fined
$5,000. A NASA administrator is empowered to determine
with or without a hearing that a person or object has been
“extraterrestrially exposed” and impose an indeterminate
quarantine under armed guard, which could not be broken
even by court order.
Whatever happened to the U.S. Constitution? This ridiculous and Fascist law was repealed on April 26, 1991, after
being on the books for 22 years! By itself, this piece of federal
legislation does not demonstrate the existence of UFOs or
ETs, but it is a rather interesting expression for an entity that
maintains ETs do not exist. They don’t exist, but if you touch
one, you are a criminal!

226

C8Chapter 17.pmd

226

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

227

Jon came to my office in 1996 to explore his past lives. He
had no interest in future lives and was surprised when my instructions to explore a life that would provide insight to his
karmic purpose led him to the 35th century!
He had seen my CBS television movie The Search for Grace
a few years earlier, which depicted a documented case of reincarnation (see Chapter 4) and wanted to learn more about his
past lives. The first hypnotic time travel session with Jon resulted in a totally unexpected future life as a chrononaut.
Dr. G.:

Where do you find yourself at this time?

Jon:

In Muvia at the training center.

Dr. G.:

What year is it?

Jon:

3478.

Dr. G.:

What type of training center is this?

Jon:

It’s where I am being educated for my career.

Dr. G.:

And what career is that?

Jon:

I am training to be a time traveler.

From both my and my patients’ communication with
chrononauts, I learned that Muvia is actually the ancient continent of Lemuria or Mu located in the Pacific Ocean that sunk
approximately 11000 B.C., but surfaced some time during the
28th century. By the year 3050 it was the seat of time travel
research and Taatos’s work on discovering how to send first
images, then objects, and finally humans back through time.
Initially, time travel consisted of enlarging wormholes
lined with exotic matter (possessing negative mass and moves
forward in time—the complete opposite of anti-matter) and
sending chrononauts and their flying saucer crafts back in
time through hyperspace.
By the early 35th century, time travel shifts from enlarging black holes, which result in tears in the fabric of spacetime, to teleportation. Teleportation has no effect on the
space-time continuum.

C8Chapter 17.pmd

227

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

228

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

By the 25th century, teleportation is actually utilized for
transportation, but not time travel. By then, most homes are
equipped with teleportation units that permit people to travel
locally instantaneously. It required an additional 1,000 years
before this method could be applied to time travel itself.
The Muvian training center can be compared to NASAâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
Lyndon B. Johnson Space Center in Houston, Texas. The
chrononaut candidates were selected through a highly competitive process that evaluated their education, training, experience, and unique qualifications.
All chrononaut applicants must have earned a doctorate in
hyperspace physics to be eligible for admission. The training they
receive during their four years at the academy consists of three
main components. The first deals with advanced physics, quantum medicine, and history/archeology. They must know a great
deal about the historical period they work in for obvious reasons.
Physical conditioning is the second phase, and is much less
rigorous than that required prior to the discovery of teleportation
for time travel. The body is not subjected to any unusual forces
when teleportation is utilized, whereas much stress was experienced when enlarging black holes was the mechanism for time
travel. This could be the equivalent of the G (gravity) force of
modern day astronauts. Chrononauts will be trained to be resourceful and still must be in good physical shape.
The most important phase of chrononaut training is their
spiritual growth component. Because the main purpose of a
chrononaut is to assist us in our spiritual growth, they must
practice what they preach. Chakra balancing, self-hypnosis,
and other methods are used to achieve this.
Training is also given in human and ET psychology, and
in adherence to timeline laws. For example, a chrononaut is
trained to avoid major interference in a societyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s angst whenever possible. These time travelers attempt to guide and stimulate humans to grow intellectually and spiritually. They will
not simply manipulate our actions.

C8Chapter 17.pmd

228

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

229

Dr. G.:

What is your name?

Jon:

Kamar.

Dr. G.:

How old are you?

Jon:

26.

Dr. G.:

How did you get interested in time travel?

Jon:

Other members of my family expressed interest in
this field, but none of them could qualify. I used to
fly with my father.

Even though teleportation units were utilized in the future
for travel, it was confined to local trips. Large air ships piloted
by thought are used to transport large groups of people for long
distances. Kamar’s father was a pilot for one of these ships.
Dr. G.:

Kamar, it’s a far cry from piloting a ship to time travel.
What sparked your interest?

Jon:

As I mentioned, for as long as I can remember, my
family tried to get into the Muvian program. But a
strange incident seemed to focus my attention on
time travel.

Dr. G.:

What was that?

Jon:

I went shopping one afternoon when I was in high
school and a show on GCN peaked my interest.

Dr. G.:

What is GCN?

Jon:

GCN stands for Global Communications Network
and its host, Tzaxa, did a program on time travel. He
interviewed three time travelers and their stories simply fascinated me.

A detailed discussion followed during which I discovered
that Kamar went to the equivalent of a shopping mall. The GCN
show was a type of radio show produced live in the mall with a
hologram of Tzaxa projected through the shopping center.
Tzaxa’s show is heard worldwide and is very popular. He
wears a one-piece gold jumpsuit and is very animated—a

C8Chapter 17.pmd

229

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

230

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

true futuristic showman. The interview Kamar described presented a life of danger, adventure, education, and spirituality. This interested Kamar and he now dedicated himself to
becoming a chrononaut (the equivalent of todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s astronaut).
Dr. G.: How many people are on the planet at this time?
Jon:

About a billion.

I should explain at this time that the reason for this small
population, as contrasted with six billion people today, is not
due to wars, disease, or comets crashing into our planet. It is
due to the tendency of people to have small families. Futuristic humans no longer suffer from poverty or lack of education. They do not have large families for religious or other
reasons. They emphasize quality of live versus quantity.
Dr. G.:

Have you gone back in time yet?

Jon:

Just a month or so as part of my training.

Dr. G.:

Tell me how it felt?

Jon:

The first time I teleported, it was the strangest
experience.

Dr. G.:

How so?

Jon:

The entire trip was characterized by a strange feeling throughout my body. It was as though something
twisted my body.

Dr. G.:

What else did you experience?

Jon:

It felt almost like I was caught in a giant web. Suddenly, the world exploded into countless pieces of
glowing threads. They stretched away in all directions, and they intersected everything, including me.

Dr. G.:

Go on.

Jon:

I could now perceive that the strange, twisting sensation that I was experiencing was correlated with
the motion of these threads. And they were in constant motion. I could feel the world. I could see the
room around me, superimposed within the pattern

C8Chapter 17.pmd

230

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

231

of these threads. I was also aware of things beyond
the room. In fact, it seemed like I was aware of everything, although not in any detail. It’s somewhat difficult to explain. The overall effect was very similar
to looking at a hologram, except it was visceral as
well as visual—you could see/feel the image, but you
could also see/feel the interference pattern. The difference was that the “interference pattern” was not
flat, but extended in all directions.
Dr. G.:

Anything else?

Jon:

Part of me was totally confused, and another part of
me was completely familiar with whatever this was.
There was a very odd sense of my consciousness being
split. What I mean by that is that two contradictory
thoughts were present in my mind simultaneously.

Dr. G.:

How long did these effects last?

Jon:

They disappeared almost immediately upon my arrival at both locations (one month ago and Kamar’s
return to his starting point).

Dr. G.:

Did these symptoms repeat upon further teleportation
trials?

Jon:

They became less and less. Eventually, I became so
accustomed to the experience that they nearly
disappeared.

Dr. G.:

Was your response unusual?

Jon:

Not really. I related my experiences to the base doctors and was informed that they were well within
normal range.

I then directed my questioning to the Muvia base and
asked Jon to describe where he lived.
Dr. G.:

Tell me about Muvia and its buildings.

Jon:

Most of the base consists of mushroom-like structures several hundred feet high. There are no other

There are antigravity orbs patrolling the base and
monitoring activity. Trackers are always present.

Further discussion revealed that these orbs were spherical
devices that functioned like a satellite. Trackers were security
personnel who patrolled the base in antigravity hover bikes.
Dr. G.:

Kamar, tell me about your personal residence.

Jon:

My home is small, but comfortable. The land is dominated by beautiful gardens. The house is positioned
in such a way as to accent the garden.

Further questioning revealed that the walls of all homes in
the 35th century consisted of a uniformed surface with the
windows blended into the walls so that the smooth surface was
maintained. A single color characterized the interior of Kamarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
home. The interior was plain and rather conservative.
Dr. G.:

Kamar, how do you prepare your meals?

Jon:

I use the food simulator.

Dr. G.:

What is that?

Jon:

This device creates most any meal you desire from
your thoughts alone.

Dr. G.:

What do you do for relaxation?

Jon:

I use the holographic relaxation center.

The holographic relaxation center is equivalent to the
holodeck portrayed in the Star Trek television series. Because each home was small in size, virtual reality techniques
made them appear larger. Devices also existed to shrink items
for storage and later enlarge them to their original size.

C8Chapter 17.pmd

232

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

233

I next progressed Kamar to his first mission back in time
as a full-fledge time traveler.
Dr. G.:

Can you tell me about your first mission?

Jon:

It took place in Sumeria1 at about 3000 B.C.

Dr. G.:

How many were in your team?

Jon:

There were four of us and I was the youngest.

Dr. G.:

What were your instructions?

Jon:

I was being trained in the art of communicating with
these primitive men during their dream state.

Dr. G.:

How does that work?

Jon:

I travel through hyperuniverses in the fifth dimension
by way of teleportation. While in this hyperuniverse, I
was being trained to implant dreams into selected
Sumerians to facilitate their development of writing.

Dr. G.:

How did your work progress?

Jon:

Very well. We traveled to several time eras from approximately 3400 B.C. to about 3000 B.C. to supervise
the evolution of pictographs to cuneiform.

Prior to the development of writing, a picture-writing system existed. This picture-writing was essentially a drawing of
objects and actions accompanied by strokes and dots to represent days and distances (quantitative concepts).
We can see examples today on a menu in which a picture of a man standing might indicate a buffet, or a hotel
rating in a travel guide would be followed by four or five stars
to indicate its quality.
Between approximately 3500 B.C. and 3000 B.C., Sumerian
picture-writing on clay with small styles made it difficult to
make curved marks. Picture-writing was replaced by wedgeshaped marks known as cuneiform. The Sumerian language
was well adapted to this type of writing. It was a language of
vast polysyllables and many of the syllables taken separately
were the names of concrete things.

C8Chapter 17.pmd

233

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

234

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Another advantage of this cuneiform development was
that once the clay tablets hardened they were nearly indestructible, and many have survived today. The cuneiform
depictions are far more standardized and recognizable as
compared to the pictographs. Cuneiform writing spread
throughout the Middle East, and by 100 B.C., it was replaced
by the North Semitic script used in the Aramaic language.
Kamarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s first mission involved the development of writing. This was an honor, and he must have earned this privilege through his training at the Muvian academy. By far the
most important thing taking place during this time of manâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
social development was the invention of writing and its
gradual progress to importance in human affairs.
I next questioned Kamar about his progress as a time traveler. He described many missions, all increasing in complexity during the next 100 years of his life. It must be mentioned
that 35th century humans live for hundreds of years. This is
mostly due to a device known as an alpha syncolarium. Think
of an isolation tank that emits energy signals accompanied by
sounds through our body. The result is a stimulation of our
gonads and adrenal glands to produce more DHEA (the intermediate phase of the sex hormones estrogen in women and
testosterone in men). DHEA fosters the production and action
of T-lymphocytes in our immune system and wards off any
type of viral disease, thereby lengthening our life span.
I next progressed Kamar to his most significant mission
as a chrononaut.
Dr. G.:

Where are you now, Kamar?

Jon:

On Mu.2

Dr. G.:

You mean back on the base?

Jon:

No. I mean the ancient continent of Mu before it
submerged.

Dr. G.:

Approximately what year is this?

C8Chapter 17.pmd

234

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

235

Jon:

Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s about 101000 B.C.

Dr. G.:

What is your mission?

Jon:

I was sent back here with three of my colleagues to
assist our species in fending off the Electric Wars.

The Electric Wars is a generic name applied to battles
between various ET groups and us for control of our planet.
These wars occurred at various times in prehistory and up to
about 1500 B.C. Two main ET groups dominated our planet
100,000 years ago.
One group called Lyrans were selfish, power hungry,
dogmatic, and authoritarian. Their goal was to enslave us.
Sirians comprised the other group and functioned as our protectors. Unfortunately, the Lyrans came to Earth before the
Sirians, so the Sirians had to play catch up and were often
outnumbered by the Lyrans.
Mu was a civilization that the Sirians influenced and therefore became very spiritual. Muâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s main colony in the Atlantic was
Atlantis and it was influenced by the Lyrans. By 100000 B.C.,
Atlantis declared war (Electric Wars) on Mu, and advanced
ET technology appeared in both cultures.
This turf war in Mu and Atlantis, known as the Electric
Wars, lasted nearly 50 years. Whenever light flashes and
pulsations were observed, it indicated an interdimensional
interface had taken place. Many of these ETs, and the eventual peacemakers we will soon meet, traveled
interdimensionally, as did our time travelers. Interestingly,
other time travelers have informed me that when we observe
lightning, thunder, and magnetic variations today, we are witnessing the residual effect of action taking place within other
dimensions.
An interdimensional time portal existed, allowing other
beings (human and ET) from different dimensions, or our
past and present, to enter our world and interact with us.
They may even originate from a parallel universe!

C8Chapter 17.pmd

235

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

236

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

Dr. G.:

Kamar, move to an event that will be significant on
this mission.

Jon;

I am speaking to my supervisor about the wars.

Dr. G.:

Who is your supervisor?

Jon:

His name is Muat.

Many chrononauts assume a name when they travel back
in time that represents their mission. Muat stands for Mu
and Atlantis.
Dr. G.:

What does he tell you?

Jon:

Muat is very concerned for my life. These Electric Wars
are dangerous and he has lost men before.

Dr. G.:

Can you give me an example?

Jon:

Yes, he once mentioned Etwar, who was killed prior
to my arrival.

Etwar was Traksa’s first life as a time traveler. He originated from the 32nd century in that life and adopted the
name Etwar (ET War) while he worked with Muat in Muvia.
Traksa’s second incarnation as a time traveler was during the
34th century where he assumed the name Lyrat (which stands
for Lyran and Atlantis) and functioned during the Atlantis
war with ETs in approximately 35000 B.C. He was killed in
both lives. Traksa’s third life as a chrononaut in the 36th
century is his most successful.
Muat obviously does not like losing any of his agents.
He assumed a protective role over Kamar, but still allowed
the latter to do his job.
Dr. G.:

Tell me more about the ET problem at this time.

Jon:

The problem is far more complex than mere technology and weapons. We chrononauts have many
devices that can counteract anything the Lyrans
present.

Dr. G.:

So Kamar, what is the most significant issue?

C8Chapter 17.pmd

236

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

237

Jon:

The Lyrans have propagated genetic manipulation
of humankind and this makes it difficult to deal with
local population.

Dr. G.:

Can you tell me more about this ET form of genetic
manipulation?

Jon:

It is referred to as impulse codes and manifests as a
three-dimensional distortion of reality to unsuspecting humans. Even without their conscious awareness
or permission, this technique is coded into the memory
so that past experiences can be wiped out and brainwashing scenarios substituted.

Dr. G.:

So this is beyond mere suggestion or hallucinations.

Jon:

Yes. Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s an actual alteration of the DNA and neurological system of the individual.

Dr. G.:

Is there anything your group can do to neutralize
this effect?

Jon:

Yes. We have techniques to do just that, but they take
time and we simply cannot work with every one of the
millions of inhabitants of Earth to do so.

Dr. G.:

So what is the solution?

Jon:

Fortunately, our group works with dimensional traveling ETs who possess more efficient methods to
deal with this issue.

Dr. G.:

Can you tell me more about these ETs?

Jon:

Certainly. One group is known as Aethien and they
resemble praying mantis insects. They are white to
gold in color and are about two feet tall.

Dr. G.:

Are they related to the Zetas (the classic grey ET)?

Jon:

No. They are emissaries of peace and work along
with the Ranthia.

Dr. G.:

Tell me about the Ranthia.

Jon:

The Ranthia are dimensional travelers and peace
ambassadors that are not fully matter based. They

C8Chapter 17.pmd

237

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

238

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
often appear as a ghost, but possess the ability to
manifest as a human, animal, or solid object. These
shapeshifters also have the ability to appear as a
hologram.

Dr. G.:

They sound interesting.

Jon:

Oh, they are more than interesting. Because of their
ethereal makeup, they can undo what the Lyrans
perpetuated on these humans and reverse the impulse code procedure on a massive basis.

Dr. G.:

Are these Ranthia also peace emissaries?

Jon:

Yes. They are strange to look at, but they are most
helpful when negotiations of peace become the issue.

Dr. G.:

What is the status of the Electric Wars now?

Jon:

The wars are at a high point and my group must assist the Sirians in their defense. We cannot utilize
the counsel of the Aethien and Ranthia until the
fighting ceases.

Kamar next described many battles during which
chrononaut technology and that of the Aethiens was utilized
to defend both continents (Mu and Atlantis). Even though it
appeared on the surface that Atlantis was attacking Mu, in
reality, both civilizations were being invaded by the Lyrans.
This was a critical time in manâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s development because a
successful Lyran takeover of our planet 100,000 years ago would
cause numerous rifts in the space-time continuum and result in
many deleterious effects on us today and in the future.
Dr. G.:

What is going on at this time?

Jon:

Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s the most amazing yet depressing thing I have
ever seen.

Dr. G.:

What are you referring to?

Jon:

The electrical phenomena that characterize these
Electric Wars. We were briefed at the academy, but
witnessing it in person is another matter.

C8Chapter 17.pmd

238

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

A Future Life as a Time Traveler

239

Dr. G.:

Tell me what takes place.

Jon:

Various types of dimensional apparatus are set up
in a region and many electrical disturbances result.
Light flashes, lightning, and the bending of spacetime can be observed.

Dr. G.:

What happens next?

Jon:

Literally thousands of people, buildings, and other
structures, are dematerialized at one time.

Dr. G.:

This sounds very dangerous.

Jon:

It is. My group must spend most of the time in the
fifth dimension to protect ourselves. This is why many
time travelers have been killed on these missions.

Dr. G.:

Such as Traksa?

Jon:

Yes, and many other good men have been lost due
to these ridiculous wars.

Kamar, his men, and the Aethien and Ranthia emissaries were apparently successful in avoiding the fate of many
of their predecessors. Kamar described many technological
defenses that had to be utilized to fend off the Atlantean and
Lyran controlled attacks.
Eventually, things settled down and peace was established. The Ranthia initiated their preprogramming techniques on the citizens of both continents and most of the
Lyran damage was corrected.
Kamar returned home to Muvia to be assigned other missions and he will become a chrononaut with an excellent
record. Jon was completely shocked and amazed at this future life progression. I too gathered much additional information as to how chrononauts functioned and the true history
of our planet.
What was also fulfilling about this future life progression
was the corroboration of material I received from other patients,
in addition to my own communication with time travelers such

C8Chapter 17.pmd

239

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

240

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

as Traksa and Muat. None of this material appeared in print
or was discussed by me until 1998. You can utilize the future life progression script I present in Chapter 18 to see if
you will eventually come back as a chrononaut.
One final thing I noted from this and other experiences
with time travelers is that our current species Homo sapiens
and our primitive predecessors were the result of ETs seeding our planet and manipulating our respective DNA.

C8Chapter 17.pmd

240

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

241

Hypnosis Exercises

Chapter 18

Hypnosis Exercises

I do not like to tense or frustrate people by simply describing cases of past and future life experiences without teaching
them how to do it themselves. Try theses scripts to review your
own past/future lives. I highly recommend making tapes of
these scripts. For a list of professionally recorded tapes with
my voice, go to my Website (www.drbrucegoldberg.com) or send
me a self-addressed, stamped envelope to the address provided in the About the Author section of this book.

How to Begin
Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve included several exercises specifically designed to train
you to experience self-hypnosis. It doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t matter what your
background is.
You can accept or reject any of the principles and concepts presented here. Empowerment is vital. I stress that in my
Los Angeles hypnotherapy practice and in my personal life as
well. If you become rigid and stuck in your views, you become
trapped by your beliefs. You are no longer empowered because you are no longer free.
Always use your judgment and free will in trying these
exercises. Use the ones you feel comfortable with and ignore
the others. These exercises are all perfectly safe and have been

241

C9Chapter 18.pmd

241

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

242

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

tested for more than 25 years. You may create your own exercises from these models.
Read each exercise thoroughly to become familiar with it.
Use the relaxation techniques given or use your own. You
may practice alone or with others. I strongly suggest that you
make tapes of these exercises. Read the scripts slowly and leave
enough space on your tape to experience each part of the
procedure.
Practice once or twice a day, in 15- to 20-minute sessions.
In general, it is considered more effective to practice in the
morning, as it may provide a relaxing start for the entire day.
The more specific and realistic your schedule is, the better the
chances are that you will succeed.
You should choose a part of your day when you are at
your best. If you wait to practice until long after you get home
from a hard day at work, you might only practice going to
sleep. Self-hypnosis is most effective if practiced when you
are reasonably alert. Begin by picking a good time to practice.
If you wake up alert and rested first thing in the morning,
practice then, before getting out of bed. Take into account
whether or not you will be disturbed by spouse, lover, kids,
pets, and so forth. Choose a time when you are not likely to be
interrupted. Other popular times are before lunch or dinner.
Four components of successful self-hypnosis are:
1.
2.
3.
4.

A quiet environment.
A mental device.
A passive attitude.
A comfortable position.

When you enter into a self-hypnotic trance, you will observe the following:
A positive mood (tranquility, peace of mind).
An experience of unity or oneness with the
environment.
An inability to describe the experience in
words.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

242

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

243

Hypnosis Exercises
An alteration in time/space relationships.
An enhanced sense of reality and meaning.

If you experience difficulty with an exercise, do not become frustrated. Some techniques are quite advanced, and
you may not be ready for all of them. Return to the ones you
could not successfully work with at another time.
Practice these trance states when you have time and are
relaxed. Be patient. It takes time to master trance states and
to become accustomed to this new and wonderful world. No
one way is the right way to experience a trance. Your body may
feel light, or it may feel heavy; you may feel as if you are dreaming; your eyelids may flutter; or your body can become cooler
or warmer. All these possible responses are perfectly safe.
Because you will at first be unfamiliar with the techniques,
your initial practice sessions should run as long as you need. As
you become more proficient, you will be able to shorten these
sessions. Some days nothing may seem to work. Try not to
become discouraged. Remember that other days will be more
fruitful. Always work at your own pace and with an open mind.

Superconscious Mind Exercise
The following script will guide you to your superconscious
mind (Higher Self):

Now listen very carefully. I want you to imagine a bright
white light coming down from above and entering the top of
your head, filling your entire body.... See it, feel it, and it
becomes reality... Now imagine an aura of pure white light
emanating from your heart region, again surrounding your
entire body, protecting you.... See it, feel it, and it becomes
reality.... Now only your Higher Self and highly evolved, loving entities who mean you well will be able to influence you
during this or any other hypnotic session.... You are totally
protected by this aura of pure white light.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

243

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

244

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

In a few moments, I am going to count from 1 to 20. As I
do so, you will feel yourself rising up to the superconscious
mind level where you will be able to receive information from
your Higher Self.... Number 1 rising up. Two, 3, 4, rising
higher. Five, 6, 7, letting information flow. Eight, 9, 10, you
are halfway there. Eleven, 12, 13, feel yourself rising even
higher. Fourteen, 15, 16, almost there. Seventeen, 18, 19,
number 20, you are there.... Take a moment and orient yourself to the superconscious mind level.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR ONE MINUTE1
You may now ask yourself questions about any past,
present, or future life issue. Or you may contact any of your
guides or departed loves ones from this level. You may explore your relationship with any person. Remember, your
superconscious mind level is all knowledgeable and has access to your Akashic records.
Now, slowly and carefully, state your desire for information or an experience and let this superconscious mind level
work for you.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR EIGHT MINUTES
You have done very well. Now, I want you to further open
up the channels of communication by removing any obstacles
and allowing yourself to receive information and experiences
that will directly apply to and help better your present lifetime. Allow yourself to receive more advanced and more specific information from your Higher Self and masters and
guides to raise your frequency and improve your karmic
subcycle. Do this now.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR EIGHT MINUTES
All right now.... sleep now and rest. You did very, very well....
Listen very carefully. Iâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;m going to count forward now from 1 to
5.... When I reach the count of 5, you will be back in the present,
you will be able to remember everything you experienced and

C9Chapter 18.pmd

244

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Hypnosis Exercises

245

reexperienced. You’ll feel very relaxed, refreshed, and you’ll be
able to do whatever you have planned for the rest of the day or
evening. You’ll feel very positive about what you’ve just experienced and very motivated about your confidence and ability to
play this tape again to experience your Higher Self.... All right
now. One, very very deep; 2, you’re getting a little bit lighter; 3,
you’re getting much much lighter; 4, very very light; 5, awaken.
Wide awake and refreshed.

Past Life Regression
Use this script to perceive one or more of your own previous lifetimes:

Now listen very carefully. I want you to imagine a bright
white light coming down from above and entering the top of
your head, filling your entire body. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality. Now imagine an aura of pure white light emanating from your heart region, again surrounding your entire
body, protecting you. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality.
Now only your masters, guides, and highly evolved loving
entities who mean you well will be able to influence you during this or any other hypnotic session. You are totally protected by this aura of pure white light. Now listen very
carefully. In a few minutes, I’m going to be counting backwards from 20 to 1. As I count backwards from 20 to 1, you
are going to perceive yourself moving through a very deep
and dark tunnel. The tunnel will get lighter and lighter, and
at the very end of this tunnel, there will be a door with a
bright white light above it. When you walk through this door,
you will be in a past life scene. You’re going to reexperience
one of your past lives at the age of about 15. You’ll be moving to an event that will be significant in explaining who you
are, where you are, and why are there. I want you to realize that if you feel uncomfortable either physically, mentally, or emotionally at any time, you can awaken yourself

C9Chapter 18.pmd

245

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

246

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

from this hypnotic trance by simply counting forward from 1
to 5. You will always associate my voice as a friendly voice in
trance. You will be able to let your mind review back into its
memory banks and follow the instructions of perceiving the
scenes of your own past lives and following along as I instruct. You’ll find yourself being able to get into hypnotic
trances more deeply and quickly each time you practice with
this tape or other methods of self-hypnosis. When you hear
me say the words “sleep now and rest,” I want you to immediately detach yourself from any scene you are experiencing. You will be able to wait for further instructions.
You absolutely have the power and ability to go back
into a past life as your subconscious mind’s memory banks
remember everything you’ve ever experienced in all your
past lives, as well as your present life. I want you to relive
these past life events only as a neutral observer without feeling or emotion, just as if you were watching a television show.
I want you to choose a past life now in which you’ve lived to
at least the age of 30. I want you to pick a positive, neutral,
or happy past life experience. I’m going to count backwards
now from 20 to 1. As I do so, I want you to feel yourself
moving into the past. You’ll find yourself moving through a
pitch black tunnel that will get lighter and lighter as I count
backwards. When I reach the count of 1, you will have opened
up a door with a bright white light above it and walked into a
past life scene. You will once again become yourself at about
the age of 15 in a previous lifetime. Now listen carefully—
number 20, you’re moving into a very deep dark tunnel surrounded by grass, trees, your favorite flowers. It is very inviting
and you feel very calm and comfortable about moving into
the tunnel. Nineteen, 18, you’re moving backwards in time,
back, back, 17, 16, 15, the tunnel is becoming lighter now.
You can make out your arms and legs and you realize that
you are walking through this tunnel and you’re moving backwards in time. Fourteen, 13, 12, moving so far back, back,

C9Chapter 18.pmd

246

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

247

Hypnosis Exercises

back, 11, 10, 9, you’re now so far back—you’re more than
halfway there. The tunnel is much lighter. You can see around
you and you can now make out the door in front of you with
the bright white light above it. Eight, 7, 6, you are standing
in front of the door now, feeling comfortable and feeing positive and confident about your ability to move into this past
life scene. Five, 4, now walk up to the door, and put your
hand on the doorknob. The bright white light is so bright it’s
hard to look at. Three, open the door, 2, step through the
door, 1, move into the past life scene. Focus carefully on
what you perceive before you. Take a few minutes now, and I
want you to let everything become crystal clear. The information flowing into your awareness, the scene becoming visual and visible. Just orient yourself to your new environment.
Focus on it. Take a few moments and listen to my instructions. Let the impression form. First, what do you see and
what are you doing? Are you male or female? Look at your
feet first—what type of footwear or shoes are you wearing?
Now move up the body and see exactly how you are clothed.
How are you dressed? What are you doing right now? What
is happening around you? Be able to describe the situation
you find yourself in. Are you outdoors or indoors? Is it day or
night? Is it hot or cold? What country or land do you live in
or are you from? Now focus on this one carefully—what do
people call you? What is the year? Take a few moments.
Numbers may appear right in front of your awareness. You
will be informed of exactly what year this is. Take a few more
moments, and let any additional information crystalize and
become clear in your awareness about the environment that
you find yourself in as well as yourself. Take a few moments.
Let any additional information be made clear to you.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
Very good now. Listen very carefully to my voice now.
Sleep now and rest. Detach yourself from this scene just for a
moment. I’m going to be counting forward now from 1 to 5.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

247

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

248

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

When I reach the count of five, you’re going to be moving
forward now to a significant event that’s going to occur in this
lifetime, which will personally affect you. It will also most
probably affect those close to you—it may involve your parents, friends, and people who are close to you in this lifetime. I want you to move forward to a significant event, but
it’s also going to be a positive one. It’s going to be a positive
event. Focus carefully now. Sleep now and rest and listen
now as I count forward from 1 to 5. On the count of 5, you
will be moving forward in time to a significant positive event
that is going to occur to you. One, moving forward, slowly,
carefully, comfortably; 2, feeling good as you move forward
in time; 3, halfway there; 4, almost there; 5. Now again, focus on yourself and the environment you find yourself in.
What are you doing now and why are you in this environment? Has anything changed since I last spoke with you?
What is happening around you? Are there any other people
around you who are important to you? If there are, are they
male or female? Are they friends or relatives? How do they
relate to you? Why are they important to you? Focus on your
clothes now, starting with your feet first. How are you dressed?
Are you dressed any differently than when I last spoke with
you? Move all the way up your body and perceive how you
are dressed. Then look at the people next to you. Are they
dressed any differently? About how old are you now? Focus
on that for a moment. A number will appear to you. Where
exactly are you? Are you outdoors or indoors? Is it day or
night? What season is this? What kind of occupation do you
have? What do you do to pass the time? What do you do with
your day? Focus on how you spend your time. Now I want
you to focus on an event that’s going to be happening right
now that you find yourself right in the middle of. I want you
to take this event right through to completion. I want you to
spend a few moments and whatever this event is, I want you
to carry it through to completion. This will be a positive, or

C9Chapter 18.pmd

248

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

249

Hypnosis Exercises

happy, event only. Take a few moments and carry this event
through to completion.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
All right now, sleep now and rest. Detach yourself from
this scene that you are experiencing and listen to my voice
again. You’re going to be moving forward now by a period of
at least three years. It can be as long as necessary, but a
minimum of three years. You will not have died nor undergone any traumatic episode. It will be at least three years
further in time. Now I want you to move forward to a significant event that is going to affect not only the kind of work
you do, but also yourself personally. It will affect the way you
relate to certain people who are close to you, and perhaps
certain goals that you have. I want you to move forward to
this very significant time, which is going to be positive, neutral, or happy, and it will be at least three years from now. On
the count of five, move forward very carefully and comfortably. One, moving forward; 2, moving further forward; 3, half
way there; 4, almost there; 5. Now perceive what is around
you. What has transpired since I last saw you? Focus on
yourself first. Perceive where you are, how you are dressed,
what environment you are in, where you are located, if it is a
different physical environment, and who are you with. Take
a few moments and let this information crystalize and become clear into your awareness.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
All right now, sleep now and rest. Detach yourself from
this scene. We’re going to be moving forward again on the
count of five. This time, you’re going to be moving forward to
a scene that is going to signify or illustrate the maximum
achievements that you accomplished in this lifetime. This
scene will illustrate your maximum accomplishments personally or professionally. You’ll be surrounded by the people
that affect you most in this lifetime. You will be achieving the

C9Chapter 18.pmd

249

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

250

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

maximum amount of success, goals, or whatever else you
wanted to accomplish in this lifetime. Move forward to this
maximum accomplishment in this lifetime, on the count of
five. One, moving forward slowly, carefully, comfortably; 2,
moving further forward; 3, halfway there; 4, almost there; 5.
Now take a few moments and see where you find yourself.
What is your environment? What has happened, and why is
this time of your life so important to you? Focus on it, and
see what you’ve accomplished. Let all the information be
made clear to you.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
Now that you’ve been able to perceive this particular
period of your life, I want you to be able to evaluate your life.
I want you to find out what goals you were suppose to accomplish and what you actually did accomplish. What do you
feel you learned from this lifetime? What do you feel you
have gained from this lifetime, in your own personal goals,
family life, and relationships? Let the information flow. What
did you gain? Now let’s focus on what you weren’t able to
achieve. Focus on what you felt you would have liked more
time for. What do you feel you just weren’t able to accomplish and why? Focus on that. Let the information flow. Now
remember, in this particular lifetime, you are still alive. I
want you now to focus upon your activities, whatever you’re
involved with in this particular scene, to evaluate why this
lifetime was important to you. What necessary experience did
you gain from this lifetime? Focus on this now. Let the information flow into your awareness.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
All right now. Sleep now and rest. You did very very well.
Listen very carefully. I’m going to count forward now from
1to 5, one more time. This time, when I reach 5, you will be
back in the present, you will be able to remember everything
you experienced and reexperienced. You’ll feel very relaxed

C9Chapter 18.pmd

250

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

251

Hypnosis Exercises

and refreshed. You’ll be able to do whatever you have planned
for the rest of the day or evening. You’ll feel very positive about
what you’ve just experienced and very motivated about your
confidence and ability to play this tape again to experience
additional lifetimes. All right now, 1 very, very deep; 2, you’re
getting a little bit lighter; 3, you’re getting much much lighter;
4, very very light; 5, awaken, wide awake and refreshed.

Seeing Into the Future
It is rather easy to obtain a glimpse of the future when you
use time-tested self-hypnosis techniques. Try this future viewing exercise and follow it with my progression scripts:
1. Sit comfortably, apply white light protection,
and breathe deeply. Visualize a symbol for the
future. This may be a radio, book, or anything
you like. Mentally toss this symbol out into the
future, and perceive it broadcasting information
back to you about your future. Turn your recorder
on, and verbalize any information you acquire.
2. Ask your Higher Self to assist you in this exercise. Now, imagine that it is exactly one week
from today. See and feel what you are doing.
Let any images, thoughts, and feelings come into
your awareness. What is different about your life
at this future date? Record your impressions.
Let these images dissapear.
3. Now perceive it is one month from today. Ask
your Higher Self to further help you with this
step. What is it exactly that you are planning,
doing, and thinking? What has changed since
the one week information was given to you?
4. Follow these same steps and look at three
months, six months, one year, and five years into
your future. Investigate any issues you consider

C9Chapter 18.pmd

251

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

252

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

important in your life. Give yourself advice from
the perspective of these probable futures.
5. Ask your Higher Self to comment on your advice
and the accuracy of your probable futures.
Here are some questions to ask your Higher Self:
What can I emphasize in my life during the next
week (month, three months, etc.) that will facilitate my spiritual growth?
What specific decisions and choices can I make
right now to achieve my highest aspirations?
What behaviors, thoughts, and actions can I
implement to accelerate my spiritual path?
Think of a current situation in your life and ask,
“What am I learning from _________?”

Age Progression
This script guides you into the future of your present life:

Now listen very carefully. I want you to imagine a bright
white light coming down from above and entering the top of
your head, filling your entire body. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality. Now imagine an aura of pure white light emanating from your heart region, again surrounding your entire
body, protecting you. See it, feel it, and it becomes a reality.
Now only your Higher Self, masters, guides, and highly
evolved loving entities who mean you well will be able to
influence you during this or any other hypnotic session. You
are totally protected by this aura of pure white light. Focus
carefully on my voice as your subconscious mind’s memory
banks have memories of all past, present, and future events.
This tape will help guide you into the future and dream of a
future event today that will facilitate your spiritual growth.
Shortly I will count forward from 1 to 20. Near the end of this
count, you are going to imagine yourself moving through a

C9Chapter 18.pmd

252

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Hypnosis Exercises

253

tunnel. Near the end of this count, you will perceive a division in the tunnel, as the tunnel veers off to the left and to
the right. The right represents the past, the left represents
the future. On the count of 20, you will perceive yourself in
the future. Your subconscious and higher levels have all the
knowledge and information that you desire. Carefully and
comfortably feel yourself moving into the future with each
count from 1 to 20. Listen carefully now.
Number 1, feel yourself now moving forward to the future, into this very, very deep and dark tunnel. Two, 3, farther and farther and farther into the future. It is a little bit
disorienting, but you know you’re moving into the future.
Four, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, it’s more stable now, and you feel comfortable. You feel almost as if you’re floating, as you’re rising up
and into the future. Ten, 11, 12, the tunnel is now getting a
little bit lighter and you can perceive light at the end—
another white light just like the white light that is surrounding you. Thirteen, 14, 15, now you are almost there. Focus
carefully. You can perceive a door in front of you to the left
tunnel that you are in now. The door will be opened in just a
few moments and you will see yourself in the future. The
words “sleep now and rest” will always detach you from any
scene you are experiencing and allow you to wait further
instructions. Sixteen, 17, it’s very bright now and you are
putting your hands on the door, 18, you open the door. Nineteen, you step into this future to this future scene. Twenty,
carefully focus on your surroundings, look around you, see
what you perceive. Can you perceive yourself? Can you perceive other people around you? Focus on the environment.
What does it look like? Carefully focus on this. Use your
complete objectivity. Block out any information from the past
that might have interfered with the quality of this scene. Use
only what your subconscious and superconscious mind level
will observe. Now take a few moments, focus carefully on the
scene, find out where you are, what you are doing, and why
are you there. Take a few moments; let the scene manifest itself.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

253

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

254

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
Now focus very carefully on what year this is. Think for a
moment. Numbers will appear before your inner eyes. You
will have knowledge of the year that you are in right now.
Carefully focus on this year and these numbers. They will
appear before you. Use this as an example of other information that you are going to obtain. I want you to perceive this
scene completely, carry it through to completion. I want you
to perceive exactly where you are, the names, the date, the
place, and other details. I want you to carry these scenes to
completion, and follow them through carefully for the next
few moments. The scene will become clear and you will perceive the sequence of what exactly is happening to you.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
Youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve done very well. Now you are going to move to
another event. I want you to focus on a different event in the
same future time. Perceive what is going on and why this is
important to you. Perceive the year, the environment, and
the presence of others. Let the information flow.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
As you perceive the details of the next scene, focus also
on your purpose. Focus on what you are learning and what
you are unable to learn. Perceive any sequence of events
that led up to this situation. Let the information flow surrounding this all-important future event now.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
You have done very well. Now I want you to rise to the
superconscious mind level to evaluate this future experience
and apply this knowledge to your current life and situations.
One, rising up; 2, rising higher; 3, half way there; 4, almost
there; 5, you are there. Let your Higher Self assist you in
making the most out of this experience. Do this now.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

254

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

255

Hypnosis Exercises
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES

All right now. Sleep now and rest. You have done very,
very well. I’m going to count forward from 1 to 5. When I reach
the count of 5, you will be able to remember everything you
experienced. You’ll feel very relaxed, refreshed, and you’ll be
able to do whatever you have planned for the rest of the day or
evening. You’ll feel very positive about what you’ve just experienced and very motivated about your confidence and ability
to play this tape again to experience your future frequencies.
All right now. 1, very, very deep; 2, you’re getting a little bit
lighter; 3, you’re getting much, much lighter; 4, very, very
light; 5, awaken, wide awake and refreshed.

Future Life Progression
To experience your own future lifetime in reference to
contact with time travelers, or just to explore the centuries to
come, try this self-hypnosis exercise:

Now listen very carefully. I want you to imagine a bright
white light coming down from above and entering the top of
your head, filling your entire body. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality. Now imagine an aura of pure white light emanating from your heart region, again surrounding your entire
body, protecting you. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality.
Now only your masters, guides, and highly evolved loving
entities who mean you well will be able to influence you during this or any other hypnotic session. You are totally protected by this aura of pure white light. Focus carefully on my
voice as your subconscious mind’s memory banks have memories of all past, present, and future lifetimes. This tape will
help guide you into the future, the future of another lifetime.
I am going to be counting forward from 1 to 20. As I count
forward from 1 to 20, you are going to imagine yourself moving through a tunnel. Near the end of this count you will
perceive the tunnel dividing off to the left and to the right.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

255

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

256

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

The right represents the past, and the left represents the future.
You’re going to bear to the left, through the left tunnel, which
will take you into the future. On the count of 20, you will perceive yourself in the future. Your subconscious and
superconscious mind levels have all the knowledge and information that you desire. Carefully and comfortably feel yourself
moving into the future with each count from 1 to 20. Listen
carefully now. Number 1, feel yourself now moving forward to
the future, into this very, very deep and dark tunnel. Two, 3,
farther and farther into the future. Four, 5, 6, the tunnel is very,
very dark. It is a little bit disorienting, but you know you’re
moving into the future. Seven, 8, 9, it’s more stable now, and
you feel comfortable. You feel almost as if you’re floating, as
you’re rising up and into the future. Ten, 11, 12, the tunnel is
now getting a little bit lighter and you can perceive a light at the
end, another white light just like the white light that is surrounding
you. Thirteen, 14, 15. Now you are almost there. Focus carefully. You can perceive a door in front of you to the left of the
tunnel that you’re in right now. The door will be opened in just a
few moments and you will see yourself in a future life.
The words “sleep now and rest” will always detach you from
any scene you are experiencing and allow you to await further
instructions. Sixteen, 17, it’s very bright now and you are putting your hands on the door. Eighteen, you open the door, 19,
you step into this future, to this future scene. Number 20.
Carefully focus on your surroundings. Look around you.
Can you perceive yourself? Can you perceive other people
around you? Focus on the environment. What does it look
like? Carefully focus on this. Use your complete objectivity.
Block out any information from the past that might have interfered with the quality of the scene. Use only what your
subconscious and superconscious mind level will observe.
Now take a few moments, focus carefully on the scene, find
out where you are, what you are doing, why are you there.
Take a few moments, let the scene manifest itself.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

256

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

257

Hypnosis Exercises
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES

Now focus very carefully on what year this is. Think for a
moment. Numbers will appear before your inner eyes. You will
have knowledge of the year that you are in right now. Carefully
focus on this year and these numbers. They will appear before
you. Use this as an example of other information that you are
going to obtain. I want you to perceive exactly where you are,
who you are, the names, the date, the place. I want you to carry
these scenes to completion, follow them through carefully for
the next few moments. The scene will become clear and you will
perceive the sequence of what exactly is happening to you.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
You’ve done very well. Now you are going to move to
another event. I want you to focus on a different experience
in the same future life. Perceive what is going on and why
this is important to you. Perceive the year, the environment,
the presence of others. Let the information flow.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
As you perceive the details of the next scene, focus also
on your purpose—your purpose in this future life and how it
is affecting your karmic subcycle. Focus in on what you are
learning, what you are able to learn. Perceive any sequence
of events that led up to this situation. If you have any contact
whatsoever with time travelers, let the information flow surrounding this all important future event now.
PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
Sleep now and rest. You’ve done very well. Now I want
you to rise to the superconscious mind level to evaluate this
future life experience and apply this knowledge to your current life and situations. One, rising up; 2, rising higher; 3,
halfway there; 4, almost there; number 5, you are there. Let
your masters and guides assist you in making the most out of
this experience. Do this now.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

257

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

258

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

PLAY NEW AGE MUSIC FOR THREE MINUTES
All right now. Sleep now and rest. You did very, very
well. Listen very carefully. I’m going to count backwards now
from 5 to 1. This time, when I reach 1, you will be back in
the present, you will be able to remember everything you
experienced and reexperienced. You’ll feel very relaxed refreshed, and you’ll be able to do whatever you have planned
for the rest of the day or evening. You’ll feel very positive
about what you’ve just experienced and very motivated about
your confidence and ability to play this tape again to experience additional future life events. All right now, 5, moving
back in time; 4, move farther back; 3, half way there; 2,
almost there. Number 1, you are back in the present. I’m
going to count forwards from 1 to 5 and when I reach the
count of 5, you will be wide awake, relaxed, and refreshed.
Number 1, very, very deep. Number 2, you are getting a little
bit lighter. Number 3, halfway there. Number 4, very, very
light. Number 5, awaken.

Accessing the Akashic Records
We all have a fifth-dimensional chart of sorts that contains the memories of each of our past, present, future, and
parallel lives. This is referred to as the Akashic Records.
The experience of drawing upon the Akashic records often presents itself to your waking awareness in visual form,
accompanied by the more essential sounds. Occasionally, it
will be entirely auditory, as though someone were standing
close behind you, telling you what has taken place, or what
will take place in the future. The information you receive is
actually vibratory in nature, somewhat like the impressions on
a magnetic tape. The images you see or hear are all from your
own mind, channeled by your Higher Self, which actually taps
into your Akashic Records stored on a different dimension.
Each person makes the same vibratory contact, but realizes it
according to the experiences in his own image storehouse.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

258

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

259

Hypnosis Exercises

You can use this technique to access one of your or someone else’s past/future lives. Here is a public example of how I
applied this technique on network radio.
On Friday, March 24, 2000, I had the pleasure of being
interviewed by Peter Weissbach, who was subhosting for Art
Bell on the Premier Radio Network. Prior to the show, I discussed my Akashic Record scan technique and how it revealed Art’s past life in Atlantis approximately 50000 B.C. as
a geophysicist/quantum physicist named Drako.
Peter requested I repeat this technique and uncover one
of his past lives. I agreed and used my Access the Akashic
Records self-hypnosis tape at approximately 7 p.m. on March
24. It was very difficult to ascertain the data, but here is a
summary of what I reported:
1. Peter was a member of the British House of
Commons named Frederick Rash (Rashe or
Rasch). These three spellings of his last name
flashed before my eyes.
2. The years 1904, 1905, and 1906 also appeared.
3. Peter, as Frederick, was around 50 years old and
very ill with a flu. He couldn’t go to the House of
Commons and was very angry at missing these sessions. He obsessed with being there, but was unable to leave his residence.
4. Strangely enough, when he finally did return to
work, two of his colleagues commented on seeing him on the day he was ill and noticing him
seated in the wrong chair. When they separately
inquired about his health (he appeared rather
pale), Rasch didn’t acknowledge their presence.
My assumption was that Rash sent his astral body to the
House of Commons due to his obsessive thoughts about missing these sessions. This is referred to as a bilocation.
I deduced this was not a teleportation (the physical body
actually traveling from one location to another), because Rash

C9Chapter 18.pmd

259

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

260

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

did not respond to his colleagues. Teleporters easily converse
with others, whereas most bilocaters do not.
Being swamped with calls, e-mails, and faxes, I didn’t have
a chance to research this life until Monday, March 27. I found
a listing in Whitaker’s Almanac (London) from 1905 confirming that a F. C. Rasch was indeed a member of the British
House of Commons.
One of Art’s listeners informed me on Monday that he
read an article about Rasch in the Whig Standard Magazine of
Kingston, Ontario, Canada (ironically, Peter is originally from
Canada). He gave me the date of the publication (December
15, 1990), and I called the magazine to request a copy of the
article. They faxed me a copy, and it confirmed the fact that
Sir Fredrick Carne Rasch, a Unionist Member of Parliament
representing the Chelmsford Division of Mid-Essex since
1900, had indeed become ill with the flu and was noticed by
three members of the House of Commons (I stated two).
This case was reported originally in London’s Daily News
on May 17 and May 18, 1905. There is no way I could have
known these facts. According to the Whig Standard Report,
Rasch’s astral body was not seated in his usual place and no
other person (other than three colleagues) observed Rasch.
The three witnesses were Sir Gilbert Parker, Sir Arthur
Hayter, and Sir Campbell-Bannerman (who was elected Prime
Minister later in 1905). It isn’t often that I document a case of
reincarnation, but this is the first time I had one corroborated
on the air. Try my “Access the Akashic Records” script and do
this yourself.
1. Use any of the previous self-hypnosis or other
exercises to relax and apply white light protection. Lie down or sit in an easy chair. When you
are relaxed, turn your attention inward and center it on the area of the third eye. See it glow
with a golden white radiance and feel it pulsate
with energy. As you do this, your realization of
the sounds, colors, and temperature in the room

C9Chapter 18.pmd

260

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

261

Hypnosis Exercises

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

around you should gradually fade, and as they
do, the subtle psychic stirrings will become more
noticeable.
At first, this may be only an impression of inner
light, brilliantly illuminated geometrical figures,
stars shooting by in ordered procession, or some
other visual appearance, which will probably be
meaningless. Or your first impression may be of
sound, as I have previously described.
Focus your mind, not on the Akashic Records
themselves, but on a specific historical event for
your initial trials. For example, I suggest you
study first the discovery of radium by Marie Curie or the signing of the Declaration of Independence in 1776.
Your next step is to go to that historical event and
ask yourself: “What happened that afternoon?”
If you have properly prepared yourself, you will
find yourself drifting into a scenario-like dream.
In the earlier stages of your development, you
will not get clearly defined contacts that you can
recognize, so don’t expect them. Accept the
dream-like sequence that passes before your
consciousness as you sit in reverie. Remember
what you observe and write it down as soon as
possible thereafter.
During these practice sessions, you should “feel”
this connection between your waking consciousness and the Akasha. When this has been accomplished and you can recall an incident from
the past as simply as you can look up an account
in the encyclopedia, you are then ready to move
on to the next step.
Repeat the previous steps, omitting the preparation phase of reading about the historical
event.

261

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

262

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

7. Check your data with specialty books written
about that event in detail, not merely an encyclopedia summary.
8. After successful completion of this step, move
on to your own future. Begin with a short range,
say one week to a month. Log all of your observations into a journal and occasionally verify the
accuracy of your prophecies.
9. With a proven track record, you are now ready
to venture much farther ahead in time in your
current life. Try five years, 10 years, 50 years, and
so on.
10. You may move several hundred years into the
future and explore future lives.
11. Lastly, tap into the general Akasha and allow your
consciousness to tune into future world events,
inventions, lifestyle changes, and so on.

Soul Plane Ascension
A soul plane ascension is merely an advanced
superconscious mind tap. This dimension (the soul plane) is
where we select our future lives.

Now listen very carefully. I want you to imagine a bright
white light coming down from above and entering the top of
your head, filling your entire body. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality. Now imagine an aura of pure white light emanating from your heart region, again, surrounding your entire
body, protecting you. See it, feel it, and it becomes reality.
Now only your Higher Self, masters, guides, and highly
evolved loving entities who mean you well will be able to
influence you during this or any other hypnotic session. You
are totally protected by this aura of pure white light.
In a few moments, I am going to count from 1 to 20. As I
do so, you will feel yourself rising up to the superconscious

C9Chapter 18.pmd

262

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

263

Hypnosis Exercises

mind level where you will be able to receive information from
your Higher Self and your masters and guides. Number 1
rising up, 2, 3, 4 rising higher, 5, 6, 7, letting information
flow, 8, 9, 10, you are half way there, 11, 12, 13, feel yourself rising even higher, 14, 15, 16, almost there, 17, 18, 19,
number 20, you are there. Take a moment and orient yourself to the superconscious mind level.
PLAY ASCENSION MUSIC FOR ONE MINUTE
Now from the superconscious mind level, you are going
to rise up and beyond the karmic cycle and the five lower
planes to the soul plane. The white light is always with you
and you may be assisted by your masters and guides as you
ascend to the soul plane. Number 1 rising up; 2, 3, 4 rising
higher; 5, 6, 7, letting information flow; 8, 9, 10, you are
halfway there; 11, 12, 13, feel yourself rising even higher;
14, 15, 16, almost there; 17, 18, 19, number 20, you are
there. Take a moment and orient yourself to the soul plane.
PLAY ASCENSION MUSIC FOR ONE MINUTE
From the soul plane, you are able to perceive information
from various sources and view all of your past lives, your current lifetime, and future lives, including all of your frequencies. Take a few moments now to evaluate this data and choose
your next lifetime. Get a feel for the entire process.
PLAY ASCENSION MUSIC FOR SIX MINUTES
You have done very well. Now I want you to further open
up the channels of communication by removing any obstacles
and allow yourself to receive information and experiences
that will directly apply to and help better your present lifetime. Allow yourself to receive more advanced and more specific information from the higher planes this time. Your Higher
Self and masters and guides may assist you in receiving this
all-important information that will help you raise your frequency and improve your karmic subcycle. Do this now.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

263

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

264

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

PLAY ASCENSION MUSIC FOR EIGHT MINUTES
All right now. Sleep now and rest. You did very well.
Listen very carefully. I’m going to count forward now from 1
to 5. When I reach the count of 5, you will be back in the
present and on the Earth plane. You will be able to remember everything you experienced. You will feel very relaxed
and refreshed, and you will be able to do whatever you have
planned for the rest of the day or evening. You will feel very
positive about what you’ve just experienced, and very motivated about your confidence and ability to play this tape
again to experience the soul plane. All right now, 1, very,
very deep; 2, you’re getting a little bit lighter; 3, you’re getting much, much lighter; 4, very, very light; 5, awaken wide
awake and refreshed.

C9Chapter 18.pmd

264

2/3/2004, 12:22 PM

Conclusion

265

Conclusion

Death can be our best friend. It helps us to become aware
of the other worlds that are denied to us on the physical plane.
Death actually assists us in finding genuine happiness.
Skeptics still scoff and ridicule such notions. They declare
there can be no consciousness after the physical body dies.
The universe is comprised exclusively of material realities, and
without the physical organism, there can be no mind, no consciousness, and certainly no life after death. Near-death experiences are but hallucinations caused by reasons that may be
psychological, pharmacological, or neurological. It may be
impossible for such a thing as objective proof to ever actually
exist in matters of the mind and spirit.
It may be argued that anyone who has not died cannot
talk about death with authority, and because nobody apparently has ever returned from death (except near-death experiences), how can anybody know what death is, or what happens
after it?
Tibetans will declare there is not one person, not one
living being, that has not returned from death. In fact, we all
have died many deaths before we came into this incarnation.
What we call birth is merely the reverse side of death, like one
of the two sides of a coin, or like a door that we call “entrance”
from outside and “exit” from inside a room.

265

D0Conclusion.pmd

265

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

266

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

People in the West do not believe in rebirth because they
cannot remember their past lives and deaths. Nobody remembers their birth, but the average person does not doubt their
own presence in their current life. It is this dependence on the
ego (conscious mind proper) and not their use of the subconscious that is the problem.
I have conducted more than 35,000 individual past life
regressions and future life progressions on more than 14,000
individual patients. I can attest to the relative ease with which
anyone with a little assistance from hypnosis can access their
Akashic records and tap into these lifetimes.
Some of you may still have strong feelings of disbelief,
skepticism, and mistrust. Others may gain additional support
for their beliefs and hope for the future from reading this
book. My hope is that you keep your mind open. It is not
hypnotherapists who heal it is you who have the ultimate responsibility. Hypnosis allows you to expand and explore your
awareness and eliminate fear, anxiety, depression, and other
negative tendencies, as well as the fear of death. Hypnotherapy
is neither magic nor a panaceaâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;it is a way to help shape the
future. By creating your own reality with the knowledge from
your subconscious and superconscious minds, you can positively affect your present and future lives.
We sometimes forget that there is a God. God doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t
punish usâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;we punish ourselves. The soul always has free will.
We can choose to do good or evil, right or wrong. We choose
our future lives. Who would choose to kill, rape, steal, or cheat
if he or she realized the karmic implications? By learning to use
these principles to better ourselves, we are bettering the future for us all. The universe is connected by a linkage of the
consciousness of all souls.
This entire process will end when you fulfill your karma.
When you learn all the lessons you have to learn and show
kindness and unselfish love to all those with whom you come
into contact, the cycle will end. When it ends, you will go beyond the soul plane to the higher planes and reunite with God.

D0Conclusion.pmd

266

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

Conclusion

267

I would like to end this book with a discussion of the ascension process based on my 30 years of clinical research with
hypnotherapy.
Many people ask me to help them speed up their karmic
cycles so that they wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have to come back again. I canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t do
that. Only patients themselves can do that. They must be honest, truthful, and faithful to their own code of ethics. If they
follow this simple advice, they are well on their way to the
higher planes.
Our karmic cycles end when we fulfill our karma. When
we learn all the lessons necessary to show kindness and unselfish love to all those with whom we come into contact, our
cycles will end. When they end, we will go beyond the soul
plane to the higher planes and, eventually, to God. Karma is
merely a process of evolution, of achieving greater levels of
enlightenment.
Our true and only purpose is to perfect our soul and ascend to the higher planes to reunite with God, or whatever you
term the perfect energy that created our universe. So let us
discuss this all-important concept.
What I term ascension has been called many things. Some
describe this state as transcendence, nirvana, or bliss, while
Christians label this as the attainment of grace.
Within each of us resides a type of spiritual consciousness
that assists us in our path back to God, from which we came.
This can only be accomplished when our karma is eliminated,
and our soul reaches a state of perfection. You may be familiar with the physical realm of the universe around us, but there
are other levels of which you may not be aware.
These other planes or dimensions make up our karmic
cycle, including the physical world. They are both transient
and illusory. It is your inner world of consciousness, or soul,
that is true reality. Joy, peace, and love dominate this interuniverse, while sensations and various temptations steering
us from our path of spiritual growth are emphasized in the
physical realm.

D0Conclusion.pmd

267

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

268

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

These dimensions make up the lower five planes, or
karmic cycle. They are, in order of decreasing density of the
matter that comprises them, the physical, astral, causal, mental, etheric, and soul plane. It is on the soul plane where we
will eventually ascend to the higher planes and reunite with
God. Until that occurs, this realm is used to select our future
incarnations.
Becoming attuned to your soul is easy when your emotions and thoughts are quieted, as in the state of hypnosis.
You can now be prepared to receive that which is of God. As
you receive information from your Higher Self, a manifestation of love is felt all through your very being. Now you begin
to live free and in the moment. No longer are you hung up in
the past, or worried about the future.
All actions will be directed toward awakening your soul
from its Earth plane sleep to a far more enlightened level of
consciousness. Fears, prejudices, and judgments slowly disappear from your awareness as you evolve spiritually. The resulting expansion of this awareness will allow God to reveal the
truth once and for all to you. It will be like no other you have
read or thought of yourself. I call this the ultimate truth, which
we will discuss shortly.
By moving your consciousness into the soul and experiencing the pure wonders of the universe, your ability to learn
and forgive magnifies. This greatly facilitates your soul’s ability to prepare itself for its final movement—ascension to
God.
Even if you believe in reincarnation and God, the personal application of this paradigm as your time on the physical plane draws to a close, is most often associated with anxiety
and trepidation. Ascension removes you from the cycle of
birth and death, and allows you to enter the heavenly words
(“eternal now”) to join God. You do have the option of remaining on these lower planes as a guide, but free of the discomforts you currently experience.

D0Conclusion.pmd

268

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

Conclusion

269

The Ultimate Truth
It must always be remembered that we exist as a microcosm in a vast macrocosm of the universe. Only by allowing a
greater consciousness to penetrate our very being can we grow
spiritually and rise above the illusions of the physical plane
that hide the truth from us. The higher planes do not incorporate the duality and limitations that we accept in our daily
lives. This pure knowledge results in the purest and most concentrated form of ecstasy that man is capable of experiencing.
Usually this process of illumination is quite gradual.
Sometimes one first sees little flashes of light—they are
called”stars”—when a truth is spoken or when a new idea
strikes. These are gone in an instant, a fraction of a second.
Later, usually when at ease with the eyes closed, a broader
flash of brilliant light will appear, light very much like the
brightest sunlight. This too lasts but an instant, but when it is
repeated, it lingers a little longer each time. Slowly our inner
vision is developed and grace or ascension is then attainable.
The divine consciousness in everything is felt and observed on these higher worlds. By seeking the truth now
through very simple techniques, we can get a glimpse of this
hidden unity of the God force in everything. I train all of my
patients to accomplish this goal by way of hypnotic techniques
I term the superconscious mind tap and soul plane ascension,
which is an advanced type of superconscious mind tap.
The ultimate truth cannot be realized through philosophy,
religion, willpower, or mysticism alone. It is only when we allow
the perfect energy of God to manifest in us that we are placed
in a position to receive our truth. Each of us will formulate a
different truth based on our own experiences, level of spiritual
development, and exposure to higher levels of awareness.
Enlightenment is the term we apply when we receive this
truth. Fear is always at the top of the list of factors that impede spiritual growth. Almost everyone fears death, and this
tendency increases as we age. Many elderly patients of mine

D0Conclusion.pmd

269

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

270

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

initially describe their fear of death as entering a dark world,
where there is nothing but a black void.
The “truths” of the lower realms do not apply on the
higher realms. Each dimension has its own truth, which applies to it alone. These truths are always superseded by the
truths of realms beyond it. Truth as we perceive it during our
spiritual evolution is always relative to the ultimate truth.
To experience the truth we are seeking does not require a
renunciation of our physical life as we have established it. It is
only an alternation of the mind’s programming and the fears and
inhibitions that are consequences of society’s brainwashing.
Once we maintain this connection with our Higher Self,
then we can free ourselves from the tyranny of the belief that
causes outside ourselves affect us. Because consciousness is
spirit, the world we live in is an infinite number of consciousness. The worlds or planes beyond the physical are merely a
continuation of these countless levels of consciousness.
The process of both accessing and joining our Higher Self
leads to a recognition that we are never separated from the
God energy. Our Higher Self is an extension of this God energy that is at our disposal for advice, comfort, and spiritual
growth at any time we choose.

Psychic Empowerment
We can improve the state of consciousness we observe by
entering into a level of awareness we desire and becoming one
with it. This is our psychic empowerment, the ability to determine our own spiritual growth and perfection of our soul.
The principal of psychic empowerment can never be overemphasized. Spirit is the true underlying cause of all effects
we observe. We must eliminate dependency on any person,
place, thing, or paradigm that detours us from our spiritual
path. Our Higher Self is the inner force that will shape and
direct our lives in a manner allowing us to take charge of our
world and raise our consciousness simultaneously.

D0Conclusion.pmd

270

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

Conclusion

271

The Path to Ascension
In order to place yourself on the path to attain the state
of grace, there are certain things you need to do and to avoid.
First, you need to give up seeking God in the manner to which
you have been accustomed. It is neither necessary nor desirable to seek God actively. We are always in the presence of
the God energy (Higher Self), so we are only distracting ourselves by this artificial pursuit.
The process of attaining grace involves facilitating the
expression of our Higher Self through our soul. We are created in the image of God because the state of grace is our
natural destiny. This process consists of us functioning as a
channel for God through our Higher Self as a type of agent.
One of our purposes spiritually is to allow the grace of
God the opportunity to use each one of us as a vehicle for this
supreme consciousness. The reward for this is ascension, and
liberation of our soul from the wheel of birth and death is
karma.
Our Higher Self is composed of perfect energy. Ascension is actually the process of the merging of our subconscious
mind with its Higher Self. The conscious mind dies when the
physical body dies. Only the subconscious and superconscious
survive physical death.
The various masters and saints have known these principles throughout history. By expanding our consciousness
through altered states of consciousness (hypnosis, meditation,
yoga, etc.), our questions will be answered, and our souls purified. We all have this God-given talent to transcend the
material world and attain these realizations.

Chapter 17
1. Sumeria was one of the first civilizations. It was located
in present day Iraq and existed from 4,000 B.C. to about 2100
B.C.
2. Lemuria or Mu is the lost continent in the Pacific Ocean
equivalent to Atlantis in the Atlantic Ocean as an advanced
civilization from 200,000 B.C. to 11,000 B.C.

Chapter 18
1. A selection of New Age music is available from my
Website.

Dr. Bruce Goldberg holds a B.A. degree in biology and
chemistry, is a doctor of dental surgery, and has a M.S. degree in counseling psychology. He retired from dentistry in
1989, and has concentrated on his hypnotherapy practice
in Los Angeles. Dr. Goldberg was trained by the American
Society of Clinical Hypnosis in his techniques and clinical
applications of hypnosis.
Dr. Goldberg has been interviewed on such show as Sally,
Donahue, Oprah, Leeza, Joan Rivers, The Other Side, Regis
and Kathie Lee, Tom Snyder, Jerry Springer, Jenny Jones,
and Montel Williams, as well as by CNN and CBS news.
Through lectures, television, radio appearances, and
magazine and newspaper articles, including interviews in
Time, the Los Angeles Times, and the Washington Post, he
has conducted more than 35,000 past-life regressions and
future-life progressions since 1974, helping thousands of
patients empower themselves through these techniques. His
cassette tapes teach people self-hypnosis and guide them
into past and future lives and time travel. He gives lectures
and seminars on hypnosis, regression, and progression
therapy, time travel, and conscious dying; he is also a consultant to corporations, attorneys, and the local and network
media.

283

D4au bio.pmd

283

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

284

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed

His first edition of The Search for Grace was made into a
television movie by CBS. His third book, the award-winning
Soul Healing, is a classic on alternative medicine and psychic empowerment. Past Livesâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;Future Lives is Dr. Goldbergâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
international best-seller and is the first book written on future lives (progression hypnotherapy).
For information on self-hypnosis tapes, speaking engagements, or private sessions, Dr. Goldberg can be contacted
directly by writing to:
Bruce Goldberg, D.D.S., M.S.
4300 Natoma Avenue
Woodland Hills, CA 91364
Telephone (800) KARMA-4-U or (800) 527-6248
Fax: (818) 704-9189
E-mail: karma4u@webtv.net
Website: www.drbrucegoldberg.com
Please include a self-addressed, stamped envelope with
your letter.

D4au bio.pmd

284

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

285

About the Author

Other Books by Dr. Bruce Goldberg
Past Lives窶認uture Lives
Soul Healing
The Search for Grace: The True Story of Murder and
Reincarnation
Peaceful Transition: The Art of Conscious Dying and the
Liberation of the Soul

New Age Hypnosis
Secrets of Self-Hypnosis
Unleash Your Psychic Powers
Look Younger and Live Longer: Add 25 to 50 Quality
Years to Your Life Naturally
Protected by the Light: The Complete Book of Psychic
Self-Defense
Time Travelers from Our Future: A Fifth Dimension
Odyssey
Astral Voyages: Mastering the Art of Interdimensional
Travel
Custom Design Your Own Destiny
Self-Hypnosis: Easy Ways to Hypnotize Your Problems
Away
Dream Your Problems Away: Heal Yourself While You
Sleep

D4au bio.pmd

285

2/3/2004, 12:23 PM

286

Past Lives, Future Lives Revealed
FREE INFORMATION - SPECIAL SAVINGS
Learn More About the Full Line of
Mind / Body / Spirit Titles from New Page Books

To be a member of our New Page Books Club – and receive our catalog,
special savings, and advance notice on upcoming titles – send your name and
address to the address listed below. Or for fast service, please call 1-800-2273371 and give operator code 739. We look forward to hearing from you!
New Page Books, Dept. 739
www.newpagebooks.com
P.O. Box 687
Franklin Lakes, NJ 07417
Books subject to availability.